HP Photosmart R507 User Manual
HP Photosmart R5 0 7/R6 0 7 digital camer a w ith HP Ins tant Shar e User's M anual
Cop yright and T rademark Information © 2004 Cop yri ght Hewlett-P ack ar d D ev elopment Compa n y , LP Reprod uc tion, a dapt at ion, or t r a n s la tion wi th ou t prior writ te n per mission is pr ohib ited, e x c ept a s allo we d u nder the copy ri ght la w s. T he inf or mati on cont ained in t his doc ument is sub jec t t o change w ithou t noti ce . He wlett -P ac k ar d shall no t be lia ble f o r e rr ors cont ained her e in or f or con seq uent ial d a m ages in conn ecti on w it h the f urni shing , perf or mance , or u se o f this mate r ial . Mi cr o soft® and W indo ws ® ar e U . S. r egiste r ed tra demar ks of Microsoft Co rporatio n. Appl e®, M ac int osh®, and Mac® ar e r egister ed tr adem arks o f App le Comp uter , In c. Ar cSoft® is a r e gister e d tr ad emark of ArcS o ft , Inc. Pa n o ra m a M a k e r TM is a trad emar k of Ar cSof t , Inc. PE N T AX® is a r egiste r ed tr ademar k of P ENT AX Co rpor atio n. Mult iMe di aCar d TM is a tr ademar k o f Inf ineo n T e c hnologi es A G . SD logo is a tr adem a r k.
Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapt er 1: Getting St arted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Inst a llin g th e Ca mera Do ck In se rt (O pti on al) . . . 1 2 Attac hing the Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 In stalling a Mem ory Car d (Opt ional) . . . . . . . . . 13 In stalling the Batter y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Attaching the Ferrite to the AC Adapter Cord . . 15 Ch arging th e B attery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Tu rning on P ower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Ch oosing t he La nguage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Sett ing the Date an d Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 In stalling the So ftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Windo ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Mac intosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Use r Manu al on the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Cam era Part s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Ba c k o f the Camer a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 To p of th e Cam era . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Fro nt, Side, an d Bottom of the Ca mera . . . . . . . 25 Cam era States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Cam era Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using the Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Cam era Status Sc reen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9 Chapt er 2: T aking Pictures and Recording V ideo Clips . . . 3 1 Tak ing St ill Pic tures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Rec ord in g A udi o with Still Pictur es . . . . . . . . . . 32 Orien tat ion Se n s or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Rec ording Video Cl ips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using Live View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5
HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Focu sing the Cam era . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Using Auto Focu s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Using Foc us Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Using the Focus Ra nge Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Und er sta nd in g the Foc us Sea rc h Pri o rity . . . . . . .3 9 Using Zoo m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Op tical Zo om . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Digi tal Zoo m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Sett ing th e Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Using the S elf -Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Using the Burst Se tting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Using the S ho oting Mo des . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Pic ture Q uality for Long Exp osur es . . . . . . . . . . .47 Usin g Pan orama Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Taking a Panoramic S equence of Pictures . .49 Using the Captur e Me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Help for th e Me n u O ptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 EV Comp ensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Ima ge Qu ality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Cus tom I mage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 White Balan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Man ual White Balanc e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 IS O Spe ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 AE Meteri ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Adap tive Lig hting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Col or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Satu ration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Sh arpne ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Date & Tim e Impr in t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Chapt er 3: Review ing Images and Video Clip s . . . . . . . . . 6 9 Using Pla yback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Tot al Ima ge s Su mmar y Scre en . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 2 Sel ecting Images for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Viewin g Thumb nails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Magn ifying Imag es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Using the Playba ck Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Dele te . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Rem ove Red Ey es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Ima ge Ad vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Ima ge I n fo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Rec ord Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Rotat e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 4 Pr eview P anora ma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Chapt er 4: Using HP Ins t ant Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 Setting Up the HP Instant Share Me n u on the Cam era . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Setting Up Destinations o n a Windo ws Co mpute r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Setting Up Destinations o n a Mac intosh Comp uter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9 Using the HP Instan t Sha r e Me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Sele cting All Imag es fo r HP Instan t Share Destina tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Se lec ti ng I ndi v idu al Imag es fo r HP Instan t Share Destina tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 How HP In stant S h a r e E -mails I mages . . . . . . . . 94 Chapt er 5: T r a nsferr ing and Printing Ima ges . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7 Tr ansfer ring I mages to a Compute r . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Prin ting Pa n or amas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Prin ting Pa noram as fr om Pan orama Make r . . . . 99 Pr inting Pa noram as fr om H P Image Zon e . . . . 100 Prin ting Ima ges Dire ctly fro m the C amera . . . . . . . . 100
HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Chapt er 6: Using the S etup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3 Cam era Sound s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Live View at Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Date & Tim e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 USB Config urat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 TV Conf iguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Lan guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Mov e Im ages to Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Rese t Setting s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Chapt er 7: T roubleshooting and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 Rese tting the Came ra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Using Yo u r Cam era without Instal ling the HP Image Zon e Softw are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13 Tr ansfer ring Ima ges to a Co mput er wi thou t HP Image Zon e Softw are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14 Using a Mem ory C ard Reade r . . . . . . . . .1 14 Con fi gur ing t he Ca me ra a s a Dis k Dri ve . .11 7 Prob lems and Solutio ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Err or M essage s on th e Ca mera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Err or M essage s on the Comp uter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Cam era S elf -diagn ostic T ests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 43 Gettin g Ass istance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 HP Accessib ility Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 HP Photosm art We bsite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Su pport Proce ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Pho ne Su pport in the U nited Sta tes . . . . . . . . . .1 46 Pho ne Suppo rt in E urope , the Mid dle Ea st, and Afr ica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 47 Oth er Phone Suppor t Worldw ide . . . . . . . . . . .149
Appendix A: Managing Batterie s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 To p Points A bout B a tteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Ex tending Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Safety Precautions for Using Lithiu m Ion Batter ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Ba ttery P erfor mance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Num ber of Shots per Ba ttery Ch arge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Ba ttery Ga uge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Rec harging the Lith ium Ion B attery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Safety Precautions for Recharging Lithiu m Ion Batter ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Sle ep Ti me-o ut for Power Con servatio n . . . . . . . . . 160 Appendix B: Purchasi ng Camer a Ac cessorie s . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1 Appendix C: S peci ficat ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 5 Memo ry Ca pacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 11 C hapter 1 : Get ti n g St ar ted Co ngr atulati ons o n y our pur ch ase o f this H P Photo smart di gital cam er a! This cam e ra ha s many featu res t o enhanc e yo u r pi ct u r e -ta ki ng e x per ience, in cludi ng HP Adaptiv e Lightin g T ech nol og y , in-came r a r ed-e y e r em ov al , 8 sh ootin g mod es ( i ncl u d i ng P a noram a ) , H P I ma g e Advice, HP In st an t Sha r e TM , direct printing cap abili t y , ma nual an d automatic c ontr ol s, on- cam era Help , an d a n optional ca m er a dock. Wi t h HP I n st an t Shar e , y ou can ea sily se lec t image s in y our cam e r a to b e autom at ica lly sent to your fa vo r i te dest in at ions (such as e -ma il a ddresses and onli ne al bums ) the ne x t t ime y ou connect t he came r a t o y our com pute r . Y our fr iends and f amil y ca n ea si ly r ece iv e and v ie w y ou r p ic tu r e s in e-m ail w ith ou t bein g bur d ened b y la rge f ile at ta chment s. And with the direct pr inting capab il ity , y ou can ea sily sel ect imag es in y o ur cam era to b e automa tic ally pr in te d the next tim e you con ne ct the camera to y our computer or dir e ctly t o an y HP Photosmart pr int er or P ictB r idg e -c ompat ible printer without ev er con nec ti ng to you r c omp uter . T o further enha nce y our e xper ience , y ou may pur chase an HP Phot os mart R - s e rie s d o c k . Th e c a m e ra d o c k a l l o w s y ou to e asily t r a nsfer i mag es to a computer , s end imag es to a pr i nt er or t ele visi on , an d r ec har ge the cam er aâ s bat ter y pl us a sp ar e. The dock a lso pr ovi des a conv en ient home for y our cam e ra .
12 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Setu p NO TE T o loc ate a part on your c am er a (s uch as a but ton or a li ght) w hile f ollo win g the instr uc tions in this s ecti on , se e Came r a P art s on p age 21. Insta llin g t he C am era Doc k Ins ert (O ption al) If you buy the HP P hotosmart R -seri es dock , you w il l noti c e one or mor e cl ear doc k inserts inc lude d in the bo x w ith the do ck . W hen s etting up th e do ck fo r u se with th is camera , make su r e you u s e the dock i nser t that has t he BL UE sti ck er on it . F ol low the i nstructions in t he dock User â s M anual to co nnect the dock in sert to t he cam era dock. At ta c hin g th e W rist Strap A t t ach the w r ist str a p to the m ount on the s ide of the ca mera as s hown.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 13 Insta llin g a Mem or y C ard (O ption al) NO TE I f y o u d o n o t h a v e a m e m o r y c a r d , s k i p t h i s s e c t i o n a n d go on to the n e xt section, In sta lling th e Batt ery on page 1 4. Y our ca mer a con tain s internal memor y that al lo ws yo u to stor e imag es a nd video cl ips. How ev er , y ou c an use a m emory c ar d (pu r c has ed se par ate l y) inst ead to s to r e im ages a nd vi deo clip s . F or mor e in for mat ion about su ppor ted memor y ca r ds, see Storag e on p age 16 7. When y ou inst all a memor y car d in the c amera , all ne w ima ges and v id eo c lips ar e s to r ed on t he car d . T he camer a âs inter na l memory is only used when ther e is no memor y car d in the c a me r a. 1 Hold th e cam era with th e bot tom facing u p , a s sho w n , and sli de th e Batte r y/ Me mor y c ard do or l atch to o p en th e Batter y/M emor y ca r d door . 2 W ith the bac k o f th e came r a fa cing up , in ser t the memor y ca r d in th e smalle r sl ot w ith the not ched si de o f the car d go ing in f ir st , a s sh o w n. Mak e su r e t he m emo ry card snaps into pl ace. 3 Leave t he Bat tery/ M emor y ca r d door op en and go on to the next section , In stalling the Battery on p age 1 4. T o r emo ve the memor y c ar d fr o m the camer a, f irst tu rn th e ca mer a o ff . T hen ope n t he B atte ry /Me mo ry car d d oor , pr ess do w n on t he top edg e o f th e me mory car d , an d it w il l sp r ing out war d fr om t he slot .
14 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Insta llin g t he B at ter y Y our came r a u ses a r e c har gea ble HP Pho tosm art R 0 7 l ithium ion batter y (L1812 A ) . NO TE T he batte ry that w as shipped w ith y our cam er a is par tia l ly char g ed, but y ou s hou ld fully cha r ge it befor e u sing it the fi rs t time . Y ou ca n char ge the batte ry w hile it is in t he c amer a . S ee Char g ing the B at tery on page 16 . 1 If the B at tery/M emor y c ar d door i s al r eady open, skip this st e p and go o n t o s te p 2 . Hold the c a mera wi th the b o ttom facing u p , a s sho w n , and sli de th e Batte r y/ Me mor y c ard do or l atch to o p en th e Batter y/M emor y ca r d door . 2 In se rt t he ba tte ry i n t he l ar ge r s lo t as s hown , a nd push i t i n u ntil th e latch c atche s. 3 Close the Bat tery/ Memor y c ard door o n the b ottom of the ca mer a b y pushi ng the do or down unti l it snaps closed. T o remove the bat ter y fr om the ca m era , first t u rn th e ca me r a off . T hen op en the Bat tery/ M emor y card door , r ele ase the batt ery lat ch , tilt the camer a, and the batte ry wi ll slide ou t of its slo t .
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 15 At ta c hin g th e Ferrite to t he A C Adap te r Cor d A f er r ite is include d in the b ox w ith y our camer a . Th is f er r ite p r e v en ts y our came r a fr om emit ting ra d io f r equency ener gy that might inter fer e with the reception of y ou r r adio , tele vision , or other electr onic dev ices w hic h m ig ht be near the camer a . Th e f er r ite w i ll not degrade the per fo rmance or sa fety of the camera . Attach th e ferr i te to th e thi n HP A C adapter c ord ( the cord tha t atta che s to the came r a , not the co r d that atta che s to the w all) in the fol lowing wa y: 1 W rap the cord ar oun d the fe rri t e s o t h a t t h e c o rd passes t hr oug h the ferr i te three ti m es ( as sh o wn her e ) . 2 Adj ust the cord so that the e dge of the fer r it e is 10 c m ( 4 in ch es ) from th e e nd of the c on ne cto r that c on ne ct s to the camer a (or camer a dock ) . 3 Close the fer r i te so that it snaps snugly int o place ar ound th e c or d .
16 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l C h arging t h e B at ter y NO TE T h i s s e c t i o n t e l l s h o w t o c h a r g e a b a t t e r y i n t h e c a m e r a . Y ou can also c har ge th e batt ery in the e x tr a batte ry ba y o f the c amera dock or i n the HP Photosmar t Qu ic k Re ch a rge r ( s e e Appendix B: P u r chasing Camer a Ac c es s or ie s on p age 161 ) . 1 P lu g the p ow er c ord into the HP A C ad ap ter . If mor e than one pow er cor d is in the box , use the co r d that i s appr opr iate f or p o wer ou t lets in your c ountr y . P l ug the other end of the pow er cor d into an elec tr ical outlet . 2 Ope n th e s mal l ru b ber door on th e side of the camer a. 3 Attach th e thi n c or d fr om the A C adapt er t o the pow er a dapter co nne ctor on the side of the camer a as sho wn .The P ow er l ight on the top o f the ca mera will sta rt blinki ng to s ho w th at the b atte r y is c har ging. The r e ch argeable li thi um ion bat ter y will us ual ly char g e fully i n 4 -6 ho urs . Wh en the P o w er li ght stop s blinking , the ba tte r y is fully charged , and you ca n then unplug the p o wer ad apter f r om the cam er a . Y ou can con tinue to us e the camer a whil e the bat ter y i s bei ng ch ar g ed b y th e po wer adapter . NO TE T he camer a ma y get w ar m wh il e it is cha rg ing the bat tery , as well as af ter pr olon ge d use under b att ery po we r . T his is no rm al .
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 17 NO TE Digit al c ameras use ba tteri es at a muc h faster r ate than f il m came r as . Battery lif e in di gital cam er as can be measu red in hours and m inutes of use rather tha n the y ear s mor e typ ica l o f f ilm came r as . Batte ry l if e ma y a lso v ar y dr am ati call y f r om on e u se r to ano the r , d epe nding o n w hat modes the came r a is b ein g us ed in mo st f r equen tl y . F or hints on optimi zing battery perf ormance , see Appendi x A: Mana ging Batter ies on pa ge 151. Tu r n i n g o n Po w e r T ur n the camer a on by slid ing the ON/OFF swi t ch t o t h e ri g h t a n d t h e n re l e a s i n g i t. The lens exten d s a nd th e P ow er l ight on the top of the c am era tur ns on soli d gr een . Choo si ng the L angu age T he f ir st time y ou tur n the c ame r a on , the f ollo w ing sc r een appea rs and pr ompt s y ou to choose a la nguage. 1 Scr ol l to the la ng u ag e th at you wan t by us i ng t h e buttons on the Contr oll er . 2 Pr es s the Me n u/ O K button to sele ct th e high l ighte d lan gua ge. NO TE If y ou nee d to chan ge t he lang uag e la ter , you c a n do thi s wi t h t he Lan gu age setting in th e Se tu p men u . See Chapter 6: Using the Setu p Men u on p age 103.
18 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Set tin g t he Da te an d Time The ca mera has a clock t hat r ec or d s the da te an d t ime at w h ich y ou t ak e each pi ctur e. This inf or mati on is r ecor ded in th e imag e pr o perties, whi ch yo u can se e when v ie wing the image in th e Im age Inf o scr een (p age 81) , i n the Pl ay b a c k menu scr een ( p age 7 5 ) , or on your computer . Y ou c an al so choose t o have the date and ti me imprinted on the visi bl e imag e ( se e Dat e & T ime I m pr in t on page 6 7) . T he f irs t time y o u tur n the camer a on , a Dat e & T ime screen appe ars af ter you choose the la nguage, pr ompting y ou to set the date an d ti m e . 1 Adjust th e val ue of th e h i g h l ighte d se lecti on u sing the bu ttons . 2 Press the but ton s to move to th e o ther sele ct ion s. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 u ntil the co r r e ct date/t im e format , da te , and time ar e se t . 4 Pr ess the Me n u /O K button whe n you have entered t h e proper values for the da te and time. A confirmatio n scree n appe ars, asking if the cor rect date and time have been s et. 5 If t he da te a nd ti me ar e c orre ct , pr es s t he Me n u/ O K button to se lect Yes . If th e d ate an d time ar e incor rect, pr ess the bu tto n to hig h li g h t No , an d th en p r ess t he Me n u/ OK butto n. The Dat e & T ime screen appe ars aga i n. R epe at ste ps 1 th r ough 5 to se t th e correct date an d t im e. NO TE If y ou ne ed t o ch ang e the d ate an d time s etting s la te r , y ou can do t h is w ith the Da te & T ime setting in t he Se tu p me nu . See Chapter 6: Using t he Setu p M enu on page 1 03.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 19 Insta llin g t he Sof t w are T he H P Im age Z one so ftw ar e al lo w s y ou t o tr ansf er ima ges f r om t he cam er a , an d th en v i e w , edit , p r int , o r e- mail th em . It also a l lo ws y ou to c o nf ig ur e t he HP In sta nt Sh ar e menu on the c a me r a. NO TE If you do not in sta ll th e H P I mage Zone s oft war e, y ou can stil l use the cam er a , but cert ain features w i ll be af fected. F or deta ils, s ee Using Y ou r C am er a w ithou t Instal ling the HP Im age Zone S of t w a r e on page 1 13. Win dow s In or der for the HP Imag e Z on e soft w are to in stal l s ucc essful ly on y our W i ndo w s computer , y ou mu s t hav e insta lled at least Inter net Explor er 5 . 01 on Windo ws 2000 or XP , or Inte rnet E x p l o rer 5.0 1 S e r vic e P a c k 2 o n Wi n d o ws 98 , 98 S E, or M e . 1 Cl o se all pr ogr ams and tem por a r ily dis abl e an y v ir u s pr otecti on softwar e r u nning on y our comp uter . 2 In sert the HP Ima ge Z one so ftw ar e CD int o th e CD dr i v e of y our computer . F ollow the in structions in the inst allat ion scr een t hat automat ica lly appe ars. NO TE If the insta llat ion s cr e en does not appear , clic k Sta rt , cl ick Ru n , t ype X: \Setup .e x e , wher e X is the letter o f y our CD dri ve , then c l ick OK . NO TE If you ha ve tr ouble i nstal l ing or using the HP Im age Z one soft war e, see the HP Cu stomer Supp ort w ebsi te: w w w . hp . com/s uppor t f or mor e i nformation .
20 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Mac intosh 1 Cl o se all pr ogr ams and tem por a r ily dis abl e an y v ir u s pr ot ection soft war e r u nning on your compute r . 2 In se rt the HP Im ag e Z one s oftw ar e CD int o th e CD dr i ve o f y our computer . 3 Doub le - cl ick th e C D ico n o n th e compu ter de sk to p . 4 Double - clic k th e i nst aller icon, and then f ollow th e on -s cr een in struct ions to in stal l t he sof t ware . NO TE Be fo r e y ou can tr ansf er im age s f r om th e came r a t o y ou r M a c i ntos h c omput er wi th th e H P I mage Z on e so f tw ar e , or t o tak e ad v an tage o f the HP Inst ant S har e f uncti onal it y , y ou m u st f ir st chan ge the US B C on figu r at ion se tting to Disk Dr i ve on t he ca mer a. See Chapter 6 : Using the S et up M e nu on page 1 03. NO TE If you ha ve tr ouble i nstal l ing or using the HP Im age Z one soft war e, see the HP Cu stomer Suppor t websi te: w w w . hp . com/s uppor t f or mor e i nformation . Us er Ma nua l o n the C D A copy of this cam er a User â s M anual in se ver al di ffer ent lang uages i s loc ated on the HP Image Z one soft war e CD . T o v ie w y ou r camer a Us er âs Man ual: 1 In se rt the HP Im ag e Z one s oftw ar e CD int o th e CD dr i ve o f y our computer . 2 Click Vie w Us e râs M a nua l on the Main p age of the CD in stal lat ion scr e en to vi ew th e Userâs M a nual.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 21 Camer a P arts NO TE Ref er to the pa ge s in p ar en theses af ter the pa rt nam e s f or m or e inf or mati on abou t tho se parts . Back of th e Ca me r a # Name Des cr ipti on 1V i e w f i n d e r (pag e 31) Al lo w s y ou t o f r ame t he s u b jec t of y ou r pict u res or vide o cl i ps. 2V i e w f i n d e r l i g h t s z solid r e d â V i d e o i s re c o rd i n g. z AF soli d gr een â When you press the Shutter button ha lf way down, this ligh t tur ns on soli d when the camer a is r eady t o t ake a pi ctur e (a uto e xposur e and au to f oc us ar e lock ed, and the f la sh is re a d y ) . z AF blinki ng gre en âE it he r a f oc u s w a rning occurr ed wh en yo u pr es sed the Shutter button ha lf way down, the flash is still c har ging , or t he camer a is pr ocessi ng a picture (see the follo wing NO T E) . 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 1 13 12 14 15 2 3
2 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual z Bo th an d AF bl inking âAn err o r has oc cur r ed that pr e vents th e ca mer a fr om tak ing the p i ct ur e (s ee the f oll o w in g NO T E). NO T E If an er r or pre vents a pi ctur e fr om being tak en , then a n err or message w ill appear on the I mage D ispla y . See Err or Messages on the Camer a on pag e 130. 3 ON/OFF sw it ch ( page 1 7) T urns the camer a po wer o n and o ff . 4 Zoom le ver (pag e 40) z Z oom O ut âWhile t akin g stil l pict u r es , z o o ms ou t th e len s to th e wide angle po sition . z Thu m b n a i l s âWh il e i n P lay bac k , allo w s yo u to v ie w still images and the f irs t f r am es of v i deo c lips ar r anged in a matr i x of nin e thumbn ail images per s cr een . z Z oom In âWhil e taking still p ic tur es , z ooms in the lens to th e teleph oto positi on . z Ma gnify âW hil e i n P lay bac k , all o ws y ou to magnify a still ima ge. 5 W r ist stra p mount (pag e 12) Al lows you to at ta ch a wrist s t r ap to th e camera . 6M e m o r y l i g h t z B li n k ing rapidly âCamer a is w ritin g to either the i ntern al memo ry or to an opti onal me mory car d tha t is instal led. z Off âCamer a is not wr iting to eit her the inter nal memory or to an opti onal memory car d that is ins tall ed . # Name Des cr ipti on
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 2 3 7 Controll er w it h an d buttons Al lows you to scrol l th roug h me nus a nd images on th e Image D ispla y . 8 Men u/ OK bu tton (pag es 50, 7 5 ) Allows y o u to di sp lay th e Captur e an d P l a yback menu s and to sel e ct men u options and conf ir m c ertain acti ons on the Imag e Disp la y . 9 Pr int button (pag e 7 2 ) A l l ows yo u to m a rk th e c u rre n t i m a g e for pr inting l ater w h en y ou connect the camera t o your comp ute r or dire ctly to an y HP Photo smart pr inte r or P i ctBri dge - compatible p r inter . 10 HP I nst an t Shar e button (pag e 85) Tu r n s t h e HP Ins tan t Sha r e menu on and off on the Image Displa y . 11 P lay back button ( page 7 0) Tu r n s Pl ay b a c k on and off on the Image Displa y . 12 Liv e V i ew button (page 3 5 ) Tu r n s Li ve V i ew on a nd off on the Image Displa y . 13 Imag e Displ ay (pag e 35) Allo ws y ou t o fr a me pi ctur es and v ideo clips u sing Live Vi ew and r e vi ew them af t erw ar d in Pl ay b a c k , and to v i ew all the me n u s . 14 Ti m e r / Bur st button (pag es 43, 4 5) Allows y o u to se le ct b et wee n Nor mal , Se lf- Ti m e r , Se lf- Tim er - 2 S hots , and Bur st settings. 15 Fl as h button (pag e 41) Allow s y ou to select between the differ ent f lash settings. # Name Des cr ipti on
24 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l T op o f t h e C amera # Name Desc r iption 1 Speaker P la ys camera sounds and a ud i o clips . 2 Mod e bu t ton (page 4 5) Allo ws y ou to s elect bet w e en differ ent shooting modes for t a king still pi ctur es. 3 Ma c r o button (page 38) Al lows you to se l ec t be t we en th e Ma c r o , Super Mac r o and Nor mal set tings. 4 Sh u tt er button (pages 31, 3 2) T a ke s a pi ctur e and r e cor ds audio . 5 P o wer light ( Ar ound the Shutter butt o n.) z Sol id â Came ra is on . z Blink ing sl ow l y âCamer a is off and is char ging the battery . z Off âC ame r a i s o ff . 6 Vid e o bu t to n (page 3 4) S t arts an d st ops r e co r d ing a v i deo c li p . 6 4 1 2 3 5
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 25 Fr ont, Si d e, an d B ot tom of t he Ca mer a # Name Desc r iption 1F l a s h (pag e 41) Pr o vi des additional light to imp ro ve pict u re - tak i n g. 2 Self-T imer lig ht (p ag e 43 ) Bl ink s red when th e Self - Timer is acti v ated . 3M i c r o p h o n e (p ag e 3 2 ) R e co r ds s o un d (a u di o an d v i de o). 4 US B connect or (pag es 9 7, 100) Allo ws y ou to connect a USB cable fr om the camer a to a U SB -enabled compute r or pr int er . 5 Po w e r adapter connector (pag e 16) Allo ws y ou to connect the HP A C pow er adapter to the cam er a to either operat e the camer a with out a battery , or r e char ge the lithium ion r echar geable b att er y in the camera . 6 7 8 1 4 5 2 3
26 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l Came r a St ate s Y our camera has t wo main s tates that a llow y ou to complete certa in task s. Each of t hese states has a n ass ociated me nu th at y ou c an use to ad ju st c a mer a s et ti ngs or per for m tasks i n th at state. See Cam er a M enus on page 27. Capt u r e â Allow s you to ta ke stil l pi c tures and record v ide o clips . F or inf orma tion a bout us ing Capt u r e , se e Chapter 2: T akin g P i ctur es an d R ecor ding V ide o C lips on page 31 . Pl ay b a ck âAll o w s y ou to r e v ie w t he s till im age s and v i deo cli ps th at you capt u r e . F or in for m ation about usi ng Pl a yb a c k , see Cha pte r 3: R ev ie w ing I mage s an d V ide o C lips on page 6 9. 6 Camer a dock connect or (p ag e 1 6 2) Allo ws y ou to connect the cam er a t o the optional HP Phot osmart R -ser ies dock . 7 T r ipod mount Allo w s y ou to mo u nt the cam e ra on a tr ipo d . 8B a t t e r y / M e m o r y car d door (pag es 13, 14) Allo ws access t o insert and r emov e the batter y and an optional memory card . # Name Desc r iption
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 2 7 Camer a Menus Y our came r a h as fi v e men u s th at , w hen acce ssed , app ear in the I ma ge Dis play o n the b ack o f the c am era . Whe n an y m enu is disp la ye d, y ou can then a ccess the ot her menu s by u sing the menu tabs at the top of the scr e en . T o di splay anoth er m enu , u se the butt ons to mo v e to the men u tab f or that me nu . To d i s p l a y t h e Capt ur e M enu , pr ess the Li ve Vi ew bu t t on t o tur n Live Vi ew on , t hen pr ess the Me n u / OK bu tto n . A sh ort c ut is t o simp l y pr ess the Menu /OK but ton when Live Vie w i s off . F or i nformation about u sing t his menu , see Us ing t he Captur e M enu on page 50. To d i s p l a y t h e Pl a yb a c k M e n u , pr ess the Pl a yb a c k b utt on t o tur n Pl ay b a c k on , an d th en p r ess t he Men u/OK but ton . F or in for mat ion about using this m enu , se e Us in g t h e Pl ay b a c k M e n u on pa ge 7 5.
28 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual To d i s p l a y t h e HP Inst an t Shar e Men u , pr ess the HP Ins tant Shar e butt on . F or inf o r mati o n about using this m enu , se e Us in g t h e HP Inst ant Sh ar e M enu on page 90. NO TE Bef or e y ou can use the HP Inst ant Sh ar e Me nu , y o u mu st f ir st set u p the me nu . F or inf orma tion on ho w to d o this, see Sett ing Up the HP In stan t Shar e M en u on the C ame r a on page 86. To d i s p l a y t h e Set u p Me nu , f ir st acce ss e ither the Captur e , P l a ybac k , or HP Inst an t Shar e me nu , t hen us e the butt on s to move to th e menu tab for the Set u p Me nu . F or inf orm atio n a b out u sing the Setup Men u , see Chapter 6 : Usin g the Setup Menu on p age 103. To d i s p l a y t h e Help Men u , f irs t acce ss e ither the Captur e , P l a ybac k , or HP Inst an t Shar e me nu , t hen us e the butt on s to move to th e menu tab for the Help Men u . For inf orm atio n a b out u sing the Help Men u , see th e next se ct ion.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 29 Using t h e Help M enu The Hel p M enu pr o vi d es hel pful i nformation and ti ps for us i n g you r c a me ra . 1 Use the but ton s to mov e acr oss the me nu tabs to th e Help M enu tab . The Hel p M enu displ a y s in t he Image D isplay . 2 U se t he bu ttons t o hi ghligh t the Help to pi c y ou w ant to read. 3 Pr es s the Me n u/ O K button to di splay th e He lp topic. 4 Use t h e butto n s to scr ol l th r oug h the H elp to pi c to re a d i t. 5 Pr ess t he Me n u/O K but ton to e xit th e Hel p to pic a nd return to th e Help M enu . C a m e ra S ta t us S c ree n A stat us scr e en app ea rs f or a f ew sec onds in the Ima ge Displ ay an y time you pr ess the Mode , Fo c u s , Fl a s h , or Ti m er /B u rs t but tons when Live Vi ew is o ff . As sho wn in the e x a mple her e , a te x t de sc r ipti on of th e c ur r en t se t tin g f or the button that was j ust pr esse d app ears at the top of th e scr een. B ene ath t hat , ic ons for th e curr ent s hoot in g mo de, Fl a s h , Fo c u s , and Ti m er /B u rst setting s ar e sho wn , w ith the ico n f or the butt on that w as j u st pr essed hig hligh ted . T he botto m por tion of the scr een show s wh ether a me mor y car d is i nsta l le d (in dica ted b y the SD ico n), th e ba ttery l e ve l , t he num ber o f p ic tu r es r emaining , and the Im age Quality setting (indi cated in t he e x amp le b y t he 4MP and tw o star s ) .
30 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 3 1 C hapter 2 : Ta k i n g P i c t u r e s a n d Reco rdin g Vi de o C lips T akin g Still P i c tures You can take a picture almost any time the camer a is on , rega rdle ss o f what is being s hown on the Imag e Di splay . Fo r exam ple, if a men u is cur rently display ed whe n you pre ss the Shutter button, the menu will b e canceled, and the camera will take a pictu re. To tak e a s till pictu r e: 1 Fr ame t he su bje c t for your pic tu re in t he v iewfi nder. 2 Hold th e ca mera ste ady (espe cially if using zoom) a n d pre ss the Shutter button o n the to p of t he c ame ra ha lfw ay d own. T he came ra m easures and th en lock s the focus and expo sure (th e AF viewf inder l ight turn s on solid gr een w hen focus is lock ed - see Usin g Aut o Foc us on pag e 36 for deta ils). 3 Pr ess th e Shutter button all the wa y down to tak e the picture. You will hea r a shutter click whe n the camera takes the pictur e . After a pi ct ure is ta k en, th e ima ge app ea rs for seve ral sec on ds on the Im age Di s play . Thi s is c alle d In st an t R e v i e w . Y ou c an delete th e image during Instant Re v ie w b y pr es sing the Men u/OK but ton .
3 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Yo u c a n u s e Pl ay b a ck to r e vie w the pi ctu r es yo u hav e tak en (se e Us i n g Playba ck on page 7 0) . NO TE If you r ele ase the Shutter button only hal fwa y after t aking a p i ctur e , th e f oc us , e xpo sur e , and white bal ance measu rements f r om the pr ev iou s pi cture ar e r etai ned. Y ou can then p r ess the Shutter but to n a ll th e way down agai n an d tak e an oth er p ic tur e w ith th e same f oc u s, e xpo sur e , and whi te bala n ce as t he pr e vious picture . Y ou c an conti nue to do th i s to capt ur e a sequence of p ictu res u s ing t he sa me f ocu s, e xpos ur e , an d w hite bala nce . T his is helpful whe n r api d ly tak ing pictures . Recordin g Audio wit h S till P ic tures Ther e are two wa ys to at ta ch an audio cli p to a sti l l pi c ture: ⢠Add an audio clip to the pictu r e later , or r e- r e c or d the audio that w as captu r ed when the p ictu r e was t a ken . F or deta il s on how to do thi s, se e Re c o rd Au d i o on p age 8 3. ⢠R ec or d th e a u dio wh il e y ou ar e t akin g th e p ic tur e , as e x plai ne d i n thi s sect ion. Y ou w i ll not be able to use this me thod if the came r a is in Pa n o r a m a mo de , or when us i n g t he Se lf - T im er or Burst setting s . An a udio cl ip can be up to 6 0 seco nds lon g . 1 Pr es s the Shu t te r but ton al l t he way down to take the pictu re . 2 Co nti nu e to ho l d th e S hu tter but ton down to r e cord the au dio c lip . A mi cr op hone ic on ( ) an d a udi o cou nte r appea r on the Im age Disp lay during r ec or d ing. 3 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g au d i o, re l e a s e t he Shutter button .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 33 A udi o r ecor din g st op s w hen y ou r el ease the Shut ter butto n; ot herwis e, the audi o w ill contin ue r ecor ding f or up to 60 secon ds o r u n til th e camer a r uns o ut o f mem ory , w hic he v er happen s first . After r ec or d in g has stop pe d , the ima ge i s disp la ye d fo r se v er al seco nds in In stant Re vie w on the Image Di splay . Y ou c a n delet e the image an d the audio clip that is att ach ed to the i mag e duri ng Ins tant R e v ie w b y pr essi ng t he Menu /OK but ton . Yo u c a n u s e Pl ay b a ck to re view t h e a ud io cl i ps you ha ve re c o rd e d. S e e Us i n g t he Playba ck M enu o n p ag e 7 5 . T o d el e t e o r re c o rd a n ew a u d i o c l i p, u s e t h e Re c o rd Au d i o option in the Pl ay b a c k menu . See Re c o rd Au d io on p age 83. O rienta tion Sensor An elec tr o -mec hani cal de vi ce in th e came r a de te rmin es w het her the ca mer a i s bei ng held hor i z ontal l y or vertically w h en a st il l pictur e is taken . The c am er a uses the data fr o m thi s sens or to autom atic a l ly r ota te the i mage to i t s prope r orientat ion when saving th e f i le. NO TE Y ou can als o man uall y r ota te stil l images using the Ro t a t e opt ion in the Pl ay b a ck M e n u . Se e R ota te on page 8 4. NO TE The o r ient at ion senso r is dis ab le d whe n th e c a mera is in th e Pa n o r a m a s hoot ing mod e .
34 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Record in g Vid eo C lips NO TE Z o om does not w or k whil e r e cor ding vi deo clips . T her ef or e , yo u ma y wan t to z oom f ir st bef or e starting to re c o rd a vi d e o c l i p. A video clip inc ludes audio. 1 F r a me t he subject f or y ou r vi de o in the v iew fi nder . 2 T o s tart r ecor ding v ideo , pr es s and re l e a s e t h e Vide o bu tton , which is lo ca ted o n top of th e cam er a. T he Vi d eo vie wfinder li gh t and the Self - Time r ligh t tur n on sol i d r ed . A â vi deo st art â s oun d is play ed an d, if Live V iew is o n, a v ide o icon, RE C , and a v i deo coun t er a ppe ar o n t he Image D ispl ay . (S ee Using L i ve Vie w o n pa ge 3 5.) 3 T o stop r e c or di ng v ide o , pr es s and r eleas e the Video button ag ain ; oth er wise , the vi de o will c ontin ue r ecordin g u n t i l t h e c a m e ra ru n s o u t o f m e m or y . NO TE If y ou ha ve se t the camer a t o Self- Timer or Sel f- T i mer - 2 Shots (see Using the Self - Timer Settings on page 43) , t h e c a m e ra wi l l s t a r t re c o rd i n g 1 0 s e c o n d s a f t e r y o u p re s s the Video bu t to n . H owever , wi t h t h e Se lf - Timer - 2 Shots s e t t i n g, t h e c a m e ra o n ly re c o rd s o n e vi d e o c l i p. After recor d in g has sto ppe d, the image appe ars fo r se ver al secon ds on the Image Disp lay . Whil e it is pr o ces sing , y ou can delete th e v ide o cli p by pr es s ing the Me n u/ O K bu t ton. Yo u c a n u s e Pl ay b a ck o n th e c a mera to r evie w th e vide o cl ips yo u h a ve re c o rd e d.
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 35 Usi n g Liv e Vi e w T he Im ag e Disp la y al lo w s y ou t o f r ame p i ctur es an d vi d eo c lips us i n g Live V iew . T o a cti v ate Live Vi ew fr om the menu s or w hen t he Im age Dis pla y is of f , pr ess t he Live Vi ew button. T o t u r n o ff Live Vi ew , press the Li ve Vi ew button again. NO TE Us in g Live V iew consum es a lot o f batte ry pow er . T o conser ve batt er y pow er , use the vi ew f inder ins tead. The follo wing table describes the i nformation tha t is disp lay e d in th e Live V i ew sc reen of the Image Disp lay wh en the c amera se tting s ar e at the ir d ef a ult v alue s and an opti on al me mory car d is instal led in th e camer a . If y ou c hang e othe r came r a se ttings , ic ons f o r th ose s ettings w ill als o be d ispl ay ed in th e Live Vi ew scr e en . # Icon Desc r ipti on 1 Indi cate s that a mem ory c ar d is instal led in the camer a 2 or z Bat tery le vel when us ing ba tter y power (actual ic on shown depe nds o n t he st ate of your ca mera batt er y ; see B attery G auge on page 15 6) z A C pow er when us ing the HP A C pow er ada pte r or opt iona l H P P hotosm a r t R -s e r ies d ock 2 3 4 1 5
36 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Fo c u s i n g t h e C a m e r a Using Au to F ocus The focus br ackets in the Li ve Vi ew scr een s ho w the foc us r eg ion f or the pictur e y ou ar e taki ng or the vi deo clip y ou ar e re c o rd i n g. ( S e e Using L i ve V ie w on p age 35 .) W he n y o u pr ess the Shu t ter b ut t o n h a l f way d own, t h e c a m era u se s z o n e s w ithin this f oc us r egio n to au toma tical ly mea sur e and then lock the fo c us. The AF v ie w f i nder light turns on solid gr e en and one or mor e pai rs of green f o cu s z one br ackets appea r in the Live View scr een when the i mage i s i n focu s and t he ca mer a can lo ck the fo cus . H oweve r , t h e AF vi ewfinder light bli nk s gr een a nd the focus br ackets in Live View t urn re d w h en t h e c a me ra i s u n a bl e to focus. 3 12 Remaining pi ctur es coun t ( actual number depends on ho w much space r emains in memory) 4 4MP Ima ge Q uali t y setting (de fault is 4MP ) 5 F oc us br ack ets (see Us i n g Aut o F o cus on page 3 6) # Icon Desc r ipti on
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 3 7 z If the AF v iew f in der l ight bli nks g r een a n d the focu s br ack et s t u rn re d , re l e a s e t h e Shutter b u t t o n , re - fra m e t h e s u b j e c t fo r y our pict ur e or vi de o cli p , and th en pr es s the Shutter button h a l f way do wn a g a i n. I f t h e AF viewfi n de r l ight c o nt i n ue s to bli nk green a nd th e focus brac kets co ntin ue to t urn r e d after se v er al tr ie s, the r e ma y no t be eno ugh con tr as t o r li ght in t he focu s r egion. T r y us ing a tech nique ca ll ed Fo cu s L o c k to focu s on an obje ct about t he sa me dist anc e aw ay but in a hig her -con tr ast r egio n , and the n, w itho ut r elea sing t he Shutter butt on , po in t the came r a at t he o bj ect yo u w e r e or igina lly t r ying to phot og r aph ( see Us i n g Focus Lock on pag e 38 ) . Y o u can a lso simpl y tur n on mor e l igh t , if th at is possi ble. z If t he AF v ie w f in der li ght bl inks gr een , the f oc u s br ack ets tur n r ed , and e it her the Ma c r o icon or the Super Mac r o bl inks in t he Live Vi ew scr e en , one of th e f ollo wing is tr ue: ⢠T he camer a is set t o the Nor mal F ocu s ran ge but dete cts the f oc us is c lose r than the no rm al r ange . T he camer a wil l n ot tak e a p ict ur e if it cann ot f ind f oc u s. ⢠The c a mera i s s e t to th e Mac r o (c lo se-up ) fo cu s r ange b ut dete cts the f o cus is closer or farth er aw ay t han the Mac r o r ang e . I n this case , th e camer a w ill no t tak e a p i ctur e if it canno t f ind foc u s. ⢠T he camer a is set t o the Sup er Macr o (supe r c los e-up ) f oc u s r an ge bu t det ects t he f oc u s is far th er a w a y than t he Super Macr o ra n g e. I n t h i s c a s e, t h e c a m e ra wi l l n o t t a ke a pi c ture if it ca nn ot find focu s.
38 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual U s i ng F o cu s L o ck Fo c u s L o c k all ow s y ou t o f ocu s on a su b jec t th at is n ot in t he center of the picture , or to c aptur e action s hots mor e quickl y b y pr e-foc u sing in t he ar ea w her e the ac ti on w ill oc c ur . Y o u can also use Focus Lo ck to hel p achie ve f o c us i n lo w light or low con tr as t situati ons. 1 F rame the s ubject f or y ou r pic t ure w ithin the focu s br a ck ets. 2 Pr ess th e S hu tter but ton ha lf wa y down to lo ck the fo c us and ex p os u re. 3 Cont i nue to h old the Shu t ter button h alf wa y dow n whi le you r e -fr ame or adjust your s ubj e ct for pr op er pos it ioning . 4 Pr es s the Shu t te r but ton al l t he way down to take the pictu re . Usin g t h e F oc us Ran g e Set tin g s The Mac r o bu t to n le ts y ou t ogg le be t w een thr ee f oc us sett ings on the c amera . The f oll o wing t ab le descr ibes ea ch of t he f oc u s r an ge se tting s on th e came r a: Setting Desc r ipti on Nor mal F ocu s Use when tak ing pictur es of subjects gr eater tha n 0.4 m (16 in) a w ay . A ut o fo cu s is limited t o a r a nge o f 0.4 m (16 in) to inf init y . T his is the de fault focus set t in g. Mac r o Use when taking clo se -up pic tu r es of subj e cts less t han 0.4 m (16 in) a w ay . In this setting , the c amer a w ill not tak e a pi ctur e if it cannot fin d foc us (the AF v ie w f inder ligh t blinks gr een and the f ocu s br ack ets t u rn re d i n t h e Li v e V i ew sc r ee n). A u to f oc u s ha s a dis tanc e r a ng e of 0.18 m to 0. 5 m ( 7 to 20 in) .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 39 Und erstand ing th e Focus Searc h Priorit y When the ca m er a is set to Nor mal F oc u s or Mac r o fo cu s, i t be g i n s s e a rch i n g for fo cus fr o m t h e la s t fo cus po s i t io n. How ev er , y ou can use the bu tto ns to ch a nge th i s behavio r . This feature is usef ul when t here ar e mult ip le objects at di ffer ent di stan ces i n the foc us region. z Ho ldi ng t he bu tt on w hil e pr essi ng t he Sh utter ha l f way do w n cau se s the cam er a to begin sear ching fo r f oc us f r om the f arthest positi o n (inf init y in Nor mal F oc u s , 0.4 m in Mac r o , an d 0.18 m in Su pe r M ac r o ), thu s making the cam er a mor e l i k ely to f o c us on a n ob j ect in the back g r ound. z Ho lding th e bu tton w hile p r essing the Sh utter halfw ay do w n cau se s the cam er a to begin sear ching fo r f oc us f r om the ne arest p osi tio n ( 0. 4 m i n Norma l F o c u s , 0. 18 m in Mac r o , an d 0. 06 m in Super Ma cr o ), t h u s m ak in g th e c a m e ra m o re l i ke l y t o fo cu s o n a n o b j e c t i n t h e fo re g rou nd . Supe r Ma cr o Use when taking clo se -up pic tu r es of subj e cts less t han 0. 18 m ( 7 in) aw a y . In this s etting , the camer a w ill not tak e a pi ctur e if it cannot fin d foc us (the AF v ie w f inder ligh t bl inks gr een and the f ocu s br ack ets t u rn re d i n t h e Li v e V i ew sc r ee n). A u to f oc u s ha s a di sta nc e r a ng e of 0.06 m to 0. 25 m (2 .5 to 10 in ) . Setting Desc r ipti on
40 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Usi n g Z oo m NO TE The mor e y ou zoom in on t he sub ject of your p ictur e , the more th at ev en sma ll mov ements of t he cam er a are ma gnif i ed ( this i s cal led â came r a s hak eâ ) . So , es pec ia ll y at f ull t ele ph o to z oom ( 3x), y ou r e all y n eed t o ho ld the cam era steady in order to take a pi c ture that is not blurr y . If an icon of a s hak in g ha nd ( ) appea rs i n the Liv e Vi ew scr een, y ou should set the c amera on a tr ip od or stable sur f ace; o th erw is e , th e pi ctur e w ill lik el y b e blur ry . O ptical Zoom NO TE Opti cal z o om d oes no t w or k w hile r ecor ding v i deo clip s or whil e in Su pe r M ac r o focus ra ng e . Op tica l z oom w or ks lik e th e z oom o n a tr adi tio nal f ilm came r a , w i th phy s i ca l lens element s mov ing ins ide t he ca mer a to m ak e the subject of y our pictur e app ear closer . Pr es s Zo o m O u t an d Zo o m I n on the Zo o m l ev e r to mo ve the lens bet ween w ide ang le (1x ) an d teleph oto (3 x) pos it ions. Dig ital Z oom NO TE Digital z oom does not w ork while shooti ng p anor a mic ima ges , w h ile r ecor ding v i deo cl ips, or w hile in Su per Mac r o fo cus ran g e. Unli ke optical z o om , dig ita l z oom uses n o mo ving lens pa rts. T h e came r a e ss en ti all y c r op s t he im age to gi v e an a p pear an ce of the subject of the pic t u r e being an add it i o nal 1.1 x to 7x larger . 1 Pr ess th e Zo o m I n on the Zoom l e ver to optically z o om i n t o t he m ax im um le v e l , th en r elea s e th e b utt on .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 4 1 2 Pr es s Zoom In ag ain and h old it until you r ea ch the desir ed s i z e in t he Im ag e D ispl a y . A y e llo w f r a me sur r ounds t he a r ea o f the im age that w i ll b e c aptured . T he re s o l u t i o n numb er on the r ight sid e of the screen al so be comes sm al ler as y ou di g itall y z oom . F or e x am ple , 3. 2 M P app ea rs in plac e of 4M P , indi cating tha t the imag e is be ing r educed to a si ze of 3 . 2 Me gapix el s. 3 W hen t he y el lo w f r ame is at th e desir ed si z e , pr ess th e Shutter but to n to ta ke the pi ct u re . T o turn d igital z oom off and r et u r n to optica l z oom, pr ess Zoom Out on the Zoom l e ve r un ti l dig ita l z oomi ng stops. Release Zo o m O u t , and then pr ess it aga in. NO TE D i g i t a l zo o m re d u c e s t h e re s o l u t i o n o f a n i m a g e, so y ou r picture will tend to be more p ix i lated th a n the sam e im ag e ta ken with opt ica l zoom. I f you just in ten d to e- m ai l an ima ge or po st it to a w eb site , th is loss o f r es oluti on w ill n ot be n oti ceabl e , bu t in situ atio ns w her e the highe st qu ality coun ts (suc h as pr inting), limit the u se of di gital z oom . It is also r ecomme nde d to us e a tr ipod w hen u sing digita l zoom . Set tin g t h e F l ash NO TE The f las h do es no t w ork in Pa n o r a m a mod e , w ith the Burs t setting , o r while r ecor ding v ideo c lips . The Fl a s h bu tton l ets y ou c y cle thr ough the fla sh se t ting s on th e came r a . T o chang e the f lash setting , pr ess th e Fl a s h bu tton until th e de sir ed setting a ppear s in the Imag e Disp la y . The follo wing tabl e describes each of the flash set ti ngs on the c a me r a.
4 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual NO TE If y ou c han ge t he fl as h setting , th e cam er a w ill r ema in in th at se tting un til y ou c han ge it o r tur n o ff the camer a . W hen y ou tur n t he came r a on a gain , f las h r ese ts t o th e defa ul t Auto Flash setting . Hold ing do wn the Me n u/ OK bu tto n whe n y ou tur n the camer a ba ck on w ill r es t or e t his se tting to w hat it w as w hen y ou tur ne d it of f . Setting Desc r iption Auto Flas h Th e cam era measu res ligh t and u ses the flash if nece ssary. Re d -E ye T he c ame r a me as ur es l igh t an d u se s th e fl ash w it h r ed-ey e r ed ucti on if ne cessar y (see t he fol low ing NO TE f o r a de sc r iption of r e d-e ye r e duction). Fl a s h O n Th e cam era alway s flashe s. I f the light is behind your subje ct, you can use this setting to increa se the light on the front of y our subje ct. This is called âfill-flash .â Fl a s h O f f The camera w ill not f lash , no mat ter the lighting conditions . Nig ht The camer a f ir es the f lash if necessar y (u s ing r ed-e y e r educti on) to illuminate obj ects in the fo r egro und . It then continues t o ex p ose as if the flash had not f ire d to gather the back g r o und (see the f ollow ing NO T E f or a descr iption of r ed- e ye r e ductio n) . A A
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 43 NO TE The r ed-ey e phenomenon is cau sed b y l ight f r om the fl as h r eflecting of f the s ub jectsâ e yes, which s ometim es makes a humanâs or ani mal â s e yes appe ar r e d i n the capt ur e d imag e . When you u se a flash sett in g with re d - eye re d u c t i o n, t h e c a m e ra fl a s h e s t w i c e, m i n i m iz i n g t he r ed-e y e in t he ca pt ur ed ima ges of h u ma ns o r anim als . It wil l ta ke lo ng er to ta k e a pictu r e us i ng red - e ye r educ ti on , beca us e the sh utt er is del a y ed f or t he ad ditio nal f la sh . In tu rn , ma k e sur e y o ur su b jec ts w a it f or the s ec on d flash. NO TE Y ou c an r em ov e r ed e y es f r om h uman s ub j ects in stil l im ag es th a t you h ave ta ken usi n g t he Rem ove Re d E yes option in the Pl ay b a ck M e nu (see pa ge 80). Usin g t h e Self - T im er Set tin g s 1 Secur e the ca mera to a tripod or set it on a s table surface. 2 Pr ess th e Tim er / Bu rst button until Self - T imer or Self- Timer - 2 Shots appe ars in the Imag e Dis pla y. 3 Frame the subject in either the viewfinder o r in Li ve Vi ew . (See Using Live View on p age 3 5 . ) 4 Th e next steps dep end on whether you ar e capt uring one or two s till pi ctur es , or ar e r ecor ding a v id e o cl ip . F or Still Pic tures: a. Pr ess th e Sh utter button h alf wa y do wn to gai n Fo c u s Lock (the ca mer a m eas ur es and then lo cks th e focu s and e xposur e) . Th e camer a will ho ld the se setting s u n til it ta k es the pi c tu r e.
44 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual b. Press the S h utter but ton all the wa y down . If the Im age Di splay is on , a 10 -se cond cou ntdo wn appea rs on the scr een. T he Sel f- Tim er light on the fr ont o f the ca mer a then bl in k s for 10 se co nds before the ca m er a ta kes th e p ic tur e . If you se t the camera to Se lf - T ime r - 2 Sh o ts , the Se lf - T imer li ght bl inks f or a fe w mo r e se conds un til the second picture is tak en. NO TE If you immediate ly press the Shutte r button all the way down with out using Focus L ock , the camer a will lock focu s and e xposur e just be fore the en d of the 10 -second co untd own. T his is us eful wh en one or more subje cts wi ll be en te ring the pictu re during the 1 0-second countdown per io d. NO TE Y ou ca nno t recor d audio with a st il l pictu r e when usin g the Self- Timer s ett in gs, but you c an add a n aud io cl ip later (se e Re c o rd Au d io on pa ge 83) . F or Vid eo C lips: T o s t a r t re c o rd i n g vi d e o, p re s s t h e Vid e o bu tto n an d then r elease i t . If the Im age Di splay is on , a 10 - second countdo wn appea rs on the scr een. T he Sel f- Timer light on th e front of t h e c a m e ra th e n b l i n k s fo r 1 0 s e c o nd s b e fore t h e c a m e ra s t a r t s re c o rd i n g t h e vi d e o. NO TE W ith e ithe r the Self- Timer or the Se lf - Timer - 2 Shots se tting, onl y one vi deo c lip is r ecor ded af te r the 10 - secon d countdo wn . T o stop r ec or di ng the v ideo cl ip , press the Vid e o but ton ag ain; othe r w ise , the v i deo will con tinue r ecor d ing until the camera runs out of memory .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 45 Usin g t h e B urst S et tin g NO TE The Burst setting do es not w or k in Pa n o r a m a mode, nor w hile r ecor d in g vi deo clip s. Y ou also canno t r ecor d au dio w h en using th e Burst set t in g , b ut y ou ca n add an audio cl ip lat er (s ee Re c o rd A u d io on p age 8 3). Als o , the f lash do e s n ot work wh i l e us i n g t he Burst set t ing. Burst al low s you to ta k e appr o ximately 5 sti l l pi ct ur es in a r ow as quickly as th e c a mer a p ossi bly c a n . 1 Pr es s the Ti m e r / B u r s t bu t t on until Bur st appears in t he Ima g e Di spl a y . 2 F rame the s ubject an d pr ess the Sh utt er bu tto n all th e w a y dow n a nd hol d it . The c am er a takes a p pr ox i mately 5 pi ct u r es as quickly as poss i ble unti l th e Shutter button is re l e a s e d. T he I mage Disp la y r ema ins o ff du r ing the ca ptu r e . A fter the burst pi c tur es have been ta k en, each image appe ars one at a time on the Imag e Disp lay . Us ing the Shoo ting M o des NO TE The shoo ting mode does not apply when you ar e re c o rd i n g vi d e o cl i p s . Sho oting mo des ar e p r e-de f ined ca mer a s ettin gs t hat ar e optimiz ed fo r taki ng pi ct ur es o f certa in scene t ypes to giv e you be t t er r esults . In eac h shoo ting m ode , the camer a se le cts the best sett in gs, s uch as the ISO spee d, F -num ber (ap erture) , a nd shutter spee d, optimi zi ng them for the par tic ula r scene or situ ati on .
46 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l T o change the sh ooti ng mod e , pr ess th e Mod e button on the t op o f th e came r a u ntil t he des ir ed sh ootin g mo de ap pear s in the status scr een. Altern a tiv ely , y ou can pr ess the Mode bu tto n j us t on ce a n d th en use th e b ut tons t o scr o ll to th e d esired sh ooting mode . Th e f oll o w ing ta ble de sc r ibes eac h o f the sh o o ting mode setting s on the came r a . Setting Desc r ipti on Au to The camera aut omaticall y selects the b est F -number (apertur e) a nd shutter speed f or the sce ne . Au to m o d e wo rk s we l l fo r m o st s h o t s i n n o rm a l s i t u a t io n s. This mode is also usef ul when y ou need to t ake a good shot qui ckl y , and do not h ave time t o select a spec ial shooting mode on the camera . Action The camera us es fast sh utter speed s and hi gher ISO speed s to stop moti on. Use Action mode to ca ptu r e sporting e ven ts, mo ving car s, or an y scene wher e yo u w a nt to st op the action . Land s cap e T he camer a c ombine s a higher F -n u mber f or be tter depth of f ield wit h higher satur ation and sharpness fo r a m o r e vivid e f fe c t . U s e Landscape mode to captur e mount a in scenes or an y shots w ith a deep pe r sp ec ti v e . Po r t r a i t T he camer a c omb ines a smaller F - nu mb er to blur the back gr ound , w ith lo w er sa tu r ati on , contr ast , and sharpness f or a mor e natur al eff ect . Use Po r t r a i t mode f or pi ctur es that ha v e one or mor e p eopl e as the ir pr imar y f ocal poin t . Beac h & Sno w This mode lets y ou capture br ight , out do or s c enes and b ala nc e ou t ha rsh l ig hti n g.
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 4 7 P ic ture Q u alit y for Lon g Exposures A t longe r shutte r spee ds the camer a will a ut oma tical l y tak e a seco nd e xposu r e w ith t he sh utte r cl ose d in or de r to mea sur e and r educe the no ise (gr ain y look) in the im ag e. In the se case s, t he e xposu r e w ill see m t o ta k e tw ic e a s lo ng a s ex pec ted . F o r e xam ple , in a 1-se con d exp osu r e , the Imag e Displ a y w ill st a y dar k f o r 2 se cond s until th e no ise r educ ti on f r ame is e xpose d . This mean s that at long er shutter spee ds, y ou may not be a b le to ta k e qu ite as ma n y sh ots ba ck -to - b ack. Suns et The f oc us st arts at inf init y and the f lash is set to Fl a s h Off . This mode impr ov es the satur atio n of sun set color s and r etains the w armth of t he scene with a bias to wa rd s t h e o ra n g e c o l o rs o f t h e s u n s e t. Apertu r e Pr io rity Av This m ode l ets you select the F -num ber ( aperture) setting in Live View us i n g th e butt ons, wh ile the camera selects th e b est shu t te r spe ed . This allo ws y ou to contr ol the depth of f ield (for e xampl e to blur the bac k gr ound ). Us e th e Apert u r e Prior it y mode when you w ant specif ic contr o l o ver th e apertur e. Pa n o r a m a T h i s m o d e a l l ow s y o u t o s h o o t a s e ri e s o f o ve r l a p p i n g f r am es f or stitc h ing int o one pa nor amic image using the included comput er soft w are . Use Pa n o r a m a mode f or landscapes, suc h as mountain r anges, or gr oup pi ctur es wher e y ou nee d to ca ptur e a w ide shot that one image ca nnot captur e . F lash is set to Fl as h O f f in thi s mo de . (S ee Using P anor ama M ode on page 48 ) . Y ou ca n vi ew th e ent ir e pano r a m i c i mag e in t he P lay back Me n u (se e Pre v ie w P anor ama on pag e 84) . Setting Desc r ipti on
48 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Using P a norama Mode NO TE If the HP Image Z one softwar e is not ins talled on y our com pu ter , se e Using Y ou r Camer a w ithou t Inst alling t he HP Imag e Zone So f t war e on p age 113 . Pa n o r a m a mode al lo ws yo u to ta k e a s equenc e of 2â 5 pictur es that c a n b e â st itch ed â t oget her i n order to c aptu re a sc e ne too wi de to fit i nto a sin g le pictu r e . In Pa n o r a m a mode , y o u tak e a p i ctur e a s th e f irs t in t he pan or ami c s eq uen ce, an d eac h subse quent pi ct u r e y ou ta ke is ad ded to the pa no r ama until y ou end t he sequen ce b y pr ess in g the Me n u/ O K button, or until y ou hav e tak en the f ifth pi cture in t he sequence . Y o u can then vie w a low - r esol ut ion i m age of your pan or ama w i th t he Pr e v ie w P anor ama Men u option in the Pl ay b a c k Men u (see page 84 ) , or you ca n transfer the imag es in the pa nor amic seq uence to y our comp uter f or s titching togethe r and t hen v i ew ing or pr inting . Y our camer a came w ith t he Ar cSo f t® P anor a ma Mak er⢠soft wa r e tha t autom atic a lly s ti tches the i m ages in th e panora m ic sequence together on yo u r computer d ur ing image transfer . T he P a nor ama M ak er soft war e was automatica lly insta lle d on y our computer du r ing the HP Ima ge Z one soft w are insta llat ion pr oces s (se e In stal li ng the Soft war e on p age 1 9) . T o transfer the pa noramic sequenc e of imag es fr om y ou r camer a to y our comput er so tha t the Ar cSoft P a nor ama Make r soft ware ca n sti tch th e ima ges toget her , see Tr a n s f e r r i n g Images to a Computer on pa ge 9 7 .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 49 T aking a P anor amic Sequence of Pictures 1 Pr es s the Mode bu t ton on top of the ca m era unt i l the Pa n o r a m a mode app ea rs in the I mage Di splay . The c amera switches to Live Vi ew wi t h disp lay ed in t he Im ag e Di spl a y . Y ou ar e n o w r e ady to ta k e th e first pictu r e i n y our pan or ami c seq uen ce. NO TE P ano r ama image s ar e stit ched to gethe r f r om left to r igh t , so y our f ir st ima ge m u st be at t he le ft-m ost e n d of t he pan or ama v ie w . 2 Pr es s the Sh ut ter but ton to ta k e the f irst pi ctur e in the panor ami c se q u ence. After In stant R ev ie w , the camer a s w itch es to Liv e V iew wi t h displ a y ed in the Imag e Disp la y . 3 P os it ion the ca m era to ta ke the sec ond pic t ure . Notice the tr a ns paren t ov erla y of the im age of the fir st pictur e i n the se quence sup er imposed on the left thi r d of the Liv e V iew scr e en . Use this o v erla y to al ign y ou r se c ond pict u re hori z o nta ll y wi th th e first. 4 Pr es s the Sh ut ter but ton to ta k e the se cond pictu r e . After Instant Review , the c amera s w i tches to Live Vi ew wi th di sp l aye d i n t he Im ag e D ispl a y . Ag ain , th e transpa r ent ov erlay o f the pr ev ious ima ge is su per impo sed o n the lef t thi r d of the Liv e V iew screen to enable y ou to al ig n your thi r d pictur e .
50 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 5 Continue addi ng mor e pic t ures t o the pa nor ama, or press the Me n u/ O K button t o end the panor am ic s equence . The pan or am ic sequen ce ends automat ical ly after y ou ta k e the fi f t h p i c t u r e. NO TE T o vi e w a low -resolution im age of the pa norama on yo u r c a m e ra, s e e Pr e vi ew P anor a ma on p age 84. Usin g t he C ap ture Menu The Ca p t u re Men u al lo w s y ou to a dju st v ar iou s came r a settin g s t hat af f ect t he qual itie s o f the imag es an d v i deo clip s y ou captur e with y our camera . 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Capt ure M enu , press the Li ve View button , and then pr ess the Menu /OK but ton . If the i mage Di splay is al r ea dy off , y ou c an s imply pr ess Men u/OK . 2 U se the buttons t o scr oll thr o ugh th e Capt u r e Menu options. 3 E i ther pr ess Menu/ OK to s ele ct a hig hlig hted option an d dis pla y its sub-m en u , or u se th e butto ns to change the se ttin g f o r the highlig hted option w ith out go ing to its sub- menu . 4 W i thi n a s ub- menu , us e the bu t tons and then the Men u/OK but ton to chan ge the set t i ng for th e Capt u r e Men u option . 5 To e x i t t h e Capt u r e M enu , hig hli ght the EXI T option an d pr ess Menu/ OK .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 5 1 6 To r e s t o r e Capture Men u se ttings to w hat th e y w er e w hen y ou tur ned the came r a off , h old do wn the Menu /OK button as y ou tu r n the camer a bac k o n. Help for th e Menu O ptions Hel p ... i s the last option in each of the Captu r e su b-men u s . Th e Help . .. option pr ov ides information ab out that Captur e menu op tion a nd it s sett ing s. F or e x a mple, if yo u pr ess Men u/OK when Help ... is hig hligh ted in the Whi t e Ba la nc e su b-me n u , the Whit e Ba la nc e Hel p sc r een is dis pla y ed , as shown . U se the buttons t o scr oll thr o ugh the Help sc r ee n s . T o e xit the H e lp an d r etu rn to th e pa rt icul ar Capture sub -men u , pr ess the Me n u /O K bu t ton. EV Com pens a tion In difficul t lighting co nditions, you can use EV (E x pos ur e Valu e) Compe n sa tion to override the au tomatic expo su re setting that the camera makes. EV C ompe nsati on i s usef ul in s cenes that contain m an y light obj e cts ( like a white house in the sno w ) or many dark ob jects (lik e a bl ac k ca t on a dar k ba ck gr o und). Sce nes co nt ainin g man y light obj e cts or man y da r k objects c ould t urn out gr ay w itho ut the us e of EV Com pensati on . F or a s cen e w it h m an y li gh t ob jec ts , in c r ea se t he EV Compens ation t o a positi v e number to pr o duce a br ighter r esu lt . F or a sc ene w i th many da r k obje cts, d ecr e as e the EV Com pensati on to da r ken th e scene to b e closer to black .
5 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect EV Compen satio n . 2 In the EV Comp ensatio n sub- me nu, use the butt ons to change the EV setting in 0.33 ste p s fr om -3 .0 t o 3. 0. T he new setting is appl ied to the Live View scre en b ehind th e men u, so y ou ca n see th e effe ct each sett ing will have o n the picture . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Captur e Men u . If the settin g is an yt hing othe r tha n the def au lt se t ting o f 0 (z er o) , the number value will app ear i n the Live Vi ew screen ne xt to the ico n . T he ne w setting r emains in e ff ect un til it is ch anged again or un til th e came r a is tur ne d off . Hol ding do w n th e Menu /OK bu tto n wh en y ou tu r n th e cam er a bac k on w ill r es to r e t his se tting to w hat it w as w hen y ou tur ne d it of f . I mage Qual i t y NO TE This set t ing do es not apply when r e cording video cli ps. This sett ing a llow s y ou to set the r es olut ion and JPE G compr ess ion of the sti l l imag es yo u captu r e with your camera . The Imag e Quality su b-men u h as f our p r e-d ef ine d se ttings , a s w el l as a menu option t hr oug h which yo u can cr eate your own cus t o m Image Qualit y setting .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 53 NO TE T he r es olu ti on po rti on o f all t he I mage Q uality set t ings exc e p t fo r t h e VGA sett ing is r epr esented b y a number and MP (Meg ap i xe ls), suc h a s 4MP or 2MP . T he h igh er the number of M egapi x els, the higher the resolution . In the cas e of t he VGA se t t ing , the image w il l be 6 40 b y 480 pi x el s (0. 25 M P) , wh ich i s t he lo west resolut ion . T he c om p r essi on porti on o f t he Ima ge Q ual ity s ettings is r epr es en ted b y th e st ars . Th e m or e st ar s , th e l ess compr ession of the imag e , and the higher the quali t y . Con v ersely , the less number o f stars , the higher compr es sion of th e imag e , a nd the low er the quali t y . 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Ima ge Q ual ity . 2 In the Im age Qu alit y sub -men u , use t h e button s to high lig ht a pr e -define d set ti ng or the C us t om ... me nu option . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to save a pr e - de f ined setting an d r etur n to the Captur e Men u . Or , when the Cus to m. . . menu op tion i s highlighted , pr ess Menu / OK to go to the Cus t om I ma g e Quality sub- m enu (se e pa ge 5 5) .
54 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l The follo wing tabl e helps e x pl ain t he pre- defined Image Quality setting s in mo r e d etail: Setting Des cr ipti on 4MP Images will be full resolution and have the lowest pre-de fined com pres sion. This setting produ ce s very high quality imag es , with grea ter color accura cy, b ut uses the most memory. Th is is reco mmende d if you plan to enl arge im age s, or pr int image s to a size large r than 18 by 24 cm ( 8 by 10 in). 4MP Images will be full resolution and have medium compress ion. This setting produ ces high quality images, but u ses less m em ory than the 4M P setting above . This is the default setting a nd is r ecomm ended if yo u pl an t o enl arge imag es, o r pr int images to a size of 18 by 24 cm (8 by 10 in) or la r ger . 2MP Image s wil l be 2 M P (me dium) resol ution and hav e medium com pression. Th is se tting prod uce s high- quality ima ges, but use s less memor y than the 4MP settings a bove. Th is setting is reco mme nded for printing ima g es u p to 13 by 18 cm (5 by 7 in). VGA Images will be 640 by 480 (lowest) resolu tio n and have medium com pression. This is a memory- efficient s etting, b ut produ ce s the lowe r qu ality images. Th is s etting is good for image s you want to send v ia e-mail or post to the Interne t.
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 55 The Imag e Quality set t ing af fect s not only the quali t y of the imag es, but a ls o the n u mb er of im ages that can be stored e ithe r in th e int er nal m emo r y in t he came r a or on an o pti onal memor y ca r d. Images wi th higher r esolut ion and low er com pr essio n w ill t ak e up mor e s pace than image s w ith lo w er r eso lu tio n an d/or h igh er com pr essi on . F or e x amp le , th e highes t pre- def i ne d set tin g , 4MP , r esu lts in high q uality imag es, but c ons um es mor e stor age sp ac e in memor y tha n the ne xt lo we r setting , 4MP . Lik ew is e , man y mor e sti ll i mag es can be stor e d in memor y at the 2MP or VGA setting s tha n at 4MP ; ho we ve r , th ese se ttings wi ll r esult in m uc h lo w er qual it y imag es. The Pi c t u r e s r e m a i n i n g count at th e bo ttom o f the sc r een updates when y ou h igh light e ach pre-define d set ti ng. See Mem ory C apa city on page 17 1 f or mor e i nformation about how t h e Im age Q ual it y se tting af fec ts t he n umbe r o f imag es t hat can be sa ve d in y our cam er a me mory . T he i con f or th e ne w se tting (in t he pr e vi ou s ta ble ) w ill ap pear in the Live Vi ew screen. The new set ti ng r emai ns in effect u nti l it is c hange d ag ain , e v en w he n y o u turn the camer a of f . NO TE When y ou use d igital z oom , t he r e solut ion c h anges as yo u zo o m i n . S e e Di gital Z oom on page 40. Custom Ima g e Qualit y If you se le ct the Custom... op tion fr om the Ima ge Qual ity sub- menu , the Cus to m I m ag e Q u a l i t y sub- men u dis pla y s. T his su b- menu al lo ws you to sele ct a c ustom Image Q uality setti ng, incl uding indi v i dually setting t he r es oluti on and the compr ess ion of the i mages you capt u r e. In the Custom Image Qu ali t y s ub-m enu , the default Res o l u t io n se tting is 4MP (fu ll r es olu tio n) , an d t he de fa ult Com p r ess ion se tting is (medium comp r es sion).
56 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 1 In the Imag e Quality su b-men u (pag e 5 2), se lec t th e Cus t o m.. . option . 2 Use the butto ns to mo ve bet w een the Resolution and Compr es sion opt ions. 3 U se th e bu tto ns t o ch ang e t he Re so l ut io n or Compr ess ion setting . T he foll o w ing tabl es help e x plai n th ese set t ings. NO TE At high er com pr es sion le v els , imag e qu ality is r educe d . 4 Pr es s Menu /OK to sav e th e c u sto m Image Q ual it y se t ting a n d re t u rn t o t h e Captur e M enu . The custo m Im age Qual it y se t ting w ill a ppear in th e Live V iew sc r ee n. T he cu sto m setting r emains in eff ect un til it is chang ed agai n , e ven w hen y ou tu rn th e ca mer a off . NO TE When y ou use d igital z oom, the r esolut ion changes as yo u zo o m i n . S e e Di gital Z oom on page 40. R esolu ti on S etting s 4MP âF u ll r esol utio n; ther ef or e , h ig hes t qua lit y 2MP â2MP (medium) r esolu tion VG A â640 b y 4 80 (l o w es t) r es olu tio n; lo w es t qu ality Co mpr essi on S etting s âHig he st c ompression ; most me mor y- efficient , an d mi nimum qual it y âM e diu m compression âLo w com pr essi on âL ittle to n o com pr ess io n ; t her ef o r e , lea st memory -eff i c ien t (bes t se t ting f or ima ge editing)
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 57 White Bal ance Differ ent kind s of lighting c onditions c ast dif fer ent c olors . F or e xam ple , sunli ght is mor e blue , wh ile indoo r tungst en li ght is mo r e y ell o w . S cen es d omin at ed b y a s ingl e co lo r m a y r equir e an ad ju st men t o f the whit e balan ce se tting to hel p the camer a r epr od uce co lors mor e accur at ely and ens u r e th at whi tes appe ar w h it e in the f in al i mage. Y ou can als o ad j ust th e whi te bala nce to pr od uce cr ea tiv e effects. Usi ng the Sun setting can pr o d uce a war m er look to the i mage. 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Whi te B al a nc e . 2 In the White Balance su b-men u , use t he buttons to hig h ligh t a se t ting . The new setting is appl ied to the Live View scree n behind the menu, so you ca n see th e effe ct each sett ing will have o n the picture . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Captur e Men u . The follo wing tabl e helps e x plai n t he sett in gs in more detail : Setting Des cr iptio n Auto Th e c amer a automatic ally id entifies and co rrects fo r scene illuminance . This is the default setting. Sun T h e came r a bal an ces c ol or ass umin g th e su b j ect is outd o ors u nde r su n ny or br ig ht clo u dy c o ndi t ion s . Shade T h e came r a bal a nce s col or as su min g th e su bj ect i s out do or s in shade , in dar k cl oudy conditions , or at dusk .
58 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual If the se t ting is an ything othe r than the de fa ult Au t o se tting, the icon fo r the set t in g (i n th e pr evi ous table) will app ea r i n th e Li ve Vie w scr een. T he ne w setting r emains in e ff ect un til it is ch anged again or un til the cam er a is tur ned o ff . T he White Balance s etting r es ets to the de fa u lt Au t o se tting w hen y ou tur n t he camer a off . Holdi ng do wn the Menu /OK butt on w hen y ou turn the camer a ba ck o n wi l l res to re t h i s s e t t i n g to w ha t i t wa s wh e n you t u rne d it off . Manual White B al ance If you se le ct the Man u a l opt ion , the Man ual W hite Ba lanc e screen dis play s. The Live Vi ew port ion of the scr een s ho ws the color ti nt fr om the pr e vious M anual W hite Ba lance se tting tha t w a s made . NO TE To r e s t o r e t h e p r e v i o u s Man ual W hite Ba lanc e setting , sim ply pr ess t he Me n u / OK bu t to n in t he M an ual W hite Bal ance scr e en w i thout pr ess in g the Shutter button . Tu n g s t e n Th e ca mer a b alances color based on incandescent or halogen li ghting ( t yp icall y f ound in h omes ) . Fl u o re s c e n t T he camer a balances color b ased on f luor escen t lig ht in g. Ma n ual Th e camera calc u lat es a cust om White Ba lance based on yo u r target image ( see th e foll ow in g subsecti on) . Setting Des cr iptio n
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 5 9 To c h a n g e t h e Manual Whit e Balance sett ing : 1 P oint the ca m er a at a whi te or g r ay t arget (such as a piec e of paper ) , maki ng su r e that the entire sc r e en encompass es the whi te or g r ay ta rget . 2 Pr ess th e S hu tter button (the camer a will not t a k e a pic tur e) . T he ca m er a t hen cal c ulat es a cu s tom Whit e Balance set t ing based on th e r eg ion i ns i d e the foc u s br ackets. Du r i ng th e calc ulation , PROC ESSING. .. is di splay ed on th e scr een. When the ca lculat ion i s c omp lete , th e co lor ti nt i n Live Vi ew chan ges to m atch th e n e w Man ual Whi te B a l anc e setting , and WHITE B AL ANCE SE T is displ a ye d . 3 If nee ded , r epe at ste ps 1 an d 2 un til y ou ge t th e des ir ed Man ual W hite Ba lanc e setting . 4 W hen y ou ar e sa tisf ie d w it h th e Man ua l set t ing you ha ve made, pr es s th e Men u/OK b utton to e x i t t he Manu al Whit e Balance s c re e n a n d re t u rn t o t h e Cap t ure Me n u . I S O S peed NO TE This set ti ng do es not apply when reco r din g vi de o cl ips. T his s etting adj us ts th e sensiti vity o f t he came r a to l igh t . W hen IS O Speed is s et to the defaul t Auto sett ing, the ca mer a sel ect s the best ISO spee d for th e scen e. L o w e r IS O sp eeds w ill ca ptu r e t he b est q uali t y im ag es w ith t he lea st amou nt o f gr ain (or no ise), bu t r esult in sl ow er sh u t te r spe eds . If t akin g a p i ctur e in l o w li gh t cond itio ns w ith out a flash at I SO 100 , y ou ma y w ant t o use a tr ipod . In c on tr ast , higher IS O numb er s allow faster s hutter spee ds, and ca n be used when taking pi ctures in dark ar eas w ithout a flash , or pi ct u r es of fast mo ving obje cts. Higher IS O spee ds pr oduc e p i ctur es w ith m or e gr ain (or no ise) a nd , th us , ca n be o f lo wer quali t y .
60 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sele ct IS O Speed . 2 In the ISO Speed sub-menu, us e the butto ns to hig hligh t a se tting. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u . If the se t ting is an ything othe r than the de fa ult Au t o se tting, the n umb er v alu e f or t he set ting w ill a ppe ar in th e Li ve View scr een. T he ne w setting r emains in e ff ect un til it is ch anged again or un til th e came r a is tu rn ed o ff . T he I S O Sp eed set t ing resets to the d efau lt Au to se tting wh en y ou tu rn t he came r a o ff . Hol ding dow n th e Men u/OK bu tton w hen y ou tu r n the cam er a bac k on w ill r est or e this se t ting t o wha t it w as w hen y ou tur ned it o ff . AE Meterin g NO TE This set t ing do es not apply when r e cording video cli ps. T his se t ting all ow s y ou to s pecify w hi ch r e gi on o f a sce ne the came r a w ill u s e t o cal c ulat e the e xpos ur e . 1 In the Capt ur e M enu (p age 50) , sele ct AE Mete r ing . 2 In the AE Meter i ng sub-me n u , use the butto ns to hig hligh t a se tting. The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View scr een behind the menu, so you can see the effect each setting will have o n the picture. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Captur e Men u .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 6 1 The follo wing tabl e explai ns the set ti ngs i n more detail : If the ne w se t ting is an ything othe r than the de fa ult Cent er - We i g h t e d setting , the ico n f or th e setting (in the pr e vi ou s tabl e) w i ll app ear i n the Live Vi ew screen . T he ne w setting r emains in e ff e c t until it is cha nged ag ain or un til the came r a is tur ned of f . T he AE Mete r ing se tting r es ets to the d efau lt Center - W eighted setting w hen y ou tur n t he came r a of f . Ho l d i n g d own t h e Menu/ OK button w hen y ou tur n the ca mer a bac k o n w ill r es to r e th is se tting t o w hat it w as wh en yo u t u r n e d i t of f. Setting Descr iptio n Ave ra g e The cam er a uses the entir e scen e regi on to me asur e and calc u lat e e x posur e . Us e this s etting when y ou w ant e v er ything in th e pi cture to be u se d equall y whe n calc u lating e xposure . Cen te r - We i g h t e d T he came r a u se s a l ar ge ar ea in th e cen te r of th e scene r e gion t o measur e and calc u late e x posur e . This setting is good to use when the subj ect of the p ictur e is in the center of th e fr a me. Exp osur e w il l b e based mor e on the subj ect than o n its sur ro u ndings . This is the def ault setting. Sp ot The cam er a u ses a sm all ar ea in th e cent er of the scene r e gion t o measur e and calc u late e x posur e . This can be usef ul in b ack l it sc enes or when the subj ect of the pi ctur e is v er y dark or li g ht com p ar ed to t he rest of the scene . When u s ing this setting , fr a me the subj ect of the pi cture in the center of the foc us br ack ets , then pr ess the Shutte r button halfw ay do wn t o lock the e xp osur e a nd f ocu s on the sp ot in the center . Then r e compose the scene as desir ed and pr ess the Shu t te r bu tt on a ll th e w a y d o w n . NO TE: Whe n t his set tin g i s used , pa rts of the image ca n end up o ver or u nder - exp os ed.
6 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Ada ptiv e Li gh ting NO TE T his setting d o es n ot ap ply in Pa n o r a m a mo de or when re c o rd i n g vi d e o cl i p s . T his se t tin g balan ces th e r el ati onship be twee n br ig ht an d dar k ar e as in a picture , pr eser ving ge ntle co ntr asts but c ompr essi ng ha r sh co ntr as ts . So me ar ea s in t he p i ctur e ar e li gh te ned , wh ile ot he rs ar e le ft al one . He r e is an ex ampl e o f ho w A d aptiv e Lig h t i n g can enhance an image: Adaptiv e Lighti ng is use ful in situa tio ns lik e the se: z Ou tdo or s cen es w ith a m i xtur e of sun an d shade z Cloudy d a ys w hen t her e is a lot of â g lar e â fr om the sky z Indoor s cenes that use flash photograph y (t o soften or e v en ou t the effe ct of the f lash) z Backlit scenes w h er e the subject is too f a r a wa y for the re g u l a r fl a s h t o re a c h NO TE When Adapt iv e L igh ti ng is tur ned o n , t he c amer a wi ll tak e longer to stor e a n ima ge in me mory , si nce the i m age is be ing pr ocess e d be f or e sto r in g it . With out Adapt iv e Li gh ti ng : Wi t h A da pti ve L igh ting :
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 63 Y ou ca n use Adapt iv e Lighti ng w ith or wit hout f l a sh , but it is not r eco mm ende d as a replacem ent for f las h . Unl ike f las h , Adaptiv e Lighti ng does n ot affe ct exposu r e sett in gs, so br ightene d a r eas may appe ar â noisyâ or grain y , and in door or nig ht imag es ma y be blur ry if tak en w ithou t a r egular f lash o r a tripod. 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sele ct Adapt iv e Li gh ti ng . 2 In the Adapt i ve L ig htin g sub - me nu, use the butt ons to hig h li g h t a setting . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u . The follo wing tabl e explai ns the set ti ngs i n more detail : If the ne w setting is an y thing o ther than the def ault Off set ti ng , the ic on for th e set ti ng ( i n t he pr evious table ) will app ea r in the Live Vi ew s cr een . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen you turn the camera off . Setting Desc r iption Off T he came r a w il l pr oc ess t he im age a s no r mal . T his is t he def ault setting. Lo w Th e c a m e ra w i l l b rig h te n th e d a rk re g i on s o f t h e i m a g e . High The ca mer a will gr eatly br ighten the dar k r egions of the image .
64 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Colo r Th is se t ting allo ws you t o con tr ol the co lor in w hich y our ima ges w ill be cap tur ed . F or e x am ple , w hen yo u set Color to Sepia , your im ages will be c aptured in br ow n c olors to mak e them lo ok ag ed or old -fashioned. NO TE Once y ou hav e tak en a p ictur e u s ing e ither the Blac k & Whi t e or Sep ia se t ting , the image cannot be adj ust ed back to F ull C olo r lat er . 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Color . 2 In the Color sub-me n u, u se the bu ttons to hi ghlig ht a se tting. The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View scr een behind the menu, so you can see the effect each setting will have o n the pic tu re . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Captur e Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in e ff ect un til it is ch anged again or un til th e came r a is tu rn ed o ff . T he Color se tting r ese ts to t he defa ul t F ull C olor se tting wh en y ou tur n th e camer a o ff . Holdi ng do wn the Menu /OK butt on w hen y ou turn the camer a ba ck o n wi l l res to re t h i s s e t t i n g to w ha t i t wa s wh e n you t u rne d it off .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 65 Satura tion T his se t ting all o ws y ou to deter mine ho w sa tur ated t he colo rs w i ll be in y our pictur es. 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Satur ati on . 2 In the Sat ur ati on sub -men u, u se the butto ns to hig hligh t a se tting. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u . The follo wing tabl e helps e x plai n t he sett in gs in more detail : If the ne w se t ting is an ything othe r than the de fa ult Me diu m se tting, the i co n f or the s etting (in t he pr e vi ou s ta ble ) w ill appea r i n the Liv e V iew s cr een . T he ne w setting r emains in e ff e c t until it is cha nged ag ain or un til th e came r a is tu rne d off . T he Sat ur ati on se tting r es ets t o the d efau lt Medium setting w hen y ou tu rn the camer a off . Holdi ng do wn the Menu /OK butt on w hen y ou turn the camer a ba ck o n wi l l res to re t h i s s e t t i n g to w ha t i t wa s wh e n you t u rne d it off . Setting Desc r iption Low Mu te s c ol ors to g ive a s oft er , m ore ânat u ral â l oo k to th e subj ect . Medi u m Col ors wil l be normall y satur ated . T his is the def ault setting. High Emphasi z es mor e v i vi d color s in a scene . Outdoor landscape ph otogr aph y can use hi gh satur ati on to cr eate sk ies that ar e mor e bl ue , or sunsets that ar e mor e or a nge . -
66 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Sh arpnes s NO TE This set t ing do es not apply when r e cording video cli ps. T his se t tin g allo ws y ou t o se t ho w shar p the f ine de tail w ill be in yo u r i m a g e s . 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Shar pne ss . 2 In the Sha r pn es s sub-m en u, u se the butto ns to hig hligh t a se tting. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u . The follo wing tabl e helps e x plai n t he sett in gs in more detail : If the ne w se t ting is an ything othe r than th e def ault Me di um se tting, the i co n f or the s etting (in t he pr e vi ou s t able ) w ill appea r i n the Liv e V iew scr e en . Setting Des cr ipti on Low Th e e dges in your i mages will b e softer , with l ess g r a in (or noise ) . Y ou can us e this setting f or ta king portr ait pi ctur es with softer , mor e natu r a l edges. Me diu m The edges in your images will hav e normal sharpness. This is the def ault setting. Hi gh T he ed ge s in y ou r ima ge s w ill be mo r e pr ono un ced . T his setting ma y be help f ul f or out door landsca pes , b ut the images w ill con tain mor e gr ain (or noise). -
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 6 7 T he ne w setting r emains in e ff e c t until it is cha nged ag ain or un til th e came r a is tu rne d off . T he Sha r pne s s set ti ng r e sets to the d efau lt Medium setting w hen y ou tu rn the camer a off . Holdi ng do wn the Menu /OK butt on w hen y ou turn the camer a ba ck o n wi l l res to re t h i s s e t t i n g to w ha t i t wa s wh e n you t u rne d it off . Da te & T im e Im pr int NO TE T his setting d o es n ot ap ply in Pa n o r a m a mo de or when re c o rd i n g vi d e o cl i p s . This setting imprints e ither the date o r the date and time of when t he ima ge was captur ed in the lo wer le f t-h and corne r of the i mag e. Onc e you se l ect ei th er o f th e Date & Time Imprint settin gs, the date or date and time will be im printed on all sub se qu en t sti ll i ma ges th at a re ca pt ur ed, not to pr ev i ousl y captu red images. NO TE On c e you have ta ken a pictu re us in g ei th er th e Date Onl y or Date & Tim e s et t in g , th e d ate or da te an d ti me th at is impr inte d on th e imag e canno t be r emo ved late r . NO TE If you r ota te t he i mage us ing th e Ro ta t e option in the Pl ay b a c k M e n u ( pa ge 7 5 ) , the date or da te a nd ti me imprint will li ke wise rotate with the i mage. 1 In the Capt ur e M enu (pag e 50 ) , sele ct Date & T i me I mp r in t . 2 In the Date & Tim e Imp r int sub- men u , use th e but t ons to hig h li g h t a setting . 3 Pr ess Me n u/ OK to save th e se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u .
68 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual The follo wing tabl e helps e x plai n t he sett in gs in more detail : If the new set t ing i s any thi ng oth er th an the de fault Off set ti ng , the ic on for th e set ti ng ( i n t he pr evious table ) will app ea r in the Live Vi ew scr ee n. T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen yo u turn the camer a off . Setting De s cr ipti on Of f The camer a will not imp rint a date or dat e and time on the image. Date O n l y The camer a w il l per manently im prin t the dat e in th e lo w er lef t-hand cor n er of th e im age . Date & T ime The camera w il l permanentl y impr int the date and time in the lo we r left- hand corner of the image .
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 6 9 C hapter 3: Re vie win g Im a ges an d Vi d e o C l ip s Yo u c a n u s e Pl ay b a ck to r e vi e w the im ages and v id eo c lips in yo u r c a m e ra . W h e n rev i ewi n g i m a g e s i n Pl ay b a c k , y o u can use t h e Pr int but ton to select sti l l ima ges t hat y ou want to have printe d autom atic al ly th e next t im e y o u c on ne ct the c am era t o you r c om p ut er or di re ct ly t o a ny H P P h ot os ma rt o r P ictBridge -c omp ati ble pri nter s. Se e Se lecting Ima ges fo r Pr inting o n pag e 7 2. W hile in Pl ay b a c k , y ou ca n al so u s e the Zo o m le v e r to v ie w th umbnails of image s, or t o m agnify ima ges so yo u ca n tak e a c l ose r l ook a t th em o n t he cam er a . See Vi ewi n g Th u m b n a i l s on pag e 7 3 and Ma gn i fy i ng Im a ge s on pag e 7 4. In ad ditio n , the Playb ack M en u allows yo u to d elete ima ges or v ide o cl i ps, man ipu late i mages, such as r emov i ng r e d ey es f r om ima ges and r ot atin g ima ges , an d e v en ge t HP Im age Advi c e (an an aly sis o f im ages f or an y p r oble ms w it h f oc u s, e xposu r e , and so f ort h , tha t ma y ha ve occ ur r ed w hile capt ur ing the imag es ) . T o d o these thi ngs a nd more , se e Us in g the Playback M e nu on pa ge 7 5.
70 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l Usi n g P l ay ba c k 1 Pr ess th e Pl ay b a c k but ton to act iv ate Pl ay b a c k . T he mo st r ecently tak en or r e vie w ed image or v ideo cl ip appea rs on t he Ima g e Di spl a y . 2 U se the bu tto n s t o s cr oll t hr ough y ou r ima ges an d v ide o c lips . Pr es s and ho ld e it her of t he b utto ns to scr oll fa s ter . NO TE A udi o c lips att ach ed to s till imag es and v id e o c lips pla y autom atic al ly af ter the st i l l imag e or th e f irst fr am e of the v id eo cli p di sp lay s for 2 se con ds. Y ou c a n adjust t he v ol um e of the audio playback by pressi ng th e buttons. 3 T o tur n o ff the Im age Dis pla y aft er r e vi e wing y our im ag es and v ide o cli ps, pr ess the P la ybac k button again. Dur ing P la y bac k , the I mage Dis play also i ndic ates add i tion al inf or mati on a bout each im age or v ide o clip . The f ollo wing table describe s t hi s in for ma tion. 1 3 5 4 6 7 2 8
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 71 # Ico n Desc r iption 1 Displa y s only wh en an optio na l memory car d is install e d in the c amer a. 2 or z Battery level when using battery ( actual icon sh own depends on the state of your cam era battery; see Battery G aug e on page 15 6). z A C po we r when u sing the HP A C po wer ada pte r or opt ion al H P P h oto sm ar t R -series do ck. 3 D i sp l ays for th e fi rs t few se c o n d s wh e n yo u e nt e r Pla y b a ck to in d ic ate th a t you ca n scrol l th rou gh th e images or v ideo clips using the buttons . 4 3 Indicat es this image has been selected to b e sent to 3 destinati ons u sing HP Inst ant Sha r e (s ee Chapter 4: U sin g HP I nsta nt Shar e on page 85) . 5 2 Indicat es this image has been selected f or pr inting 2 copi es (see Selecting I mag es f or Pr inting on page 7 2) . 6 17 of 43 Sho ws t he number o f t his image or v i deo clip ou t of th e to tal nu m b e r of im ag e s a nd vid e o cli p s th a t a r e s tor ed in memory . 7 0:29 or z Sho ws the r ec or ded lengt h of this au dio or v ideo cl i p . z Ind ica tes this imag e ha s an a udio clip atta ch ed. z Indi cates this is a vi deo c lip . 8 Indi cates this image is the second image in a panor a mic s e quen c e of images th at was tak en using th e Pa n o r a m a s hooting mode .
72 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l T otal Im a ges Summ ar y Sc reen When y ou pr ess the button while v i e wing the l ast im age , a sc r een appea rs sh o wing t he num ber of p i ct ur es t ak en , an d t he n umber o f p ic tu r es r em aining. C oun ter s ind ic at in g th e tota l num b er of i mag es sele cted fo r printin g an d for HP Inst ant S har e ar e sho w n in th e uppe r le ft -han d cor ner of the scr een, a nd icons f or an optional memor y c ar d if inst alled (t he SD icon ) and the ba tter y lev el are shown in t he up p e r ri g h t - h a n d c o rn e r o f t h e s cre e n. Sel ec tin g Im a g es f o r Printi n g The Pr int b u t t o n o n t h e b a c k o f t h e c a m e r a a l l o w s y o u t o s e t ho w many copies of a st il l image you w a nt to hav e printed autom atic al ly th e n ext t im e y ou co nn e ct th e ca mera to your c omp ut e r or di rec t ly to a ny H P P h ot os m a r t or P ic t B ridg e - compat ib le printers . NO TE Y ou can sele ct only i ndiv id ual i m ages i n a pa noramic s eq uen ce f or pr int ing v i a t he Pr int button . Even if you se lec t all the image s in a pan or ami c seq uence in di vi dual ly us i n g t he Pr i nt bu t ton, only the indiv id ual images will print the ne xt ti me you connect y our camer a to y our comput er or pr int er . T o pr int an en tir e pano r ami c seq uen ce of ima ges ins tead , se e Pr inting P anor ama s on pa ge 99. Yo u c a n u s e t h e Prin t b u t t on an y time t hat yo u see a st ill imag e dis play ed on the Ima ge Di spl a y , such as dur ing Pl ay b a c k , or when y ou acces s the mai n Pl ayb a c k M e n u or the HP Inst ant Sh ar e M enu .
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 7 3 T o selec t a still imag e fo r dir ect p r int: 1 Pr es s the Pr i n t bu tto n . 2 Use t h e bu ttons t o se t th e number of copies y ou w ant to pr int . The maximum n u mb er of cop i es is 99 . T he p r int er i con w i th the nu mber of c opies that you set appe a rs in the lo wer r ight- hand corner of the image . T h e ne xt t ime y ou c onn ec t t he ca mer a t o y o ur c om put e r o r pr int er , th e imag es you hav e select ed will print automatic ally (se e Chap ter 5: T rans fer rin g and P r in tin g Im ages on page 9 7) . Vie wing Thumbn a ils Thum b na il vi ew a l l ow s yo u t o vi e w t h e s t i l l i m a g e s yo u h av e t ak en an d the f ir st f r ames of t he vi deo clip s y ou ha v e r ecor ded ar r ange d i n a matr i x of nin e thumbn ail imag es and v i deo c lip fr am es per scr een. NO TE In T hum bnail v ie w , ea ch ima ge in a pano r ama disp la ys in di v idu all y . T o pr e vi e w an e n tir e pan or ami c seq uence of imag es, se e Pr e v ie w P anor a ma on page 84 . 1 Whil e in Pl ay b a ck (pag e 7 0), pr ess Th u m b n a i l s (s ame as Zo o m O u t ) on t he Zoom lev er . A Th umbn ail vi e w o f up to nin e ima ges an d v id eo c lip f r ame s appea rs on the I mage D i spla y . A ye l l o w b ord e r s u rro u n d s t h e c ur r en t imag e o r v i deo clip fr ame . 2 U se the butto ns to sc r ol l ho r i z ont all y to the pr ev io us or ne xt thu mbnail .
7 4 H P Photosma rt R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 3 Pr ess th e b utt ons to scr oll v erti call y to the th umbnail directly ab o ve or be lo w th e curr ent thumb nai l. 4 Pr ess the Me n u /O K button to ex i t Thu mb n ai l view an d re t u r n t o Pl ay b a ck . The curr e nt imag e or vi de o cli p ( that was in the yellow bor der in Thu m b n ai l v iew) is di splay ed i n fu ll v iew on the Image Disp lay agai n . A t t he bo t t om o f ea ch th umbna il , a n HP I nst ant Shar e ico n si gnif ie s that th e still image is se lecte d f or one or mo r e HP Inst an t Shar e destin ati ons , a pr int er icon signif i es that it is select ed fo r pr i ntin g , a pa n or ama icon i ndic at es the ima ge is part of a pan or ami c seq uen ce , a Vi deo i con si gnif i es tha t t his is a vi deo clip , and an A udi o ic on si gnif ie s tha t an a udi o c lip is a ttac hed t o t h is s till imag e . Magni fyi ng Images NO TE T his f eatur e onl y w or ks on s till ima ges; it does not w ork w ith vi deo c lips . Als o , this f eatur e is f or v ie win g pur pos es onl y; it do es n ot pe r manen tly alte r th e imag e . 1 Whil e in Pl ay b a ck (pag e 7 0), pr ess Magn if y (same a s Zo o m In ) on the Zo o m lev er . T he c u r ren t ly d isp lay ed i ma ge is automatical ly magn ified 2x. The ce nter po rt ion of th e mag n i f ie d ima ge is displ a y ed alo ng w ith f o ur ar r o w s, w hic h ind icat e th at y ou can pa n ar oun d the ma gnifi ed im age . 2 U se the an d butt ons t o p an ar ou nd the ma gnifi ed im age . 3 Use Zo o m I n and Zo o m O u t to in cr e ase or de cr ease the m a gn i f ic at ion.
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 7 5 4 Pr es s the Me n u/ O K button to ex i t Magnify vi ew a n d re t u r n to Pl ay b a c k . T he c ur r ent image is dis pla y ed in f ull v ie w on the Image Di s play agai n. Usi n g t h e P l a yba c k M e nu The Pl ay b a c k M e n u allows y ou to delet e sti ll i ma ges or vi deo clip s , undele te ima ges , f or mat the came r a's in te rnal mem ory or optional memor y c a r d , a nd remo v e r e d ey es fr om st il l i m ages. A dditi onal ly , y ou can get HP I mage A dv i ce (a n ana ly sis of an imag e which identi fies pr oblem s w i th foc us, exposur e, and so f orth) , vi e w a ll the set t ings y ou us e d when y ou captur e d an imag e or v ide o cli p , r ec ord audio cl ips to at tach to an i mag e , r ota te imag es , and pr e v ie w panor ami c se qu ences o f image s. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Pl a yb a c k Me n u , press the Me n u/ OK button w hile yo u ar e in Pl ayb a c k . If you a r e not cu rr ent l y in Pl ay b a c k , pr ess the Pl ay b a c k bu t ton fir st , t hen pr ess the Men u/OK but ton . 2 Use t h e bu ttons t o hi ghligh t the Pl ayb a c k M e n u option that y ou w a nt to u se on the left side of the Image Disp la y . T he Pl ay b a c k M e n u options are e xpla ined later in thi s se ct ion. 3 Mov e to the im age or v ide o cli p y ou want to use by pr ess ing th e b uttons. Th is mak es it eas y to perf o rm the same action on sever al im ages or video cli ps, s uch as delet ing m ultiple im ages or v i deo clips . 4 Select the highlighted Pl a yb a c k M e n u opt ion b y pr ess ing the Men u/OK but ton .
7 6 H P Photosma rt R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 5 U se on e of se ve r al w a y s to e xi t the Pl ay b a c k Menu . If , imm ed iate ly af ter entering th e Pl a yb a c k Me n u , you decide n ot t o c han ge an ythi ng , sim pl y p r es s Men u/OK ag ain to e xit th e m enu . Af ter you h ave used th e Pl ay b a ck Men u , y ou can nav ig ate to ano ther men u via the m e nu tabs at the to p o f the Imag e Displ a y . Y ou can als o selec t the Ex it option and pr es s Men u/ OK . If y ou want to r et u r n to Pl ay b a c k , or sw itch to an other cam era stat e , pr ess the appr opr ia te button on the back of the cam er a . Th e follo wing table s umm ar iz es e ach of the Pl ay b a c k M e n u options and des cr ibes the information in th e bot to m r ight cor n er of each ima ge or video cli p w h i le the Pl ayb a c k Menu is dis play ed. Still Imag e Sc r e en 1: Vi deo Clip Scr een 1: S til l Image Scr een 2: V id eo Clip Sc r een 2 : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 15 14 13 12 16
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 77 # Ic on Desc r iption 1 Dele te - P r esents a sub-m enu wh ere y o u can delete this image or video clip , delete the entir e panorami c sequenc e of images, delete all images and v ideo clips, f or mat the inter nal memor y or an option a l memory car d, and un d elet e the last deleted ima ge . ( See De l e te on p age 7 9.) 2 Rem ove Re d Eye s - Cor r ects the r e d effect w hich appears in the e y es of human s ub jects in still images . (Se e Re m ov e Re d E ye s on page 8 0. ) 3 Im age Adv ice - Pr o vi des an analy sis o f the image wh ich ide nt i fie s prob l e m s wi t h fo cus , ex p o s u re, and so f orth . Also p ro vi des r ecomm endations on ho w to impr ov e sim ilar images in t he f utur e . (See Im age Adv ic e on page 81.) 4 Im age Info - Al lows you to view al l of th e s et t ing s that we r e used when capturing this image . (S ee Im age I nfo on page 8 1.) 5 Rec ord Au d io - R ec or ds an audi o clip to attach to this still image. (See Re c ord A u d io on p age 83.) 6 Ro t a t e - R otates the c urr entl y displa y ed still image 90 d eg r ees clockwise. (See Ro ta te on page 84. ) 7 Pr e vi e w P anor a ma - Dis pla y s a l o w-r esoluti on , stitc hed image of the cur ren tly select e d panorama . (S ee Pr e vie w P anor a ma on page 84. ) 8 EXIT - Ex its t he Pl a yb a c k Men u . 9 4MP Sho ws t he Image Q ualit y setting that w as used to tak e this image , or blank if it is a vi deo clip . (See Im age Qual it y on pag e 5 2.) i
78 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l 10 0:2 9 Visibl e if this image has an au d io c lip at tac he d to it, wi th th e len g th o f th e a ud io cl i p d is p layed to th e l ef t o f th e ic o n. 11 14 o f 4 3 Sho ws t he number of t his image or v ideo c lip out of the total number of images and v ideo c l ips in inter n al m emory or on an option a l memory car d. 12 Indi cates this image is t he second image in a panor amic sequence of images th at was tak en usi n g th e Pa n o r a m a shooting mode . (See Using Pa n o r a m a M o d e o n p age 48 .) 13 3 Indicates t his image has been se lected to be sent t o 3 destinati ons u sing HP Ins tan t Sha r e . (See Cha pt er 4: Usi ng HP Ins tan t Sh ar e on page 85.) 14 2 Indicates t his image has been se lected for pr inting 2 copi es. (Se e Selecting I ma ges f o r Pr inting on p a ge 7 2 .) 15 3/15/ 2004 S hows t he d a te th a t th i s i m ag e wa s c apt u red o r this vi deo clip was r ecor ded. 16 0: 3 7 Visibl e if this is a v ideo c lip , w ith the len g t h of the v ideo clip displa yed to the left of the icon . # Ic on Desc r iption
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 7 9 Delete In the Playba ck Me n u (pa ge 7 5), wh e n yo u se l e ct Delete , the Dele te su b-me n u displa y s. The Delete su b- menu pr ov ides the f ollow i ng options: z Cance l âR eturns you t o the Pl ay b a c k Men u w it hou t de letin g the i ma g e. z Thi s I ma g e âDel etes th e curr ent l y di splay ed ima ge or vi d e o c l i p. NO TE When one shot fr om the center of a panor amic seq uen ce is d elet ed , all of t he pan or ama ta gs ar e r emo ved , ther efor e br e aki ng the pa nor amic se quence . Th es e imag es a r e no w cons i d er ed indiv idual st il l ima ges. Ho w e v er , if yo u de le te an image f r om t he b eginning o r end of the p ano r ama, and ther e are at least 2 images r em aining , the pa nor amic sequ ence is p r e se r v e d . z E n t i re P a no ra m a S e q u e n c e â Del etes a l l imag es asso ci at ed with th e pan or am ic sequen ce . z All Ima ges (i n Me mor y/on Ca r d ) âD el etes a ll of the imag es and vi de o clips either in inter na l memory , or on a n optional me mory car d t hat is ins talle d in the camer a . z F ormat ( M emor y/ Car d ) âD eletes a ll of t he image s, v ide o clips, and f i les i n inter nal memor y or on an optional memor y ca r d , and then for mat s the i nternal m emor y or memor y ca r d. z Und e let e Last â Recov er s the most r ec ent l y deleted im age.
80 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l NO TE Y ou can r eco ver o nly the mo st r ecen t dele te ope r ati on, inc lu ding en tir e pan or ami c se que nces . On ce y ou p r oceed to a nother operation , for ex a mple , pow er in g off t he camera or taki ng another pi ctu r e , the delete op er a tion y ou perf or med is per man ent , and th e image is n o lon ger re c ove ra b l e. Also, y o u ca nnot Undel ete a Dele te A ll I mag es op er a tion . Use t h e bu tto n s to hi ghlig ht an op tion , and the n pr ess the Me n u/ O K b utt on t o sel ect it . Rem ov e Re d Ey e s NO TE T his men u op tion is onl y a vail ab le f or still imag es that we re t a ken wi t h a fl as h. In the Pl ay b a c k Men u ( page 7 5 ) , wh en yo u se lect Rem ove Re d Ey e s , t he camera imme diately beg ins pr oces sing the sti ll i mage to r emov e red ey es fr om the s ubjects in t he i mage . The r e d -e ye r emo val pr o c ess ta k es a fe w seco nds. After pr oc ess ing i s complete, the corr ected ima ge d isp lay s, along w i th the Re m ove Re d Eye s s ub- menu , which li sts t hr ee opt i o n s: z Sa ve Cha nges â Sav es the red e y e changes and returns to the Pl a yb a c k Me n u . z View Ch a n g e s âDispl ay s a v ie w of the ima ge w hic h h as gr een bo x es ar ound t he port io ns th at w er e cor r ect ed f or r ed e yes . Y ou can z oom in and pan ar ound the ima ge in this vi ew . T o re t u rn t o t h e Re m ove Re d E yes Men u , press the Men u/OK but ton . z Cance l âRet urns to the Pl ayback Me n u w ithou t sa v ing the r ed e y e ch ange s.
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 81 Im ag e Adv i c e NO TE T his men u op tio n is no t a va ilabl e f or v i deo cl ips o r f or im ag es tha t wer e copie d to the ca m er a. In the Playba ck Me n u (pa ge 7 5), wh en y ou s ele ct Im age Advi c e , the cam er a c hec ks th e im age f or an y p r oble ms w it h f oc u s, e xpo sur e, an d so f ort h . If there ar e any pr oblems, a n ana ly si s appea rs on the I mage D i spla y li sti ng the pr obl em , i ts c ause , and t he r ecom men ded sol ution for ima ges ta k en i n th e futu r e, as shown in the e x a mple scr een her e. If Image Advi c e f ind s mor e than one problem w i th the imag e , the t wo most sev ere pr oblems w i ll be di spl a yed , one p er ca te go ry . To e x i t t h e Image Ad vice scr e en, pr es s Men u/ OK . Im a g e Info In the Playba ck Me n u (pa ge 7 5), wh en y ou s ele ct Im age Inf o , the Im age Inf o scr e en di sp lay s. This screen sh o ws all of the se ttings tha t w e r e us ed wh en ca ptur ing t he c ur r en tl y disp la y ed imag e or vi de o cl ip . The follo wing tabl e e x pl ain s th e in fo rmat ion that is d i spla yed f or eac h imag e wh en y ou se lec t the Image Inf o opt io n .
8 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual NO TE T he inf or mati on in th e l as t thr ee r ow s in th e botto m , r ight-hand corner o f the ima ge is the sa m e infor mation that i s pr ov ide d in t he Pl ay b a c k Me n u view o f th e i m ag e. # De s c r ip ti on 1 Non-def ault shooting mode ( Action , La nd sc ap e , Po r t r a i t , Beach/Sno w , Sunset , A p e r t u re P ri o ri t y , Pa n o r a m a ) 2N o n - d e f a u l t Fl a s h set ting ( Re d - Eye , Fl as h O n , Fl a s h O f f , Night ) an d non -d ef au lt Fo c u s setting ( Mac r o , S up e r Ma c r o ) 3 Al l non- de fault Ca pt ur e M en u setting s 4 F - number ( apertur e) , shutter speed, and EV Compensati on sett ing 5 IS O Sp ee d setting 6 Displa y s only w hen an opti ona l memory car d is inst alled in the cam er a 7 F ile name of th e image in int ern a l memo r y or on a n opti onal me mo ry ca r d 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 8 9
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 83 Rec o rd Au d i o NO TE T his men u o ptio n is n ot a va ila ble f or v i deo clips . T o r ecor d an a u dio clip fo r a s till image that doe s no t alr ead y ha v e an au dio clip attac hed to it: 1 In the Playb ack Me n u (pa ge 7 5) , sel ect Re c o rd Au d i o . A udi o r e cor ding st arts imm edi atel y afte r y ou se lect this menu option . A micr ophone i c on and a n elapsed time c o u n t e r a re d i s p l a ye d d u ri n g re c o rd i n g. 2 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g, p re s s Menu /OK ; otherwise the audio con tinues t o r e co r d until the camer a r uns out of m e mo ry . W h e n re c o rd i ng s t o p s , t h e d i s p l ay re t u r n s t o t h e Pl ay b a ck Men u . NO TE A udi o clip s can be atta ch ed to singl e panor ama imag es i n a se quenc e , but ar e not at tach ed to th e f in al sti tched pan oramic f i le. If t he cur rently di splay e d ima ge al r e ady has an audio cli p atta che d to it , w hen y ou se lect Re c ord Au d i o , t he Re c o rd Au d i o su b-me nu is disp la y ed inst ead . T he Re c o rd Au d i o sub-m enu lis ts sever a l opt ions: z K eep Curr ent Cl ip âR et ains th e c ur r en t au dio clip and r e tu rn s to the P la y bac k Men u . z Re c o rd N ew C l i p â B e g i n s t o re c o rd a u d i o, re p l a ci n g t h e pr e vious audio cli p . 8 F ile siz e of the image in int ern al memory or on an optional me mo ry ca r d 9 In addition t o the Ima ge Q ual ity set ting and t he date , the Ima ge In f o scr e en displa y s th e time that this image w as captur ed or this v ideo c lip was r ec or de d . # De s c r ip ti on
84 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l z Del ete C lip âD eletes the c urr ent audio c l ip and returns to the Pl a yb a c k Me n u . Ro ta te NO TE T his men u op tio n is no t a va ilabl e f or v i deo cl ips o r f or still images th at w er e captur e d in Pa n o r a m a mo de . In the Playba ck Me n u (pa ge 7 5), wh en y ou s ele ct Rot a t e , the c u rr ent ly di sp lay ed i ma ge is automa tic a l ly r o tate d 90 de g r ees cl oc kwis e . T he imag e is dis pla y ed in its ne w or ie ntati on . Y ou can then p r ess Men u/ OK to ro t ate the i ma ge ag ai n as ma n y ti me s as ne e de d to ga i n the orienta tio n of th e im age you want . Whe n you ex i t th e Rot at e men u , th e imag e w ill be sa ve d in its new o r ienta t io n . Pr e vie w P anoram a NO TE T his men u o pti on is on ly av ailab le f or im ages in a pan or ama. Pr e v ie w P a nor ama d ispl ay s a low - r esol ut ion , st itch ed i mage of a p anoramic s equenc e of i mag es. 1 Use the button s to scr oll to one of the images in a pan or am i c se quence of i mag es. 2 In the Playb ack Me n u (pa ge 7 5) , sel ect Pr e v ie w P a no r am a . T he cen t er of th e pano r ami c seq ue nce displ a y s f ir st , and the r ight an d lef t side of the sequen ce app e ar cr opp ed b y the bo u n dar ies o f the scr een . U se the bu ttons to s cr oll to the le ft an d r i ght of t he ima ge to r e v ie w th e entir e pa nor ami c seque nce. Press Me n u /O K to e xit the Pr e vi ew P a nor ama op tion and r etur n to the Pl ay b a ck Menu .
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 85 C hapter 4 : Usin g HP Inst an t Sh are This camer a ha s an ex c iting f e atur e called HP In stant Sha r e . T his f eatur e all o ws yo u to e asil y s elect s till imag es in y our came r a t o be au t omati ca lly sen t to a v ar ie ty o f destin ati ons t he ne x t time y ou co nnect the camer a to y o ur compu ter . F or e xam ple , you can se lect imag es in yo ur camer a to be automatic ally sent to e -ma i l ad dresses ( in cludi ng g r oup dis tribution list s) , on li ne al bum s, or other on li ne ser vi ce s the ne x t time y ou connect the camer a to y our compu ter . NO TE A v ai lable onl ine ser vices vary b y r eg i o n. Once y ou hav e tak en stil l pi ctures with y our camer a , using HP I nstan t Sha r e is as e asy as 1- 2 -3! 1 Set u p the HP I nst ant Sh are Me nu on y ou r cam er a , a s e x plai ne d i n th e n ext se ction star ti ng on pag e 86. 2 Use t h e HP In stan t Shar e Men u to sele ct image s in y our camer a fo r partic ular HP Ins tant S har e dest in ations. First see U sing the HP Inst ant Sh ar e Menu on page 90, and then se e Selecting All I mages f or HP Instant Shar e Destinations on page 92 or Se lecting In di vi dua l Im ages f or HP Inst an t Shar e Des tinations on page 9 3. 3 Connect the cam er a to your compu ter and tr ans fer t he ima ges as e x plain ed in T r a nsferr ing I mages to a Computer on page 9 7. Once the ima ges are tr an sfer r e d to yo u r com pu ter , the y w ill be a ut oma tica lly s ent to th ei r r es pe c ti ve HP I nstan t Sha r e dest in ation s. NO TE Vi s i t ww w . hp . co m/ g o/ i ns t an t s ha r e to see HP I n stan t Shar e in ac ti on .
86 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Set tin g Up th e HP Insta n t Share Menu o n t he C a mera Bef or e you can use HP Ins tant Shar e , y ou mu st f irs t set up the HP I nstan t Sha r e Menu on y our cam er a. T he f oll o win g pr o c ed ur e e x plai ns how to do thi s. NO TE Y ou w ill need an I nte r net connec tio n to comp lete this pr o ced ur e on a W indow s comput er . Macint os h user s, ho w ev er , will not ne ed an Inter net connection . NO TE If you ha ve an opt ional memor y c ar d inst alle d in y our c a m e ra, m a ke s u re t h a t t h e m e m o r y c a rd i n yo u r c a m e ra is n ot l ock ed an d ha s so me f r ee space on it . 1 Ma k e sure that the HP I mag e Zone sof t war e i s in stal le d on y our comput er (se e page 19) . 2 T u rn on the cam er a , a nd th en pr ess t he HP In stant Share button on the back of the ca mer a. 3 The HP I n stan t Sh ar e Menu appe a rs on the Im age Di s play . Use the bu tto n to s cr ol l to the bo tt om of t he li st i n the HP Inst an t Shar e Me n u , h ighlight HP Inst ant Shar e Setup ... , and pr es s t he Menu /OK button . Once y ou hav e sel ected HP Inst an t Shar e Setu p ... , a messag e app ears on the Image D isplay as ki ng you to connect t he camer a to y our com pute r . NO TE If y our comput er is r unning Windo ws XP , w hen yo u connect t he camer a to y our com pute r in the ne xt s tep , a di alog bo x ma y disp la y th at r eq ues ts y o u to Sele ct the pr og ram to l aun ch for th i s act ion . Simply c l ick Canc el to close th is dial og box .
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 8 7 4 Connect the c amer a to your computer b y usi ng either the spec ial USB ca ble fo r connecting the came r a to a com pute r that ca me w i th your ca mer a, or the optional HP Photosmar t R- s e r i e s d o c k : ⢠Connect the c amer a to the co mput er with th e USB ca bl e b y co nne ctin g t he larger end of t he cable to t he com put er , an d connecting the small end of th e c able to the US B connect or behin d the r ubb er door on t he side of the c a me r a. ⢠Connect the c amera to the computer w ith a n optional HP Pho to smart R - se r ies dock b y p utting the camer a in the do ck and pr es sin g t he Sav e/Pr int button on the d o ck. Thi s activates the ca me r a HP Inst an t Shar e Me n u setu p w i z ar d o n y o ur co m pu te r . S ee Setting U p Destina tions o n a W indow s Computer on pa ge 88 or Setting U p Destinati ons on a M ac i ntosh Computer o n p a g e 89 fo r i n st ru ct i o ns fo r y our computer .
88 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Set tin g U p Des tin at ions on a Windo ws Com pu ter 1 At t h e We l c o m e scr een, clic k Start . 2 The Set U p Y ou r HP Ins tan t Shar e Destina tio ns scr e en appea rs. An y HP In stan t Shar e destinati ons you hav e already set up will be l i ste d here . Click Cr eat e to add a new desti nation to your c amera HP In stan t Shar e Men u . 3 The Go Onlin e scr e en appe ars, pr omptin g you to c onn ect to y our Inter net ser vi ce pr ovi der . Connect to the Intern et, if not alr ead y onlin e , and c li c k Next . 4 Sig n in to your se c u re HP I nst ant Sha r e account: ⢠If this is y our f ir st time u sing HP I nsta nt Share , th e On e- T ime Se tu p - R egi on an d T er ms o f U se s c r e en a ppea r s. Se lec t y our r egi on , r ead an d agr ee t o the T er ms o f Us e , and cl ick Nex t to continue . T hen fo llo w the instr uctio ns to re g i s t e r f o r a s e c u re HP Inst ant Shar e accoun t . ⢠If yo u hav e used HP Inst an t Shar e b efo r e, sign i n to your HP I nstan t Sha r e account . Click Ne xt to con ti nue. 5 Choose an HP I nst ant S har e Servi ce fo r you r de s t i n a t io n. Click Ne xt , and f ollo w the instr ucti ons to set up t he serv ice to be use d when you select th is des ti nat ion . 6 W hen y ou f inish se tting up th e serv i ce f or this des tina tio n , y ou a r e r eturned to the Set Up Y our HP Instan t Shar e Des tinations sc reen , and t he nam e of your new desti nat ion appe ars in the li st of desti nat ions. NO TE Y ou can co n f igur e a m ax imum o f 34 HP I nst ant S har e desti nation s (such as i ndiv idua l e - mail add r esses or gr oup distr ibu tio n lists) th at can be list ed in the HP I nst ant Sh ar e Men u on y our camer a.
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 89 7 Click Cr eat e to add a noth er desti nat ion ( r ep eati ng steps 2 , 5, an d 6 abov e ) , or sele ct a desti nat ion and do one of the fol l ow i n g : ⢠Click Edit to mo di f y the dest in ation. ⢠Click Rem ove to de lete th e dest in a tion. 8 When y ou ha ve f ini shed add ing HP I nst ant Sh are desti nat ion s, click Sav e to m y c amer a . The new desti nation s ar e then sav ed to the camer a âs HP In stant Sha r e M enu . When the computer conf irms the y have been sav ed to yo u r camer a , disconnect the camer a f r om th e com put er . Set tin g Up D es tin ations on a Ma c in tosh C omp u ter 1 At t h e Modify Shar e Men u scr een, an y HP Inst an t Shar e desti nat ion s you h av e already set up will b e li ste d. Click Ad d t o add a ne w des tina tio n to y our came r a âs HP I n stan t Shar e Men u . 2 The New Shar e M enu Item scr e en appea rs. Enter a nam e f or the destin ation in the Menu Item Name f ield , and do e ithe r o f th e f oll ow ing: ⢠Select Use m y lo c al e -ma il ap plic ation to se nd imag es dir ectl y to the e -mail addr ess(s) y ou s pecify bel o w in this sc r een w ithou t using HP I nst ant Sha r e . ⢠Select Us e HP Ins ta nt S har e e-mail an d se rv ic es to c r eat e an HP In stan t Shar e des tinati on . 3 Click OK to ad d the new desti nat ion to the c am er a â s HP Inst an t Shar e Me n u . Y o u a r e r etur n ed t o t he Mod ify Shar e Men u scr een, and the na me of y ou r ne w destin ation appe ars in the li st of desti nat ions.
90 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l NO TE Y ou can co n f igur e a m ax imum o f 34 HP I nst ant S har e desti nation s (such as i ndiv idua l e - mail add r esses or gr oup distr ibu tio n lists) th at can be list ed in the HP I nst ant Sh ar e Men u on y our camer a. 4 Click Add to add an other des ti nat i o n (repeat ing steps 2 & 3) , or sele ct a des ti nation an d do on e of t he follo wing : ⢠Click Edit to mo di f y the dest in ation. ⢠Click Rem ove to de lete th e dest in a tion. 5 When you hav e f in is hed add in g desti na tion s, click Update Came r a . T he new desti nations are t hen s av ed to the camer a's HP In stan t Sh ar e Men u . W hen th e com pu te r con f ir ms th e y h a ve bee n sa v ed t o y our ca mer a , dis conn ect the came r a fr om the comp uter . Usin g t he HP Ins tant Sh a re Menu Once y ou hav e set up the HP Ins tan t Sh ar e Men u on the camer a (see pa ge 8 6) , yo u can no w use the HP In stan t Shar e Men u . Whe n y ou pr ess t he HP In sta nt Shar e but ton on the ca mer a , t he mos t r ece ntl y t a k en o r v ie w ed imag e a ppe ar s on t he Ima g e Di spl a y . T he HP In stan t Shar e Men u al so d ispl a y s on the lef t side of the scr een. The follo wing tabl e descr ib es e ach of the HP I nstan t Sh ar e Me n u option s as shown in the f ol lo wing exa m p l e HP Ins tan t Shar e scr een.
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 91 # Icon Des cr ipti on 1 Shar e All Images... let s y ou sh ar e all st ill imag es in int ern al memory or on an opti onal memory car d to the selected destinations. 2 Ch e c k mark indi cates this destinati on has b een se lected for the cur re ntly displa y e d image . (Y ou can se lect mor e than one des tination per image.) 3 E -ma il destinati ons that w er e set u p in this e xampl e HP I nsta nt Share Me n u . 4 A w ebsite destinatio n that w as se t up . Other types o f destinati ons ma y hav e di ff er ent icons. 5 HP In st ant Sha r e Setu p ... lets you add mor e e -mail and other HP Ins ta nt Shar e d est i n at io n s to th e HP Inst an t Shar e Men u . (See Setti ng Up the H P In stant Shar e Menu on t he Camer a o n p ag e 86 .) 1 2 3 4 5
92 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Sel ec tin g Al l Ima ges for HP Ins tan t Sh are D estin a tions To s e l e c t HP Inst an t Shar e destin atio ns f or al l still ima ges in inter na l memory or on an opt i onal memor y car d : 1 T u rn on the cam er a , a nd th en pr ess the HP I nstan t Shar e button. 2 U se the bu tton t o high li ght S har e All Im age s . 3 Pr ess the Me n u /O K button to dis play the Sh ar e All Im ages su b-me n u . NO TE If y ou hav e not y et set u p desti nat ion s for HP I nst ant Shar e , a mes sage appe a rs off er i ng y ou help in sett ing u p yo ur destina tions . F o ll ow t he instr uc tions to se t up y our HP I nstan t Sha r e dest in ation s. 4 U se the butto ns to scr oll to th e desti n atio n th at you w a nt to sel ec t in the Sha r e All Im ages su b-me nu , an d pr ess the Menu / OK button. Th e Share All Image s icon appe ars b esid e the sele cted desti nat ion , and a appe ars ov er the dest in ation. T o dese lect the des ti nat ion , pr ess the Me n u /O K bu t ton ag ai n. 5 R epe at step 4 to sel ec t any addit ional HP I n stant Sh ar e de stina tions f or all o f t he imag es in in ter nal mem ory or on an optional m emor y ca r d. 6 W hen y o u ar e f inis hed se lec tin g all of th e HP In sta nt S har e desti nat ion s for yo u r i mages, se lec t EXI T to r et u rn to t he HP I nstan t Sha r e Menu .
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 93 7 Pr es s the HP In stan t Shar e butt o n again to e xit the HP I nstan t Sha r e Menu . 8 Connect the cam er a to your compu ter and tr ans fer t he ima ges as e x plain ed in T r a nsferr ing I mages to a Computer on page 9 7. Once the ima ges are tr an sfer r e d to yo u r com pu ter , the y w ill be sent au tom ati call y to the HP I nst ant Shar e de stin atio ns . Mac int osh u ser s wi ll ne ed t o ad d addressi ng information for thei r HP Ins tan t Sh ar e desti nation s bef ore the i mages a nd mess ages ca n be sent . Sel ec tin g In dividua l I ma g es for HP Ins tan t Sh are D estin a tions NO TE Y ou can select each stil l im ag e f or an y nu mber of HP In stan t Shar e dest inat ion s. How ev er , you ca nn ot selec t v ideo c lip s f or an y HP In stan t Sh ar e desti nat ions, and imag es withi n a p anoramic sequenc e selec ted for HP I nstan t Sha r e dest inat ion s will b e sen t as ind iv idual ima g es . 1 T u rn on the cam er a , and t hen pr es s the HP Inst ant S har e button. 2 U se the buttons t o scr oll to the de stinati on in the HP I nstan t Sha r e Menu t ha t y ou w an t to se lect , su ch a s an e-mail destina tio n . 3 U se the butto ns to s cr oll to a s till imag e f or wh i ch y ou want to sele ct th is HP I nst ant Sh are destina tion. 4 Pr es s the Me n u/ O K b utto n t o sele ct the destin ati on , and a appe ars o ver that desti nation in the HP Inst an t Shar e Men u . T o desel ect the dest inat ion, pr ess the Men u /OK button ag ain. 5 R epe at steps 3 an d 4 to sele ct any other HP In stan t Sh ar e de stinati ons f or t his image .
9 4 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 6 S cr oll to ot her image s b y usin g t he b utt ons , an d r epea t steps 3 thr ough 5 to s ele ct HP Inst ant Shar e des tinat ion s fo r each of the other images. Y o u c an al so use t he b uttons to scroll to othe r i mag es to r evie w their d est in atio ns. 7 W hen y o u ar e f inis hed se lec tin g all of th e HP In sta nt S har e desti nation s for y our imag es, pr e ss the HP I nst ant Shar e button ag ain to ex i t t he HP I nst ant S hare Menu . 8 Connect the cam er a to your compu ter and tr ans fer t he ima ges as e x plain ed in T r a nsferr ing I mages to a Computer on page 9 7. Once the ima ges are tr an sfer r e d to yo u r com pu ter , the y w ill be a ut oma tica lly s ent to th ei r r es pe c ti ve HP I nstan t Sha r e des tina ti ons . Mac into sh u se rs w ill ne ed t o add add ressin g in formation for their HP Inst an t Shar e desti nation s bef ore the i mages a nd mess ages ca n be sent . Ho w HP In stant S har e E- ma il s I ma ge s Th e wa y images a r e e -maile d vi a HP I nst ant Sh are work s mu c h t he sa me o n W ind o w s and Mac in t osh comp ut er s . Images ar e not e - mail ed a s att achments. Rather , a mess age i s se nt to eac h e-ma il ad dr es s t hat y ou sel ect ed in the HP Ins tan t Shar e Men u . T h e mess age co ntain s thu mb nai l images of th e pi ct u r es you sele cte d f or th a t address, as well as a lin k to a w eb page wher e the r ec i pien t ca n v iew t he image s. F rom t hat w eb pag e, th e r e c ip ie nt ca n do things lik e r epl y t o y ou , pr int the i ma ges, s av e imag es to th eir co mputer , f or war d images, and mor e. T hi s makes it easy fo r people who us e dif fer ent e-ma il progr am s to be able to see your i mages without the dif fi cult y of dea l ing with e-ma il at tach ment s .
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 95 On Wi ndo ws, the p r ocess o f e -mailing imag es v ia HP I n s tan t Shar e i s fully automated : on ce you have selec ted y our de st inati ons , mess age s w ill be sen t t o ea ch of y our r ec ipi en ts and the i mages will b e p osted on the web page when you transfer the i mages fr om the c am er a to the computer . On Mac into sh , th e pr oce ss of e -mailing images is n ot autom at ic. Af ter i ma ge s m a rk e d with HP I n stant Sh ar e desti nation s a r e t r an sferr ed to your M ac i ntosh , the y wil l be dis play ed in the HP I nstan t Sh ar e appl icati on . Simpl y f ollo w the instr uc tions in the HP Instan t Shar e appl icat ion to sen d your me ssa ges and p os t y our imag es on th e w eb page .
96 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l
Cha pte r 5: T r ansfer r ing and Pr intin g Images 9 7 C hapter 5: T ransf e rring an d P r i nt i ng I mage s T ransferring Im a g es to a Co mput er NO TE Y ou c an al so us e the optional H P Photosmart R -ser ies dock to do th is task. See the do ck Userâs M anual f or instr ucti ons. 1 Conf irm th e follo wing: ⢠T he H P Im age Z one so ft w ar e is ins t alled o n yo ur computer (s ee Ins tal ling th e Sof t w a r e on page 19 ) . T o transfer images to a computer that do es not hav e the H P Im age Z o n e so ftw ar e in sta lled o n it , se e Us i ng Y ou r Ca mer a wit hout Ins talling the HP Imag e Zo ne Sof t w ar e on page 11 3. ⢠If yo u are using a Mac intosh computer , the camer aâs USB Con figu ration is s et to Dis k Dr iv e in th e Setup Me n u (see USB Co nfig uratio n on p age 106 .) ⢠If im ages on the c amer a ar e sel ected for pr inting or sele cted fo r HP I nstan t Shar e dest inat ions, ma k e s ure the comp uter is c onn e cted to a printer and / or the i nternet . 2 Tu r n o f f t h e c a m e r a .
98 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 3 Y our camer a cam e with a special US B c able for connecting t he came r a to a com pu ter . C on n ect th e lar ge r end of th at USB cable to th e com pute r . 4 Ope n the r ubb er door on t he si de of t he came r a an d connect the sma ll end of the U SB c ab le to t he U SB co nn ec tor on the ca m era . NO TE If y our comput er is r unning Windo ws XP , w hen yo u turn on the ca mer a i n the ne xt s tep , a dialog bo x wil l dis play tha t reques ts you to Sele ct the pr og r a m to launch for t h i s a ct i on . Si mply click Canc el to close thi s dia lo g box . 5 T u rn on the cam er a. The HP Image T rans f er soft w a r e will launch on y our computer . If y ou hav e set the so f t war e to aut om atical ly tr an sfer the ima ges in the ca mer a, the images w ill a uto mati call y tr ansf er t o th e compu ter . Othe r w ise , in the We l c o m e scr een, c l ic k St art T r ansf er . The imag es ar e tr ansf er r ed t o t he co mp ut er , an d t hen if th er e ar e an y st ill imag es that wer e pr ev iously selec ted for printin g (p age 7 2 ) or selected f or HP Inst an t Shar e de sti nat ions (page 8 5 ) , those actions ar e start ed. NO TE If th e image s be ing tr ansf e rr ed to y our comp ut er include a p anor a mic sequence of ima ges (see Us i ng Pa n o r a m a M o d e on page 48) , the ArcSo f t P anorama Ma k er soft war e start s automatica lly . F ol lo w th e instr uc tio ns on the sc r een t o stit ch t he ima ges in the pan or am ic sequen ce to geth er as a sin gle p ano r am ic image on your comput er .
Cha pte r 5: T r ansfer r ing and Pr intin g Images 99 6 When the tr a nsfer scr een on the c ompute r say s Fi n i s h e d or T r an sfer Complete , y ou can disconne ct the camer a fr o m the com pute r . Pr i nti ng P ano ra mas When a set of im ages ma r ked as a p anoramic sequenc e i s transfer red to y ou r computer w i th HP I mag e T rans fer , t he A r cSo ft P ano r ama Mak er a ppli cati on t hat w as inst alle d wit h the HP I mag e Z on e soft w a r e on y our computer aut o matically sti tches the i mages to gether to for m a si ngle p anor am ic imag e . T his pa nor ami c imag e can the n be pr inted f r om P an or ama Ma k er or f r om HP I mag e Z o ne . Printin g P anorama s from Pa n o r a m a M a ke r T o p r i n t a p a n o ra m i c i m a g e fro m P a n o ra m a M a ke r: 1 S tart t he Ar cSoft P ano r ama M ak er a ppli catio n inst alle d on y our computer . 2 Click Open , and br owse to the p anoramic i mage f ile on y our computer â s ha r d d is k. NO TE T he pano r a mic im age f ile nam e is th e sam e as the na me o f t he la st i mage in t he p ano r ami c s equ en ce , w ith â -P â adde d to t he file n am e . 3 Click Pr int , se lec t a p r inte r , a nd sp ec ify t he desir ed f or ma t f or pr inting the ima ge .
100 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Printin g P anoram a s from HP Im a ge Z on e T o pr in t a pan or ami c ima ge f r om HP I mag e Z on e : 1 Sta rt th e HP Imag e Z one app lication on y our compute r . 2 In the My I mag es tab, sel ect th e pa no r am i c i ma ge , an d do one of the f ollo wing: ⢠Select Pr int , and the n sele ct Quic k Pr ints . Cli c k Fi t To Pa g e , and cli ck Pr int . ⢠Select Pr i nt , and t he n s elec t Ph ot o Pr in ts . In the Advanced se ction, spe cif y th e Cust o m S iz e dimens ions tha t will pr o d uce the des ired outp ut (use the Pr ev ie w bu tton to con firm) , and cl ick Pr int . ⢠Select the Ed i t t ab, se le c t Pr in t , an d t hen se lec t Cu rre n t Image . Click Fi t T o P a g e , and cli c k Pr int . Printin g Im a g es Direc tly fr o m the Camer a NO TE Y ou c an al so us e the optional H P Phot osm ar t R -seri es dock to do th is task. See the do ck Userâs M anual f or instr ucti ons. Y ou can connect t he came r a dir ectl y t o an y HP Pho tosmart pr inter or P ict Br idge -c ompati ble printer to pr i nt ima ges. Y ou can then pr int e ith er all ima ges in t he camer a, o r ju st tho se imag es y ou hav e selected usin g t he Pr int button on the camer a (s e e Se l ecting Images f or P r inting on page 7 2) . NO TE HP does not pr ov id e supp ort for printer s fr om oth er manuf acturer s. If yo ur non- HP pr inter w ill not pr int , c ont act th e m anu fact u r e r of yo ur print e r .
Cha pte r 5: T r ansfer r ing and Pr intin g Images 101 NO TE Pr inting onl y w or ks w i th still im ages ; it doe s no t w or k w ith v id eo c lips . Also , images w ith in a pano r a mi c seq uence ca n be pr inte d indi vi du all y dir ect ly f r om the cam er a , but yo u ca nnot pr i nt an entire pa nor ama fr om t he ca mer a . T o p r in t a pa nor ama , see Pr inting P anor amas on page 99. 1 Ch eck that the pr inte r is tur ned o n . T her e shoul d be no bli nki ng lig hts on th e printer or err or m ess ages di splay e d about the printer . Load pap er into the printer , if ne eded. 2 Conne ct y our camer a t o the pr int er . ⢠If you ar e printin g d i r ectly to an HP printer that does not disp la y th e P ic tBr id ge logo (see below) , use the special US B c able for connecting the came r a direct ly to an H P pr in ter . Connect t he squar e end of that USB cable to the HP printer . ⢠If you are c on n ec ti n g the ca m era to a printer dis play i ng the P ic t Bri d ge lo go (se e r ight ) fr om HP or another manufactur er , do the fol l ow i n g : a. M a ke s u re yo u r c a m e ra i s s e t t o t h e Digita l Came r a USB Conf igur ati on s etting (s ee US B C on figu r a t io n on page 1 06) . b . U sin g t he U SB cab le t ha t y ou w ou ld no rm all y co nnec t bet w een the cam er a and the computer , connec t the larger , fl a t end of the USB c able to the co r r es ponding connect or on t he P ictb r id ge pr in ter .
102 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 3 Ope n the ru bb er door on the side of the c amera and co nn ec t th e s ma ll en d of th e USB cable to th e USB c on ne ct or on the camer a. 4 Whe n the ca mer a is co nnected t o the printer , a Prin t Setup me nu di spl a y s on t he cam er a . If y ou already sel ecte d im ages to pr in t us i n g t h e c am e ra Pr in t button , the numb er of images sele cted i s sh ow n. Othe r w ise , Ima ges: AL L is dis play ed. T o select or change t he sele ctions of im ages to pr i nt , pr ess the Pr int b u t t o n , s c ro l l t h ro u g h t h e i m a g e s u s i n g the bu tt on s, then use th e bu t to ns to ad just the number of copies for each i mag e . Wh en sa ti sfied with y ou r select ion s , pr ess the Pr int but to n ag a in to retu rn to the Pr int Setu p menu . 5 If al l the set t in gs in the P r in t Setup men u l oo k cor r ec t , pr es s Men u/OK on th e camer a t o begin pr inting . Or , y ou can ch ange se ttings in the Pr int S etu p m e n u u s i n g t he a rro w key s on the ca me r a, then f ol low i nst ruct io ns on the scr e en to beg i n printi ng . NO TE T her e is a pr int p r ev ie w in th e lo we r r ig ht-han d co rne r of t h e Pr int Setu p scr een show in g the page la yout th at w il l be used for pr i nti ng i mages. This print pr evie w up dates as y o u cha ng e th e set t i ngs for the Pr int Si z e an d P aper S i z e .
Chapter 6: Usi ng the Setup M enu 103 C hapter 6 : U sing the Setup Menu The Setup Menu all o w s y ou t o a dju st a n umbe r o f cam er a se ttings , suc h a s th e camer a so unds , dat e and time , an d the co nfigu ration of th e USB or T V c onn e ct ion. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Setup Men u , f ir st dis pl a y an y o the r me nu (s ee Came r a M enus on pag e 2 7) and then u se the bu tton s to move to th e me nu tab for the Se tu p Men u . 2 U se the buttons t o scr oll thr o ugh the Se tu p Men u options. 3 E i ther pr ess the Me n u/ OK but ton to select a hig hlig hted op tio n and disp la y its su b-men u , or use the buttons to change t h e se tting for the hig h lighted o ption without go in g to its sub-menu . 4 W i thi n a s ub- menu , use the bu t tons and then the Men u/OK but ton to chan ge the set t i ng for th e Setup Me n u option . 5 To e x i t t h e Setup M enu , highli ght the EXIT opt ion and pr ess the Me n u /O K bu t ton. Sc r e en 1 : Scr een 2:
104 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Camer a So und s Ca mer a s oun ds ar e the so unds that the camer a m ak es w h en y ou tur n it on , pr es s a bu t t on , or t ak e a pi c tur e. C amer a so unds ar e not the audio sou nds r e co r de d wit h im ages or video cl ips. The defau l t Ca mer a Soun ds set ti ng is High . 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103) , sele ct Camera Sound s . 2 In the Cam er a Sounds sub-m enu , high light th e volume lev el you prefer . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to save th e se t ti n g a n d re t u rn t o t h e Setup Me n u . T he ne w setting r emains in ef fec t until it is c ha nged again , e v en whe n y ou tur n th e came r a off . Liv e Vie w a t P o w er O n T his s et ting al lo w s y ou t o ha ve the camer a a uto mati call y dis play Live Vi ew e ve r y time y ou tur n the cam er a on , or to hav e t he Im a ge D isp la y tur ned o ff e v e ry time . NO TE Sett ing L i ve V ie w at P o w er On to Off can sa v e batte ry pow er . 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103), sele ct Live Vi ew S e t u p . 2 In the L i v e V ie w at P o w er On su b-me n u , h ighli g ht Live V iew On or Li ve Vi e w O f f . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Setu p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen yo u turn the camer a off .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup M enu 105 D ate & Ti m e T his s etting allo w s y ou t o s et th e date/ time for mat, a s well as the current date and tim e for the camera. This is usually done when you f ir st set u p the camera; however, you m ay ne ed t o re-set the date and time when you ar e tr avel ling to di ffer ent time zones, or if the date and time is incorr ect. NO TE The date/ ti m e f ormat chosen w i l l be u s ed to d i splay the date i nformation in Pl ay b a ck . A lso , th is f or mat c hos en in th is settin g is wha t is u s e d in t he da te & tim e im pr int fea t u re ( s e e Date & T i me I mp r int on page 6 7 ) . 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103) , sele ct Dat e & T ime . 2 In the Date & T ime su b- men u , adju s t the v a lue of the hi g hl ighted sele ction by u s i ng th e buttons. 3 Press the b ut ton s to m o ve to the o the r s elec t ion s. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 unti l th e corr ect date/ ti me for mat , date, and t ime are set . 5 Pr ess Men u/OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn to t he Set u p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen you turn the camera off .
106 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual USB Confi guration T his s et ting de termin es h ow t h e camera is recognized when connected to a computer. 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103), sele ct US B . 2 In the US B C onfigu ration sub-m enu , hig hlight one of thes e tw o c ho i ce s : ⢠Digital Camer a âCau ses t he computer to recogn ize the camera as a digital camera using the Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) standard. This is the default setting on the camera. ⢠Disk Dri v e â Causes the compu ter to recogn ize the camera as a disk drive using the Mass Storage Device Class (MSDC) standard. Use this setting to transfer im ages to a computer that does not have the HP Image Zone software installed on it (see Transferring Images to a Computer without HP Ima ge Zone Soft ware on page 11 4). This s etting may not w ork with a Windows 98 computer that doe s not have the HP Image Zone software in stalled on it. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Set u p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen yo u turn the camer a off .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup M enu 10 7 T V C onfi gura tion Thi s set ti ng a llow s y o u to set th e f ormat of the video s igna l for dis play i ng camera images on a tel e vis ion (T V) that i s connecte d to the camera w ith an opt ional HP Phot osma rt R - s e ri e s c a m e ra d o ck . The def ault T V Co nfig urat ion set ti ng de pend s on the lang uage that y ou selected when y ou t urned on the ca mer a for th e f irst time . 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103), sele ct T V Con figurat ion . 2 In the T V Con figu r at ion sub-m enu , hig hligh t one of thes e t w o choi ces: ⢠NT S C âF orm at u sed p r imar il y in Nor th Amer ica an d Japa n ⢠PA L âF or m at used pr imar il y in Eu r o p e 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Set u p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen you turn the camera off . F or mor e inf or mati on on conne cting the cam e r a to a T V , see th e Us erâ s M an u a l fo r th e HP P h o tos ma r t R - se rie s c a m era d o ck.
108 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual La n g u a g e T his s etting allo ws yo u t o se t the language used in t h e ca m era interface, su ch as the text in m enus. 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103), sele ct . 2 In the La ng uage sub -menu , high light the l ang uage you w a nt to us e . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Setu p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen yo u turn the camer a off . Mo v e Im a g es to C ard The M o ve Ima ges to Ca r d option is av ailab le in the Set u p Men u if an optio nal memory ca r d is ins talled in t he c ame r a an d the inte r nal me mo ry co ntain s at leas t one image . In the Se tu p Menu (page 103) , if y ou pr ess Menu /OK when the M o ve Im ages to Car d option is highl ight ed and ther e is r oom on t he mem ory c ar d , a co nf irm ati on scr een ap pear s e xpl ai nin g t hat ther e i s enough r oom to mo ve all i nter n al files t o t he me mo ry car d . If onl y some of the im ag es w ill f it , th en a confir mat ion scr een app ears e x plai ning ho w man y images in inter na l me mory ca n be mo ved to the memor y c ard . I f no imag es c an b e mov e d to t he memor y ca r d, then t he scr een dis play s CARD FULL . Dur ing the m o v e , a pr ogr ess bar is sho wn . All of t he imag es t hat ar e s uccess f ully mo v ed to th e memo ry car d ar e then deleted fr om the c amera's i nter na l memor y . Onc e the mov e is co mplete, y o u return to the Setup Menu .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup M enu 109 Re s e t S e t t i n g s T his opti on all ow s y ou to r es et the cam er a to the f act ory def ault sett in gs. 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103) , sele ct R es et Se t tings ... . 2 In the Re s e t A ll S e t t i n gs ? s ub-menu , high light one of these tw o c ho i ce s : ⢠Cance l â Exit s th e me nu with ou t r ese t t in g any of the sett in gs. ⢠Ye s â R es ets all cam er a se ttings t o the ir de f ault v alu e in the Captu re Menu and Setup M en u (e x cep t Date & Tim e , Lang uag e , T V Con figu r at ion , a nd USB Confi gu r ation ). 3 Pr es s Menu /OK t o re s e t s e t t i n gs a n d re t u rn t o t h e Setup Men u .
110 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 111 C hapter 7 : T rou b l esh o otin g and Suppo r t This chapter conta ins information on the f o llow i ng topics : z R ese tting the cam er a (page 112) z Us in g th e c a mera with out in stal l i ng th e H P Im ag e Z o ne so f t war e (p age 113) z P ossib le pr oble ms, causes, an d solu tions (page 1 19) z E rro r m e s s a g e s on t he c a m e ra ( p a g e 1 3 0 ) z Er ror messages on the computer (page 140 ) z Self-di agnostic tests on th e camer a (page 143) z How t o get as sistance fr om HP ( page 143) NO TE F or mor e in for mat ion ab out sol utions to problems me nti on ed he r e , as w el l as an y o the r issue s y ou mi g ht ha ve w it h y ou ca mer a o r the HP Im age Z one s of t w ar e , see the HP Cust om er Support website: ww w . h p . c o m /s u p p o r t
112 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual R e s ett i ng the Ca me r a I f y o u r c a m e ra d o e s n o t re s p o n d whe n y ou p r e ss an y bu t to ns , try r e se tting the camer a a s f oll o ws: 1 Ho lding th e camer a u psi de do wn w ith the fr on t o f the c a m e ra fa c i n g y o u, o p e n t h e B a t t e r y / M e m o r y c a rd d o o r o n the b ottom of the cam er a. 2 If yo u ha ve an o pti on al mem ory ca r d ins tall ed , r em ov e it . ( Although r emov ing an optional m emory ca r d is not necess ary fo r perf orming the r eset , it e liminates the me mory card as a pos si ble cause of the pr oblem.) 3 Remo ve th e bat ter y fr om the ca me r a, a nd ma ke su r e the HP A C po wer a dapter i s n ot c onn ecte d to t he cam era . 4 The Reset sw i tch i s the sma ll hol e loca ted a bo v e the bat ter y sl ot , as s ho wn. Pr ess the straightened end of a pap er cl ip i nto t he R ese t sw it ch un til the sw itch is d epr esse d, and hold it dow n for appr ox i mately f iv e secon ds, th en remo v e t he pape r clip . The came r a is n ow r es et . 5 R e inse r t the batt ery an d th e opti onal mem ory car d (if y ou ha ve one) and close the Battery /M emor y card do or . Y ou may now use t he c am e ra aga i n.
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 113 Usi n g Y our C am er a wit hou t In st all ing the H P I m age Z one Soft w are I f you d o no t, o r c a n n ot, i n s t a l l t h e H P I m a g e Zon e so f t ware o n y our computer f or some reason (such as ther e is not enough R AM in y our computer , or y our computer is not r un ning a supporte d operating sy stem) , y ou can sti l l us e y our c amera to take pictur es and v ideo cl i ps. How e ver , some of the th ings you ca n do w it h th e came r a w ill be a ff ect ed: z The HP In stant Sha r e f e ature dep ends on the HP Ima ge Zone so ft w ar e , so if the so ft w ar e is not in stal led on y o ur com put er , y ou w ill no t be ab le t o us e the HP I nstan t Sha r e f eatu r e o n t he ca mer a . z The Pa n o r a m a shoo ting m o de on the ca mer a u s es the A r cSo f t P anor ama Mak er comp onent of the HP I ma ge Zone soft w a re to automa tic a lly st itch im ages tog eth er i n th e computer . Ther efo r e, if the soft war e i s not insta lled on y our computer , images tak en in Pa n o r a m a mo de w ill no t be autom atic al ly st itch e d into a pa n orama whe n you tr a n sfer the ima ges to y our computer . H o we v er , y ou c an stil l use Pa n o r a m a mode i n t he c am er a to ta k e se que nc es of pictu res t hat y ou w an t to mak e int o a pan or ami c ima ge la te r . Y ou w ill sim ply nee d to u se so me o ther kind of image stit c hing soft w a re to cr e ate the p anoram a on your com puter . z Images y ou hav e ma r ked fo r pr i nting using the Pr in t button on t he cam er a w ill not a uto mati call y pr in t ou t whe n the cam e r a i s co nn ec ted to the c omput er . How ever , thi s featu re w ill s till w or k in the f ollo wing scena r io s: ⢠When you co nn e ct th e ca mera di r e ct ly to a printer .
114 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual ⢠If y our pr inte r has a mem ory car d slo t in it , and if y ou ar e u sing a memo ry car d in y our camer a , y ou can simpl y re m ove t h e m e m o r y c a rd f ro m t h e c a m e ra a n d i n s e r t i t i n the me mor y ca r d slo t i n th e printer . z T he p r oces s f or t r ansf er r ing im age s an d v i deo c lips f r om the cam er a to your computer w i ll be di ffer ent , si nce nor ma lly t he HP Im age Z one so ft w ar e hand les this ta sk . See th e fol l ow i n g se ct i o n fo r d et a i l s. T rans f erri n g Ima ges to a Com pu ter with ou t HP Ima g e Zone Sof t w a re NO TE If y ou hav e a W indo ws Me, 2000, or XP s y stem , y ou do not need to r ead t his s ecti on . Simp l y con nect t he ca m era to your co mput er with the US B cab le , an d the oper a ting s yst em will launch a progr am t o help you transfer i ma ges. If you do not , or ca nnot , in stal l HP Image Z one on yo u r computer , t her e are t wo w a ys to tr an sfer images fr om y our camer a to the com puter : using a memory car d r e ad er , or con figuring the ca mer a as a d isk driv e. Usi n g a Memor y Card Reader If you ar e using a memory ca r d in y our camera , yo u c an sim ply r emo v e it fr om th e camer a an d put it in a memo ry car d re a d e r ( p u rc h a s e d s e p a ra t e l y ) . T h e m e m o r y c a rd re a d e r a c t s j u st lik e a f lopp y disk dr i v e or CD-R OM dr i v e . In ad ditio n , some c ompute rs and HP Photosmart p r inters ha ve memory car d slots buil t into them , a nd y ou c an use these memor y ca r d slots as you w ou ld use a regul ar m emor y card r eader to save imag es to th e computer .
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 115 T r an sfer r i ng Images to a Windo ws Computer 1 R emo ve the memor y c ar d fr om y our camer a and ins ert i t into th e memor y ca r d r e ader ( or the m emor y ca r d slot i n y our computer or pr inter ) . 2 R ig ht-cl ick o n th e My Computer icon on y our des ktop , then sele ct Explor e f r om t he men u . 3 A scr e en appe ars th at wil l sh o w a li s t of di sk driv es un der M y Comput er . T he me mo ry ca r d w ill s ho w u p as a r emo vable dis k d r i ve cal led either HP_ R50 7 or HP_R6 0 7 . Click on the sig n j us t to th e left of th e r emov abl e d isk. 4 T wo dir ector ies ( folder s ) should appea r u nder the remo vable dis k. Cl ick on the sig n next to the folder cal l ed DCIM , an d a s ubd i r e ct ory s hould app e ar . Wh en yo u c lick on the su bd ir ec to ry u nd er DCIM , the l ist o f y our im age s sh ould appea r on the ri g ht sid e of th e Ex plor er screen. 5 Se lec t all the im ages (in t he Ed it pull-d o w n men u cli c k on Select All ) , then c op y them (in the Ed i t menu click on Cop y ). 6 Click on t he Lo c a l D i s k unde r My Computer . Y o u ar e no w w or k ing in y our com put er's h ar d disk dr i ve . 7 Cr eate a ne w folder under Loc al Di s k (go t o the Fi l e pu ll - do w n men u an d cli c k on Ne w , then c lick on Fo l d e r . A f olde r called Ne w F olde r a ppear s in th e r igh t si de o f t he Expl or er scr een) . Whi le t he te x t of this new folder is highl ighted , y ou can t y pe in a ne w nam e (f or e x am ple , Pic t u re s ). T o c h a n g e th e name of the f older late r , y ou can simpl y r igh t-cl ic k on t he f ol de r nam e , ch oo se Ren a m e fr om t he menu that app ea rs , then t yp e i n the n ew na me. 8 Click on th e new f o lder you just cr e at ed, then g o to the Edit pu ll-do wn m en u and c lic k o n Pa s t e .
116 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 9 Th e ima ges that you copied i n step 5 s hould then get p asted i nt o t h i s n ew fo l de r o n yo u r c o m pu t e r ' s h a rd d rive. T o c h e ck to see i f the i mag es w ere succ essful l y t r a nsfer red fr om the memor y ca r d , click on the ne w f older . Y o u should se e the same lis t of f iles in that f o lder that y ou saw when you look ed at th em o n th e mem or y card ( step 4 ) . 10 Once yo u ha ve v er if ied th at t he im ag es w e r e su cce ssf ull y transfer r ed fr om the m emor y ca rd to y ou r c omputer , put the ca r d bac k in y ou r cam er a . T o f r ee u p spac e on th e car d , y ou ca n either delete the i mages or for mat the ca r d (under the Dele te o ption in the Pl a yb a c k menu in the cam er a) . T r an sfer r i ng Ima ges to a Macintosh Computer 1 R emov e the memor y car d fr o m your camera a nd i nser t it into the memor y ca r d r e ader (or the memor y car d slot in y our computer or pr inter ) . 2 De pen d in g on th e config uration a nd /o r versio n of the Ma c O S X o per atin g s y st em y ou ar e r unning , e ith er an applic ation c alle d Ima ge Capt ur e or one ca l led i Photo will launch au tom atically and guide y ou th r oug h the pr ocess of tr an sferr i ng ima ges fr om y our cam er a to your computer . ⢠If t he Ima ge Capture applic ation i s laun ched, cl ick on e ithe r the Do wn load S ome or Do wnl oad All bu t ton to transfer the im ages to y our c omputer . By def aul t , t he imag es will b e put in the Pi c t u r e s or Mo vi es fol d e r (depending on whi ch kind of f ile th ey a r e ) . ⢠If th e iP hoto appl icat ion i s launche d , click on the Imp ort button to tr an sfer the images to y our comput er . The imag es wil l be s tor ed in th e iP hoto appl icat ion it self, so to acc es s th em later , just sta rt up i P ho to .
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 117 ⢠If no ap plica tio n la unc hes au tom ati cally , loo k o n the desk top for a d isk driv e ico n which repr esent s the memor y ca r d , then c op y the i mages f r om ther e to y our loca l ha r d d r iv e. F or mor e i nfor mat ion about how to copy f iles , v i s it Mac h elp , t he help s y st em inc luded w it h y ou r com pute r . Config ur in g the C amera as a Disk D riv e This method set s up y ou r ca m er a to func tion as a di sk driv e w hen it is con nected to y ou r computer . NO TE This method may n ot wor k on Windo ws 9 8 computer s. 1 Set y our came r a to Dis k Dr i v e mo de (you on ly n ee d to do thi s ste p on ce ) : a. T urn the cam er a on, and then pr ess the Men u/OK bu tton to d isplay the Capt ur e Menu . b. Use th e b ut to n to naviga te to t he Setup M en u . c. Us e the but to n to h ig h lig ht th e USB menu opt ion , an d then pr ess Men u/OK . d. Us e th e butto n to sele ct Disk Dr i v e , and then press Men u/OK . e. U se the butt on t o hi ghl igh t EX IT , an d th en p r e ss Men u/OK . 2 Once y our came r a is s et to Disk Dr iv e mod e , connect the camer a to y our com pute r usin g the U S B ca ble .
118 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 3 A t this poin t , the pr oces s fo r tr ansf err ing imag es is the same as described i n th e sect ion Us ing a Memor y Card R ead er on page 11 4. On W indow s computer s, the camera will appea r as a remo v able dis k in the W in do ws Ex plor er scr een. On M acint os h computers, either the I mage Captu r e or i Photo app lication will lau nch automat ica lly . 4 When y ou ha ve f ini shed tr an sfer r i ng images fr om the camer a to the com pute r , simp ly disco nnect the came r a f r om the c omputer . The ca mer a w i ll not t urn off a utomat i c al ly aft er the tr ansf er is com plet ed if the camer a is in Disk Dr i ve mo de . If y our com p ute r is r unnin g W in do w s 20 00 o r XP , y ou ma y ge t an âU nsaf e R em o v alâ w ar ning u pon disco nnecting t he cam er a . Y ou can d isr egar d this w ar ning. NO TE On Macintosh c omputers, if either Image Capture or iPho to do not l au nch a ut oma tical ly , l o ok on t he desk to p f or a disk dr i v e i con w ith the la bel HP_ R 50 7 or HP_ R60 7 . F or mor e in for mat ion about ho w to copy files, visit M ac help , the hel p s ystem included w ith your computer .
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 119 Proble ms an d So lu tions Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion Th e c a m e ra does not turn on . The battery is fu n ct i o n i n g incor r e ctl y , is dead , is install e d incor r e ctl y , or is missing . z T he char ge in the battery c ould be lo w or comple te ly dr ained . T r y i ns tall i ng a new or r echar ged ba t t ery . z Ensur e that the batte r y is in ser t ed co r r ec tl y (p age 1 4 ) . z Ens ur e that yo u a r e usin g the co r r ec t ty pe o f ba tte ry . F or b es t re s u l t s , u s e o n l y a re c h a rg e a b l e HP Phot osmar t R 0 7 lithium i on battery for HP Photo s mart R - s e ri e s c a m e ra s ( L 1 8 1 2 A) . If you ar e using th e H P A C pow er adapter , it is not connected t o th e ca m era , o r is not plugge d int o a pow er outlet . Ensu r e t hat the HP A C po we r adapter is connected to t he cam er a and is pl ugge d int o a w orking electri cal outlet . Th e H P A C pow er adapter is not fu n ct i o n i n g cor r ectl y . Ensu r e t hat the HP A C po we r adapter is not damage d or de f e cti v e and i s pl ugg ed i nt o a w orking electri cal outlet . Th e c a m e r a has st opped oper ating . Re s e t t h e c a m e ra ( s e e Re setting th e C a me ra on page 112) .
120 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Th e c a m e ra does not turn on (con tinu ed) . If you ar e using an opti onal memory ca r d, it may be c o rru p te d o r fu n ct i o n i n g impr operl y . R emo ve the memory car d and see if y ou can tur n on the camer a. I f you c an, th en th e prob lem is m o st likely with th e m emo r y ca rd . Eith er a t te m pt to forma t th e memory ca r d (see Fo r m a t (M e m or y/ C ard) on page 7 9) or r eplace the m emo r y car d. T he b attery gauge goes up and down fre q u e n t ly . Di ffer ent oper ating modes o f th e cam er a r equir e differ en t po wer lev e ls. See Battery G auge on page 156 f or a f ull e xpla nati on. I ha v e t o re c h a rg e t h e lithium io n battery fre q u e n t ly . Extend ed Image D ispla y use for Li v e View or vi deo re c o r d i n g, e x cess i ve f lash use, a nd e x cess i ve zo o m i n g consum e a lot of b a t ter y pow er . See Extending Battery L if e on page 15 2 . Th e li t h i um ion battery y ou ar e usi n g was r e char ged incor r e ctl y . A lithium ion battery is not f ully char ged when ne w . A bat tery that is ne w or has not been char ge d r e centl y mu st be r echar ged to re a c h f u l l c a p a ci t y ( s e e Ap pendix A: Managing Batte r ies on pag e 151) . Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 121 I ha v e t o re c h a rg e t h e lithium io n battery fre q u e n t ly (con tin ued). Th e li t h i um ion battery has dr ained on its ow n b e c a u s e it ha s not been use d l a tely . A lithium ion battery dischar ges on its o wn w hen not in use and wh en not inst alled in the cam er a. So , if yo u hav e not used it in t w o mont hs or mor e , it ma y b enef it f r om being c ha r ge d (see Appendi x A: Ma naging Bat t er ies on page 151). Th e l i t h iu m ion batte r y will not char ge. Battery is alr eady ch arge d. Battery char ging w ill no t start if the battery wa s r e centl y charged . T ry char ging it again af t er it has dr ained awhile . Th e wro ng A C pow er adapter is be ing used . U se on l y th e HP A C po w er adapter appr o ved f or use w ith th is c a m era ( se e Appendix B: P u r chasing C a mer a Accessori es on page 161). Battery voltage is too l o w fo r ch arg in g to start . Th e camera will not attem pt to char ge a bat te r y that may be damaged or o ver -dischar g ed. Rem ove th e b at ter y fr om th e cam er a and c h ar ge it in the HP Qui ck R ec ha r ge r fo r R -ser ies cam er as or the spar e bat tery char ging bay of the do ck (bot h pur chased separ atel y ) , then tr y it in th e camera again . If this does not work, it is likely t hat th e battery is bad. P u r chase a new lithium ion battery and tr y a gain . (Se e A pp endi x B: P ur chasing Camera A c cessor ies on pag e 161) Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion
122 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Th e l i t h iu m ion batte r y wi l l n o t char ge (con tinu ed) . The battery is damaged or bad. A li t h ium ion battery degr ades o ver tim e and can fail . If th e cam er a detects a pro blem w ith the bat te r y , it w il l not start ch argi n g or wil l sto p cha rgi n g pr ematu r ely . P ur cha se a ne w battery . (Se e Appe ndi x B: P u r chasing C a mer a Accessori es on page 161) Batte r y is not inser ted cor r ectl y . Ensure that t he battery is inserted co r r ectl y ( see page 14) . Th e c a m e ra does not re s p o n d when I pr ess a button. Th e c a m e r a i s tu rne d of f or has sh ut do wn . Tu r n o n t h e c a m e r a . Th e c a m e r a i s connected t o a comp uter . Most of the cam er a buttons do not r espond when the camera is connected t o a computer . If th ey r espond , it is only to turn the Image Displa y on if it is o ff , o r , in some cases, turn the I ma ge Displa y off if it is on. The battery is dr ained . R eplace or r echar ge the b attery . Th e c a m e r a has st opped oper ating . z If the A C adapt er is c onne cted to the ca mer a, disc onnect i t . Then r es et the ca mer a ( see R esetting th e Cam era on page 112) . z F orm at or re - forma t th e i nte rna l memo ry or t he opti onal memo r y car d (se e Fo r m a t ( M e m o r y / Car d ) on page 7 9) . Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 12 3 A lon g d elay occurs be tw een pr essing the Shutt er button an d th e camera taking a pict u r e. Th e c a m e r a needs time t o lock f o c us and exp os u r e. Use Focus Lo ck (se e page 38) . The scene i s dark and t he cam er a is ta ki n g a long exp os u r e. z Use the flash. z If u sing f las h is not poss ible , t hen us e a tr ipod to k e ep the camer a stea dy during the lo ng expos u r e time . Th e c a m e r a i s using a f lash setting w ith Red -eye Red uct io n. It w ill t ak e lon ger t o tak e a pi ctur e wi t h Red - eye Red uct io n . The shutte r is dela y e d becaus e of the additional flash . In turn , make sur e your subj ects wait f or the se c on d fla sh. Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion
12 4 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Th e c a m e ra does not take a p i ct ur e when I pr ess the Shutter button . Y ou di d no t pr ess the Shutter butt on har d enough . Pr ess the Shutt er bu t ton a ll the way do wn. Th e i nterna l memory or the optio na l memory ca r d that is installe d is f ull . T r a nsfer i m ages f r om the camer a to y our computer , t hen delete all images in inter n al memory o r on the memory c ar d . O r re place the car d with a ne w one . The op tional memory ca r d that is installe d is loc k ed. S wi tch th e lo ck i ng ta b on th e memory ca r d to the unloc ked position . Th e fl a s h i s re c h a r g i n g . W a it until t he f lash has r ec ha r ge d bef or e tak ing another pi ctur e . Th e c a m e r a i s set to Ma cr o or Super Macr o f oc u s an d can not tak e a p ictur e until it fi n d s f o c u s . z Re - focus th e ca m era ( tr y us in g F o cus L o ck ; see p age 38) . z Mak e sur e th e su b jec t o f t he pict u r e i s wi th i n t h e M a cro (close -up) r a nge (se e Usin g the F o c us Ran ge Settings on page 3 8) . Th e c a m e r a i s still sav ing the last p ictur e y ou took . W ait a f e w s eco nd s f or th e camer a to finish pr ocessing the las t image befor e taking a not her pictu r e. Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 2 5 My image is blurry . The lig ht i s low and the f lash is se t to Fl a s h O f f . In dim ligh t, the cam er a r equir es a longer e x posur e. U se a tripod to h old the camer a steady , impr ov e ligh ting conditions , or se t th e flas h to Fl a s h O n (s ee Setting the F lash on page 41). Th e c a m e r a w as set to the wr ong f o cu s setting f or the scene . Set th e camera t o Mac r o , Nor mal , o r Super M ac r o fo cus and try taking the p ictur e again (se e U sin g th e F oc u s R ang e Settings on page 38). Yo u m o v e d t h e cam er a while y ou took the pict u re. Hold the cam er a steady as yo u pr ess the Shutter b utton or u se a tripod . W atch f or the icon in the Image Displa y (this mea ns that it is al most impo ssible to hold steady , and you mu st use a tr ipod ). Th e c a m e r a fo cus e d o n th e wr ong thing , or w as unable to fo cus . z Make sur e the f ocu s br ack ets tur n gr e en bef or e taking the pictu re (se e Fo c u s i n g t h e Cam era on page 3 6). z Us e Fo c u s L o c k (s ee page 3 8 ) . z Us e fo cus s e a rch priori t y ( se e page 3 9). Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
12 6 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l My image is to o brig ht. Th e fl a s h pr ov ided too much l ig ht. z Tu r n t h e f l a s h o f f ( s e e Setting the Fl a s h on page 41). z Mo ve bac k f r om the sub jec t and us e the z oom to ge t the same fram i n g. A nat ur al or artifi c ial sour c e oth e r th a n t he fl as h p r ovid e d too much l ig ht. z T r y ta k in g th e pict u re from a differ ent ang le . z A vo id po inting the camer a d i re c t l y t ow a rd a b r i g h t l i g h t o r r ef l ecti v e sur f ace on a sunn y day . z Dec r ea se t he EV Com pen sati o n (see page 51) . The scene had man y dark obj ects, suc h as a black dog on a blac k couch . Decr e ase the EV Compensa tion (se e page 5 1) . Yo u u s e d EV Comp ensat ion when yo u should n ot ha ve . Set EV Comp ensation to 0 ( se e page 51 ) . Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 12 7 My image is too dark . There w as not enough light. z Wait for natural lighting conditions to improve. z Add indirect lighting . z Use the flash (see page 41) . z Adjus t the EV C ompens ati on (see page 51). z Us e Adapti v e L igh ting (se e page 6 2) . The f lash was on, bu t the subject w a s too fa r aw ay . Make su re y our subje ct is within the fl ash wo rking d ist ance . If so, try using the Fl a sh O f f setting (se e page 41) , whic h w ill r equire a lo nger ex po sure ( use a tr ipod ). A light is behind the subject. z Use the Fl a s h O n setting (see page 41) , or us e Adapti v e Lig h t i n g (s ee page 6 2) to brighten th e s ubject. z Incr eas e th e EV Compe nsati on (see page 51) . z Us e t h e Sp ot set t ing f or AE Met er ing (s ee page 60). The scene had man y ligh t- color ed objects, such as a whit e dog in sno w . Incr eas e th e EV Comp e ns at ion ( see page 51 ) . Th e wron g date and/ or time is show n . T he da t e an d/ or time w as set incor r e ctl y or th e t im e z o n e ha s changed . R eset t he date and tim e b y using th e Date & T ime option in the Setu p Men u (se e page 105) . Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
128 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Th e c a m e ra re s p o n d s v e r y sluggishly when trying to review images. A slo w op tional memory ca r d that is installe d or t oo man y images on the car d can af f e c t acti ons l ik e scr olling th roug h images , magnifyin g, deleting , etc. z R un the came ra s elf -diagnos tic tes t ( s e e Camer a Self -diagn osti c Te s t s o n p a ge 1 43 ) t o te st th e spe e d of y our memo ry car d. z Se e Storage on page 16 7 and Mem ory C ap ac ity on page 171 for t i ps abo ut m e mor y c a r d s. Th e c a m e ra has a rattling noise whe n I shak e it . Th ere i s an electr onic component t hat senses the or ient ation of th e ca m era when yo u ta ke pict u r e s. Th i s component uses a s mall ball inside a metal f i xtur e and w ill r attle when s haken . T his is nor mal. Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 2 9 Th e c a m e ra gets war m (or even h ot ) to the touc h . Yo u a r e u s i n g th e H P A C pow er adapter to p ower the camer a or to ch arge th e ba t te r y i n th e camer a, or y ou ha ve been usi n g th e camer a for a pr olonged per iod of tim e (15 min ut es or lon ge r ) . T his is nor mal. Ho we ver , if an ything seems o ut of t he or dina ry , turn off the camer a , unplug t he cam er a f r om the HP A C pow er adapter , and a llo w th e c am era to c o ol. Th e n exam i n e t he c amer a an d th e batt ery fo r signs o f possible damage . I ca nnot un load images fr om the camera to my c o m p u t e r . The HP Image Zo n e so f t wa re is not installe d on the comp uter . E ither insta ll the HP Image Zone soft war e (se e Installing the Soft ware on page 19) , or see Using Y our Camera w ithout In stalli ng the HP Ima ge Z one Soft ware on pag e 113. The computer is conf igur ed s uch that it is una ble to u n lo a d th e images . Set yo ur camera to Dis k D r i v e mod e (see Confi gu ring t he Ca m er a as a Disk Dr i ve on pag e 117) . I am h av ing a pr ob lem installing or us i ng th e H P Ima ge Z on e softwar e . R ef er to the H P C ustomer Support web s i te : w w w .hp .com /support Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
130 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Err or Mess a ges on t he C amera M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on BA T T E RY DEPLE TED . Ca mera is shutting down . Batt ery po wer is too l ow to contin ue oper ati on. Re pl ace or r e char ge the bat te ry , or u se t he HP A C po w er ada p te r . Battery is def e cti ve Batt ery is short ed or severely ove rd i s c h a rg e d. Pur cha se a new b a t ter y . (See Appe ndi x B: Pu rc h a s i n g C a m e ra Accessor ies on page 161). Battery can not be ch a rge d E ither an er ro r o c c u rre d d u ri n g char ging , an A C po wer disru ption o c c u rre d d u ri n g ch argi n g, th e wro ng AC p ower adapter is being used , battery is def ecti ve , or no battery is install e d in th e cam er a. R etry char ging the battery a couple of times. If that f a ils, pur chase a ne w bat t ery an d try ag ain . ( See Appendi x B: P ur chasing Ca mera Acc essori es on page 161).
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 131 Battery too low fo r Live View Batt ery po wer is too l ow t o use Li ve V i e w . Y ou can s till tak e p ictur es an d v id eo c li p s, j us t u se th e optical v ie w f inder instead o f t h e I m a g e D i s p l a y . I f y o u ar e u sin g Pa n o r a m a shooting mode w hen y ou r ecei v e this message , the cam er a ends the c u r r ent panor am ic s equenc e , sav e s the images, and tur ns off th e Ima ge Di spl a y . If y ou continue t o use Pa n o r a m a mode a fter the Image Displa y turns off , the camera s tarts a ne w panor amic sequence . T o use Live View , r eplace or r echar ge the b atte r y or use the optional A C adapter . UNSUP PORTED CARD The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d in the memory slot is not a supported memory ca r d. Ensur e that the memo ry car d is the pr op er t ype for you r c am e ra. (See Storag e on page 16 7.) CARD I S UNF ORMA TTED Pr ess OK to fo rm a t c a rd The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d n eeds t o be f ormatted . F or mat t he memory car d by fol lowi ng t he instr uctions on the Image Displ ay (o r r emov e t he car d f r om the cam er a if yo u do no t wan t it to b e f ormatted) . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
13 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l CARD HA S WR ON G FO R M A T Pr ess OK to fo rm a t c a rd The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d is form a t t ed fo r a differ ent dev ice , such as an MP3 pla y er . R e -for mat the memory car d by fol lowi ng t he instr uctions on the Image Display (r em ov e the car d fro m t h e c a m e ra if y ou d o not w ant it t o be r e- f ormatted) . Una ble t o F or mat The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d is c o rru p te d. Re pl ace the me mor y card , or i f yo u h av e a me mor y c a r d re a d e r , t r y fo rm a t t i ng the car d on your compu ter . See y our car d r eader docu m entati on fo r instr uctions . Th e c a rd i s lock ed. Please re m ove t h e c a r d fr o m yo u r camera . When tr y ing to conf i g ur e y our HP Instant Shar e men u , the op tional memory car d that i s install e d is locke d. S i m p ly re m o v e t h e c a rd f rom the cam er a and continue t he HP Inst ant Shar e tas k , or switch the lockin g tab on the memory car d to the unlock ed position bef o re continuing . CARD L OCKED The op tio n a l memory ca r d that is installe d is locke d. S w itch the loc king tab on the memory car d t o the un loc ked position . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 33 MEMO R Y FU LL or CAR D FU LL There is in s uf f icient roo m to save m ore images in int er nal me mory or on the op tional memory car d that is ins talled. T ransfer images fr om the camera t o y our computer , then dele te all images in inte rnal me mory or on the me mo ry c ar d ( s ee Delet e on page 7 9 ) . Or r eplace the car d w ith a ne w one . CARD I S UN R EADABLE The c am era i s havi ng troub le r e ading the op tional memory car d that is ins talled. The car d may be c o rru p te d o r a n unsupported ty p e . z T r y t u rn in g th e c a m era of f and t hen back on . z T ry r e -for matting the memory car d u sing the Fo rm a t ( M e m o r y / C a rd ) option in the Delet e sub- me n u o f t he Pla yback Me nu ( see Del ete on page 7 9 ). z E n su re th at th e m e mo r y car d is t he p r op er ty pe fo r yo u r c a m era ( se e Stor a ge on page 16 7) . If it is the pr oper type , try f orm attin g it . If it w ill not f orm at , it is pr obab ly cor r upt ed. R eplace the memory car d. PRO C ES SI N G... The c a me ra i s pr ocess ing data , such as sav ing the last p ictur e y ou took . W ai t a f e w se co nds f or th e cam e r a t o f ini sh p r oc es sin g be f or e t akin g an o th er pi ctur e or pr essing anot her button . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
134 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual CHAR GING FLA SH.. . The c am era i s re c h a r g i n g t h e fla s h . It take s longer to ch a r ge the f lash when t he battery is lo w . If y ou se e this m ess age a lot , y ou ma y need to r e place or recha rge th e b a t ter y . FO C US T O O F A R and blinking The f o cus distance is bey o nd where th e ca m era c an fo cus i n Mac r o or Su p er Macr o mode . z Set the camer a to Normal fo cus . z Move cl o ser to the su bj ect , w it hin th e ra ng e of Mac r o or Super Mac r o fo cus (s e e Usi ng the F ocus Range Settings on page 38). FO C US T O O CL O SE The f o cus distance is clo ser th an th e ca me ra can f ocu s in Ma c r o mode . Mov e f a rt her aw a y fr om th e su b jec t (w ithin th e r ange of Mac r o fo cus - see pag e 38 ) . Blinking The f o cus distance is clo ser th an th e ca me ra can f ocu s wit hout be ing in Mac r o or Su p er Macr o mode . Set the ca mer a to Mac r o fo cu s o r Super Ma c r o fo cu s (s e e page 38), o r mo ve f arther aw a y . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 13 5 UNAB LE T O FO C US The c am era cannot f ind f ocus in Ma c r o or Su p er Macr o mode , p ossibl y due to lo w contr a st . z Use F o cus Lo ck (s ee page 38). P oint at a part o f th e sc ene t hat is br ighte r . z Ma k e su r e the camera is wi th i n th e ra ng e o f Mac r o focus or Su per Ma c r o fo cu s (se e page 3 8 ). LOW L I G H T - UNAB LE T O FO C US T h e s cen e is t oo dar k and the camer a ca nnot focus. z Add an e xte rnal li ght source . z Use F o cus Lo ck (s ee page 38). P oint at a part o f th e sc ene t hat is br ighte r . Super Macr o - Una ble to Zoom Z oom is disabled for S up er Macr o mode . Super Macr o only ha s one lens position . z If you w ant to z oom, tak e the camer a out of Su per Mac r o mode . (cam er a shake wa rn i n g ) The lig ht is low and the image is likely t o b e bl u rry du e to th e lon g ex pos ure re q u i re d. Use the f lash (se e Setting the F lash on page 41), or use a t rip od. M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
136 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual ERROR S A VING IM A GE The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d was h al f-l o cked or was remove d bef or e the cam er a f inished w r iting to t he car d. z Ch ec k to see i f th e t ab on th e ed ge o f t he mem ory car d is full y in the unlock ed po sition . z Al ways wa i t u nt i l th e P o w e r/Mem ory li ght stop s blin k ing befor e re m o v i n g t h e c a rd f ro m the ca mer a. F -n um ber and shutte r spe ed tu r n re d in Live V ie w The c am era i s out of ra ng e for the se le ct ed ap e rt u re o r shutt er speed. Select a d iffer ent apertur e when usin g the Apert u r e Pr io ri t y A v shooting mode . Ca nnot displ a y image P ossibl y a n im a g e ta ke n wi th anothe r camer a or a c orrupt image f ile ca us ed b y t he camer a not shutting do wn prop er ly . z T he image ma y still be oka y . T ran sfer t he i mage to y our compu ter and try openin g it w ith t he HP Ima ge Z one s o ft w ar e . z Do not r emo ve the memory car d when t he cam er a is tur ned on . Ca mera has e xp er ienced a fa t a l e rror T he c amer a ma y have a f irmware probl em. T u rn the cam er a off and then on again . I f that do es not f i x t he pr oblem , tr y r esetting the camer a (see Res e t t i ng t h e C a m e ra on page 112). If the p r oblem p e rs i s t s, n o t e th e e rror code and then call H P Support (see G etting Assistance on page 144 ) . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 13 7 Unkno wn U SB de vi ce The c am era i s connected t o a USB de vice t hat it does not re c o g n iz e . M ak e sure th at the ca mer a is connected t o a support ed pr inter or computer . Una ble to commun i c at e w ith pr inter There is no connecti on bet ween the cam er a and pr inter . z Chec k that the pr int er is tur n ed on. z Ma k e su r e the cable i s con nected bet w een the pr in ter and t he camer a or the op tional HP Phot osmar t R -ser i es doc k. If that doe s not w or k, tur n off th e c amer a and disc onnect it . T urn the pr in ter off and th en on again . R e -conn e ct the camer a and tur n it on . Unsupported pr inter T he pr in ter is an unsupported de vi ce . Connec t the camer a to a supported p rin ter , such as an H P P hot osmart or Pic t B ri d g e - c o mp a t i b l e pr inte r . Or connect t he camera to a comput er a nd pr int f r om ther e instead . Photo tr ay is engaged. Disengage phot o tr ay or select smaller paper si z e. T h e se le ct ed paper s i ze cannot be used with the p rint er phot o tr a y . Dis en gag e th e pr in ter photo tr ay , or c hange th e pa pe r s i z e . Pr inter top co ve r is open T he pr in ter is open. Cl os e th e to p c over of t he pr inte r . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
138 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Inc orr e ct or missing print cartri d ge The print e r cartri dge is the incor r e ct mode l or is m issing . Install a ne w pr inter car tr idge , tur n the pr inte r off , then turn it back on . Pr inter has a paper jam or The pr int car r iage ha s stalled Th er e is a paper jam o r th e pri n te r c a rri a g e has sta l le d. T u r n off the pr inter . Completel y clear the paper jam , then turn the pr inter bac k on . Pr inter is out of paper T he pr int er is out of paper . Load paper int o the pr inte r , an d t he n p r es s t he OK or Con tinue button on the pr inte r . Selected pr int si z e is lar ger than selected paper si z e. Pr int si ze is too large for th e paper s i ze . Pr ess Menu/OK on the camera t o r etur n to the Pr int Setup scr e en and select a prin t s i ze that ma tc hes th e p ap er s i ze . O r select a larger paper si ze an d l oa d lar ge r pa pe r in to the pr inter . Se le ct ed pa per si z e is too bi g f or pr inter . Se l ec te d pa per si z e is lar ger th an th e max imum siz e supported in the prin ter . Pr ess Menu/OK on the camera t o r etur n to the Pr int Setup scr e en and select a paper si z e that fits the pr inter . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 39 Bor d er less pr inting is onl y supported on photo paper . Y o u tr ied to pr int a bor derless image on plain paper . Select a s mal ler pr in t si z e or mak e s ur e P aper T ype on the Pr int Setup scr ee n is set to Ph ot o (pr ess Me n u/ OK on th e ca me ra to r e tu rn to t he P r i nt S etu p scr een an d se t P a per T y pe to Photo ) . P ut ph oto paper in the pr inter . Bor d er less pr inting is n ot supported on t his pr inter . The print e r d o es not support bor d er less pr inting. Pr ess Men u/ OK on the camera t o r eturn to the Pr int Setup scr e en and select a sma ller pr int si ze . Pr inting canceled Th e prin t job has been c ancele d. Pr ess the Me nu /O K button on the ca mer a. C omplet e the pr int r e quest again . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
140 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Err or M essa g es on th e Com p u ter M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on Cannot C onnect To P r o d u c t The co mp ute r needs to access f iles in memory dur ing HP In st ant Shar e setup . But eith er the int er nal me mory is f ull , or if an op tional memory car d is install e d , th e c a rd i s ei th er fu l l o r lo cke d. If inte rnal memory or the optional memo r y c ar d is f ul l , tr an sf er the images to a co mp ut er (s ee T r ansf er r ing Ima ge s t o a Comp uter on page 9 7) an d th en de le t e t he images f r om the ca mer a to f ree- up space (see Dele te on page 7 9 ) . If the optional memo r y c ar d is lo cked, unlo ck it b y sw itching the loc k ing ta b on th e ca r d to the un loc ked position . The c am era i s tur ne d o ff . T u rn o n t h e c a m e ra. The c am era i s not workin g cor r e ctl y . T r y connecting the c a m e ra d i re c t ly to a n HP Phot osmart or Pic t B ri d g e - c o mp a t i b l e pr inte r , and pr int an image . This w ill v er ify th at the image , opti onal memo ry car d , USB co nnec ti on , an d th e US B ca bl e ar e f un cti onin g c o rre ct ly . The c abl e i s no t connected cor r e ctl y . M ak e su r e that the cable is f irml y connected to t he computer and ca mer a.
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 141 Cannot C onnect To P r o d u c t (con tinue d ) The ca mera is set to the Di gital Cam er a s etting in the USB Configur ation sub-menu of the Setu p Me nu , but the com puter cannot re cogni ze th e cam era as a digital ca mera. Chang e t he US B Configurati on set ting to Disk Dri v e in the Set u p Me nu . (Se e page 106.) Th is a l lows th e ca m e ra to appear as another disk dr iv e on the c omputer so that y ou ca n ea sily cop y the image f iles fr om the ca m era to th e c o mpu t er har d dr i ve . The c am era i s connected to t he comput er th rough a US B h u b , and y o ur USB hub i s no t compatible w ith th e ca m era . Connec t the camer a dir ec tl y t o a U SB po rt o n the comput er . Yo u a r e u s i n g th e H P Phot osmart R - ser ies dock and f or got to pr ess th e Sav e/Pr int button . Pr ess the Save/ P rint button on the doc k. M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
14 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Cannot C onnect To P r o d u c t (con tinue d ) The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d is locke d. S w itch th e lockin g tab on the memory car d t o the un loc ked position . The USB connection fa ile d. Reb oot the compute r. Cou ld N ot S end To S e r v i c e The co mp ute r i s not connected to th e In te rnet. M ak e su r e your compu ter is online . Communi c ati on Pr obl em Other HP In stant Shar e soft ware is r unning w ith e x clusi ve access to you r c am e ra. Close the other HP I nst an t Shar e pr ogram . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 143 Ca mera Self-diagn os tic T ests If you think your cam er a may be d efecti v e or mal func tioning in some wa y , there is a diagnostic pr og r am (a set of ele ven diff er en t tests ) tha t yo u can r un on the cam er a to try to de t er min e t he p r oble m . T he f oll o w ing ar e tes t ed o n the cam er a: flash , lig hts, butto ns, Live V iew , c olor on the Image Disp lay , A udi o P la yba ck , Rec o rd Au d io , optiona l memor y c ard , and inter na l memor y . NO TE T he te st is in English onl y . 1 Tu r n o f f t h e c a m e r a . 2 Hold down the Fl a s h bu tton on the b ack of t he cam er a. 3 T u rn o n t h e c a m e ra wh i l e c o n t i n u i n g t o ho l d d own th e Fl a s h bu tto n o n th e bac k o f the camer a . A blue s cr ee n titled CAM ER A S EL F - D IA GNOS TICS app ears on the Image Disp la y . R elea se the Fl a s h button once the scr een appea rs. 4 F ol low the si mple i nst ruction s o n the Im age Di sp la y to per for m th e s et of test s. So m e t est s will tel l you i f the c a mera passe d or fail ed , whi le oth er te sts will m ake the c am er a do somethi ng, and y ou must che c k to se e if the ca mera d id it cor r ectl y . If an y of th e tests f ail , no te wh ic h one(s) so that y ou can pr o v ide this inf or mati on wh en y ou conta ct HP Supp ort . The enti re set o f test s ta k es on ly a f ew m inu tes to c om plet e . 5 T o e xit th e diag nostic pr o gram at an y point , simply t urn off the c a me r a.
14 4 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Get tin g Assis tan ce This sec tion contains support inf orma tion for y our d ig i tal camer a , inc l u ding suppo rt we bsit e in f or matio n , an e xplan ati on of the support pr oc ess, and suppor t phone numbers . HP Acces sib ilit y W e bsite C us tom er s w ith disa b ilitie s can ge t hel p b y v isiting w ww .hp .com/hpinf o/community /accessibil it y/pr odserv HP Photos ma rt W ebsite Vi s i t w w w .photosmar t .h p .c om or w w w .hp .com /phot osma rt fo r the f ollo w ing infor m ati on: z Ti ps o n us i n g yo u r c a m era m o re ef fe c t ive l y a n d c r e a t iv e ly z HP dig ital came r a dr iv er u pda te s and so ftwa r e z Reg i st e r you r pro d uc t z Subscribe to n e wsl etters, dri ver and soft war e up dates, an d suppor t al ert s Su ppor t Process T he H P su ppo rt pr oces s w or ks m ost eff ecti v el y if y ou pe rf o r m th e fo llo win g st eps in t he o r der s pec if ied: 1 R e vie w the t r oubles hooti ng se ction o f this Userâs M anual (se e P r oble ms an d Solut ions on page 1 19) . 2 A c ces s the HP Customer Suppor t Center website for supp ort . If you h ave acc es s to th e I ntern et, yo u ca n obta i n a wide r ange of information about your digi tal c amera . Visit the HP w ebs ite f or product he lp , dri ver s, a nd soft ware u p dates at www . hp .c o m/ su p po rt
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 14 5 Cu stomer Supp ort is av ai lable in t he follo wing la nguag es : Du tc h , E nglish , F r en ch , Ger man , Ital ian , P or tugue se , Spanis h , S wedi sh, T raditional Chines e , Simpl ified Chi nese , Ja pane se , K or e an . (Danish , F innish , an d No r w egi an suppor t i nfor mat ion i s av ai lable in Eng li sh only .) 3 A cce ss HP e-su ppor t . I f y ou ha v e a cces s to the In te r net , con nect w ith HP v ia e-mail b y g oin g to : www .h p .c om / su ppo rt . Y o u w ill r ece i v e a per so nal r ep l y f r om an H P Cu st omer Supp ort techn ici a n. E - mai l s upport is av a i lable in the l ang uages l ist ed at th at website . 4 (US an d Can adian custom er s ski p t hi s step and go on to S te p 5 .) Con tac t yo ur local HP deal er . If y our di gita l camer a has a ha r dw a r e fail ure , ta k e it to your loc al HP de aler for a solution. S er v ice i s fr ee du r in g yo u r d igit al c amera âs li mit ed w arr ant y per io d. 5 Cont a ct the HP Cu stomer Support Center for support by phone . Please consul t the follo wing w ebs it e to c h eck the de tails and co nditi ons o f ph on e sup port in yo ur cou ntry/ re g i o n : www .h p .c om /s u p po r t . As a part of HPâs continuing e ff or ts t o im pr o v e ph on e su ppo rt i nfo rm ati o n se rv i ce s, w e adv is e you to check the HP websi te on a r eg ula r bas is f or ne w information regar d ing ser vice feat ur es and del i ver y . If y ou ca nnot solv e the pr oblem us i ng the abo ve options, ca ll HP whi le you ar e in fr ont of y ou r c o mputer a nd digi ta l cam era . F or faster s er vi ce, ple ase b e pr ep ar e d to p r ov id e the f ollo w ing infor m ati on: ⢠Th e digi tal ca mera âs mod el numb er (on the fr ont of the camer a) ⢠T he d i gital came r a âs s er i al n umber (o n the bo t t om o f t he camer a) ⢠The computerâs oper ati ng s ystem an d av a ilable R AM
146 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual ⢠Th e v ersion of the HP soft war e (on the CD label) ⢠Mes sag es d ispl a yed at the t im e th e s it uat ion oc curr ed The applicable c ondi tion s for HP phon e sup port a r e subject to ch ange w ith out no ti ce. T elepho ne supp ort is fr ee fr om the da te of pur chase f or t he per io d sp ecif ie d un less other wise note d. Phone Su ppor t in the U nited States Su ppo rt is a v aila ble bo th dur ing an d aft er th e w ar r an ty per io d . W it hin the per iod of yo u r wa rr ant y , telephone s upport i s pr ovi ded f ree of cha r ge. Ca ll (8 00) 4 7 4 -68 36. US phone s upport is av ai lable i n both Eng lis h a nd Span is h 2 4 h our s a da y , 7 d ay s a w ee k (da y s and hou r s of su ppo rt ma y ch ange w ith out no ti ce) . A ft er t he w ar r an t y per io d , call (800) 4 7 4 -6 8 3 6 . Ch ar ges ar e $3 0.0 0 p er iss ue , and a r e char ged t o y ou r c r e dit car d . If y ou thin k y our HP pr o duct need s ser v ice , cal l the HP C ustomer Su pport C en ter , w hi ch can hel p det er mine if se r v ice is re q u i re d . Lo cation s Phone S upport P eri od Af ri ca 30 da ys Asi a P ac if ic 1 y ear Can ada 1 year E ur ope 1 y ear Lat in Am er ica 1 year Midd le E ast 30 day s Uni ted States 1 yea r
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 14 7 Phone Su p por t in Eu r ope, th e Middle E ast, and A fric a HP Cu s tomer S uppor t phone numbers an d policies ma y c hang e. V isit t he f oll ow ing w eb site to c hec k the det ails an d conditi ons of ph o ne sup port in yo ur country /r egion: www . hp .c o m/ su p po rt Alger ia 21 3 61 5 6 4 5 43 Aus t ria 43 1 86 33 2 10 00 0810 - 001000 ( in-country ) Bahr ain 800 17 1 (in- country toll-f r ee) Belgium 0 7 0 300 005 (Dutch) 0 7 0 30 0 004 (F renc h) Cz e ch Republic 4 20 2 6 130 7 310 Denm ark 4 5 7 0 202 84 5 Egy p t 20 2 5 3 2 5 22 2 Fi n l a n d 35 8 ( 0)203 66 7 6 7 Fr a n c e 33 (0)8 92 6 9 60 2 2 (Eur o 0. 34/m inute) German y 4 9 (0)180 5 6 5 2 18 0 (E uro 0.12/minute) Gr eec e 30 210 60 7 3603 ( international n um ber ) 8 01 11 2 2 5 5 4 7 (in-cou n try) 800 9 2 64 9 (t ol l-f r ee f r om C y pr u s to A the ns) Hu ngar y 3 6 1 38 2 11 11 Ir eland 18 90 9 2 3 902 Israel 9 7 2 (0) 9 830 4848 Italy 848 800 8 71
148 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Luxem bo u rg 900 40 0 06 (F r enc h) 90 0 40 0 0 7 (G er man ) Mid dle E ast 9 71 4 3 66 20 20 ( int er na ti on al nu mbe r ) Mor occo 212 2 2 404 7 4 7 Net her lands 0900 2020 16 5 (Eur o 0.1 0/minute) Niger ia 2 34 1 3 204 999 Norw a y 4 7 815 6 2 0 7 0 Po l a n d 48 2 2 5 666 000 Po r t u g a l 8 08 201 4 92 Ro m a n i a 40 (21) 315 44 4 2 Ru s s i a n Fe d e ra t i o n 7 09 5 7 9 7 3 5 20 (Moscow) 7 812 34 6 7 99 7 ( St . P ete rsb ur g) Sa udi Ar ab ia 80 0 8 9 7 1444 (in -co un try t ol l-f r ee) Slov a kia 421 2 5 02 2 2 4 4 4 Sou th Af ri ca 086 0001030 ( R epublic o f Sout h Afr ica) 27 1 1 25893 0 1 ( i n t e r n a t i o n a l n u m b e r) S pain 90 2 010 05 9 S weden 46 (0) 77 120 4 7 6 5 Swi t ze rl a n d 0848 6 7 2 6 7 2 (Ger ma n , F r ench , Italianâ P ea k time 0. 08 C HF/ Outsi de peak 0. 04 CHF ) Tu n i s i a 216 71 8 9 12 2 2 Tu r k e y 90 2 16 5 7 9 71 71 Ukr aine 7 (380 44) 4 903 5 20 (Kie v ) Unit e d Ar ab E mir ates 800 45 20 ( in-country toll-fr e e )
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 49 Un i te d Ki ng d om 4 4 (0)8 7 0 01 0 4 3 20 We s t A f r i c a 3 5 1 213 17 6 3 80 (F r ench-speaking c oun tr ie s onl y) O t he r Phon e S upp or t W orl dw i de HP Cu s tomer S uppor t phone numbers an d policies ma y c hang e. V isit t he f oll ow ing w eb site to c hec k the det ails an d conditi ons of ph o ne sup port in yo ur country /r egion: www . hp .c o m/ su p po rt . Ar gent in a (54)11 - 4 77 8- 8 380 or 0 - 810 -55 5- 5 5 20 Aus t ral ia 61 (3) 88 77 8 000 or lo cal ( 03) 88 77 8000 Br a zil 0 800 - 1 5- 77 51 or (11 )3 7 4 7 - 77 99 Canada 1-800 - 4 7 4 -68 36 (905- 206 - 466 3 fr om w ithin local Mississauga cal ling ar ea) Chile 800 -3 60 -999 China 86 (21) 3881 4 5 18 Colombia 01-80 0 -51- HP -IN VENT Costa Ri c a 0 -80 0 - 011- 4114 1 -800 - 711- 2884 Ecu a d o r 999-119 1-800 - 71 1- 2884 ( Andinatel) 1- 800 - 2 25-5 28 1-800 - 711 - 28 8 4 (P acif itel) Gu ate mal a 180 0 - 99 9- 5105 Hong K ong S A R 852 28 02 4 0 98 India 1 600 4 4 77 3 7 Indonesia 6 2 (21) 3 50 3408 Jamaica 1-80 0 - 7 112 884
150 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Japan 05 7 0 0 00 511 (i nside J apan) 81 3 3 3 35 9 800 (outside Ja p an ) K or ea , R e publ i c of 8 2 1588-3003 Mala ys ia 1 80 0 80 5 40 5 Me x i co 0 1 - 8 0 0 - 472- 6 6 8 4 o r ( 5 5 ) 52 5 8 - 9 9 2 2 Ne w Ze aland 64 (9) 35 6 6640 Pa n a m a 00 1-800 - 711 - 2884 Pe r u 0 -800 -10 111 Philippine s 63 (2) 86 7 35 51 Republica D om i nica na 1- 800 - 7 11- 2 884 Singapor e 65 6272 53 0 0 Ta i w a n 886 0 800 01 005 5 Tha i l an d 66 (0) 2 35 3 900 0 T r ini dad & T obag o 1-800 - 71 1- 2884 U nited S tat es 1 (8 00) 4 7 4 -6 8 3 6 Ve n e z u e l a 0- 80 0- 4 7 4 6- 8 3 6 8 Vie t n a m 8 4 (0) 8 8 2 3 4 5 3 0
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 15 1 Appe ndi x A : Managing B a t ter ies Y our camera uses a r e chargeable H P Photosmart R0 7 l ithiu m ion battery for HP Photo sma rt R -ser ies camer as (L181 2A). T op P oin ts Abou t B a t teri es z Ne w r ec har geab le batte r ie s ar e ship ped p arti all y c har ged . Lithiu m ion r e ch argeable b att eri es mu st be fully char g ed be fo re fi rst u s e o r i f u n use d for 2 mo n th s . z If you do n ot inte nd to use you r c am er a for exten de d pe r iod s o f time (mo r e t han tw o m on th s) , HP r e comm ends t hat y ou r emo v e the batte ry unle ss yo u ar e u sin g a r echa rgeable bat ter y and a re leav in g the camera dock e d or con nec ted to an HP A C powe r adapter . z Wh en inserting the ba ttery in the cam er a , alw ay s be sur e t o orient th e bat te r y as d i r ec te d b y th e ma r k i ngs in th e b at ter y com partmen t . If the batt ery is inserte d i mp r ope rl y , the com partmen t doo r ma y c los e bu t the camer a wi ll no t oper a te .
15 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l z Y ou m igh t no tice that occasi onal ly the batte r y ga uge w ill f lu ctua te w ith the same batte ry . T his occ ur s beca u se some oper a ti ng modes, such as Live V i ew o r vid e o re c o rd i n g, consum e mor e po w er than othe r modes. This w ill ca use the bat ter y gauge to i ndic ate that y ou r bat ter y lev el is lower , becau se batt ery oper ating tim e in th ose m odes is short er . W hen y ou sw itc h t o a m ode t ha t r eq uir es le ss po w er , lik e Pl ay b a c k , the batte ry ga uge m ay g o u p , indi cating t hat th er e is mor e o per ating time le ft in the ba t te r y if y ou st ay in that mod e. Extending B a t ter y Lif e He r e ar e some tips f or e xten ding batte r y life: z T u r n off th e Ima ge D isp la y an d u se the vi e wfi nde r ins tea d when fr a mi ng pictur es and v ideo. Leav e th e Imag e D isplay off whene ver pos sib le . z Change th e L i v e V ie w a t P o w er On s etting in the Setup Men u to Li ve Vi ew O f f , so th at your camera does not po wer on in Li ve View (s ee L iv e V ie w at P o w er On on pag e 104 ) . z Minimi z e the us e of fl ash b y setting y our camer a to Au t o Fl a s h , i ns tead of Fl a s h O n (se e Setti ng t he F l as h on page 4 1) . z Us e optical z oom only when ne cessary to mi nimi z e mo v ing t he len s (see Op tical Z oom on page 4 0) . z Minimi z e unnecessary po w er c y cling . If y ou e xpect to av er age mor e th an t w o pi ctu re e very f iv e mi nutes, le av e the camer a on w ith the I mage Displa y o ff , r athe r tha n tu rning o ff t he ca mer a af ter eac h sh ot . T his minimi z es t he n umbe r o f times the lens must e xtend and r etrac t.
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 1 5 3 z Use th e H P A C pow er adapter or opt ional H P P hotosm ar t R -seri es do c k w hen the c amera will b e on for e x tended pe r i ods o f time , suc h a s w hen y ou tr ans fe r im age s t o y our computer o r when pr inting. Safet y Precau tions for Usin g L i th i u m Io n Batt e r ie s z Do not pla ce the bat tery i n f ir e or heat the ba tter y . z Do n ot conne ct the positi ve ter minal and the n egati v e termi n a l of the ba t ter y to e ach ot he r with a ny m e tal o bjec t (suc h as w ir e) . z Do not c arr y o r sto r e th e bat te r y to g ethe r with c oi ns, necklaces, hairpins, or other metal obj e cts. Plac ing a li thiu m ion batter y with coin s is espe c ial l y danger ous to the user! T o a v oi d inj ury , do not dr op t his ba t te ry into a c hange-f ille d po ck et . z Do not p ier ce the batte r y w ith nails , str ike the b attery w ith a hammer , step on t he bat tery , or other w i se s ubj e ct it to st r ong im pacts or sh ock s. z Do n ot so lde r dir ectl y on to the battery . z Do not e x p ose th e bat ter y to water or sa l t wate r , or al low the b at te r y to get wet . z Do n ot d isas sem bl e or modify t he ba ttery . T he batt ery contai ns safet y an d pr ote ction dev ices, wh i ch, if damaged, may c ause th e ba t ter y to g en er ate he at , explod e , or ign ite. z Imme diately disc ontinue use of the ba tter y if , while usi ng , chargin g , or stor i ng the bat ter y , th e bat ter y emi ts an unusual sm el l , feels ex ces siv ely hot (note that it i s nor ma l f or the b at ter y to fe el war m ) , ch a nges c o lor or sh ape, or appe ars ab normal in an y other wa y .
154 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual z In the e v en t th e ba t t ery l eaks an d the fl ui d ge ts int o o ne âs ey e, d o n o t ru b t h e eye . Ri n s e we l l wi t h wa t e r a n d imm ed iately seek medica l ca r e . If lef t untr eated, the ba tter y fluid could cause dama ge to th e e ye . Battery P erf or manc e The follo wing tabl e s ho ws how the r ech a r ge able HP Ph ot osmart R0 7 lithium ion batte ry perf or ms in dif f er ent typ es o f us e scen ar io s: A t low t e mper atures, batter y perfor ma nce may be r ed uced. Under these condit ions, y ou may be able to r ev iv e the bat ter y b y w ar ming it in a p ock et immedi at el y bef or e u se . H o we ve r , ensure th at th er e ar e no m eta llic i tems i n th e p ocke t that coul d cau se a shor t c ir cuit . Ty p e o f u s e Pe r f o r m a n c e M o st e conomical (mo r e than 30 pi ctur es p er mont h) Good M ost economi ca l (fe w er than 30 pictur es per mo nth) Good Hea vy us e of f la sh , f r eq uen t p ic tur es Good Hea vy us e o f v id eo Good Hea vy us e o f Live View Good Ove r all batte ry lif e Good Lo w temper atur e /win ter use Fa i r Inf r eq uen t u se ( w it ho ut do ck ) Fa i r Inf r equ en t u se ( w it h do c k) Goo d Spar e batter y (fo r long-term s tor age) Po o r W ant to r e char ge b attery Y es
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 1 5 5 Nu mb er o f Sh ot s pe r Battery Char ge The follo wing tabl e s how s th e min imu m , m aximum, and av er age number of shots that may be obtai ned using the r echa rgeable HP Ph otosmar t R 0 7 l ithi u m ion bat tery . In th e abo v e ta ble , plea se no te th at: z T h e minim u m n umber of shot s is o bt ain ed w it h e xt en si v e u se of Li v e V i e w (30 se cond s pe r pi ctu r e) and Pl ay b a ck (15 secon ds pe r p ictu r e) , an d Fl a s h O n . Optical zoom (both dir e ctions) is used on 7 5 % of shots. Fo u r p ictu r es a r e tak en per sess ion with at le ast 5 m i nutes of f bet ween s ess ions. z T h e max imu m n umbe r o f sho ts is o bt ain ed w it h mini mal u se of Li v e V i e w (2 5% o f pi ctu r e s f or 10 s eco nds) and Pl ay b a ck ( 4 sec on ds p er pict ur e ) . Flash i s used on 25% of s hots, an d optical z oom ( both di r ections) is used on 25% of shot s . F ou r p i ctur es ar e t ak en pe r s es sio n w ith at le as t 5 min ute s o ff bet w een s essions. z Th e av er age number of shots is obtained with Live V iew u sed f or 5 0% o f t he p ic tur es f or 15 seco n ds, an d Pl a yb a c k us e d f or 8 seconds per p ictur e . F l a s h is used on 5 0% of shots, and opt ical zoom (b oth directions) is used on 50% of shot s. F our pi ct u r es a r e ta k en per sess ion with at le ast 5 minute s off bet w e en session s. Minimum nu m b er o f s hot s Maxi mum number of shots Appr o x i mate numb er of shots under aver age use 115 2 60 200
156 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Battery Gauge T he f oll o w ing ba ttery le v els ma y be disp la y ed o n th e st atu s scr een, in Live V i ew , in Pl ayback , and w hen th e came r a is connect ed to a com pute r or pr inter. NO TE T he ba ttery ga ug e is mo st a c c ur ate afte r a f e w min ut es o f us e . W hen the came r a is tu rn ed o ff , th e batt ery r eco v ers a nd the initi al gaug e r eading w hen t he camer a is turned on a gai n may not be as accurate as that obta in ed af ter a fe w mi nu tes of use. Ico n Desc r ipti on Ba t te r y h as 6 5-100 per cen t battery lif e r emaining . Batter y has 35-6 5 p er cent bat tery l ife r emain ing. Battery has 10 -3 5 per c ent b attery lif e r emaining . Batter y has l ess than 10 per cent battery l if e r ema in ing. Cam er a will po wer do wn soon. Li ve View is disabled (see Note belo w) . Cam e r a is oper ating on A C pow er (w ith no batte r y install e d) . Ani ma ted battery f illing u p Cam e ra is oper ating on A C power and is c h ar ging th e b at ter y . Camer a has successfull y com pleted battery char ging and is operating on A C power .
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 1 5 7 NO TE When y ou remo v e the batt er y fr om the c amera , the date a nd tim e set t in gs ar e pr es er v e d f or appro ximately 10 minu tes . If the camer a is w it hou t a ba t te r y f o r lo nger tha n 10 m inu tes, the clo ck i s set to the last da te a nd t ime at which the cam era w as used. Y ou ma y b e pr ompted to updat e the da te and tim e the next ti m e you p o wer on the camer a. R e c ha r g i ng th e Li th i u m Io n Battery Th e r echargea b le H P P hotosmar t R 0 7 li thi um ion ba ttery c an be r e ch ar ged in t he cam er a w hen the camer a is connec ted to the HP A C po wer ada pter or opt ion a l HP Phot os mart R -seri es do ck . T he l ithium i on ba ttery can al so be r echa rg ed w it h the optional H P Photosm art bat tery quick r e charger or in the spare bat tery b ay of the HP Photosmar t R - ser ies do ck . Se e Appe ndix B : Pu rc h a s i n g C a m e ra Ac c e s s o ri e s on p age 161. When th e HP A C adapter i s used to charge t he b att er y and the cam er a is off , the P o wer/Memor y light on the b ack of t he cam era w il l bl in k du r in g chargin g. When the do ck is used, the dock light wil l bli nk. W h en t he quick r echarger is used , the lig ht on th e quick recharger will be y el low . The foll o win g table shows th e av erage ti me i t ta k es to recha r ge a bat ter y th at has be en fully dis char g ed, depend in g on wher e t he ba t t ery is bein g c har ged . T he ta bl e also not es the sig nal y ou w ill s ee w he n t he ba tte ry h a s bee n r e ch ar ged .
158 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual If you w ill not be usi ng y our camer a imme d iat ely af ter charging t he bat ter y , we r ec omm end that y ou le ave the c amera in th e do ck or pl ugge d in to the HP A C adapter . The camera will top of f the ba tte r y periodic ally to en su r e tha t the c a mera i s alwa y s r e ady for us e . Some things t o k eep in mind wh en us ing a lithium ion ba ttery ar e as follow s: z T he f irst time tha t yo u u se a ne w lithium i on ba ttery , be sur e th at y ou f ull y c har ge it bef or e using it in the cam er a . z A li thiu m ion batter y discha r ges when not in u s e , whether it is inst all ed in a came r a or no t . If a lith ium i on battery h as not been used for mor e th a n t wo months, r echarge it befor e u sing it aga in. E ve n if y ou ar e no t using your ba t t ery , it is a g o o d i d e a t o c h a r g e i t e ve r y s ix m o n t h s t o a y e a r t o p ro l o n g its u se ful lif e . Wher e ba ttery is char ged Ave ra g e ch arge ti m e Signal w hen char ging has completed In cam er a w it h HP A C pow er ad apt er co nnec t ed o r w hil e camer a is in t he dock 4 -6 hour s P o wer/Mem ory ligh t on camer a (or t he P o w er li ght on the dock) stops blinking and tur ns on solid . O n the Image Displa y of the ca mer a , the battery gauge changes to . In batter y bay o f dock 2 .5- 3. 5 hour s Sp a r e b att ery li g ht on doc k stop s blinking and tur ns on In HP q ui ck re c h a rg e r 1 hour or le ss L ight on qui ck r echar ger tur ns gr een
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 1 5 9 z The performance of all r ech ar g eabl e bat ter ies, incl udi ng lit hiu m ion, w il l de gr a de ov er ti me, espe c ially if they ar e stor ed and used at high temper atures. If bat tery l ife has bec om e unac cept ably r educ ed o ver ti me , r ep lace the bat ter y with an H P Photosm art R0 7 l ith iu m ion bat ter y for HP Photo sma rt R -ser ies camer as (L181 2A). z The cam era , th e do ck, or the quick r e charger may be w a rm w hile ope r ating and char ging a lit hium io n batte ry . T his is norm a l. z A li th iu m ion b at tery ca n be left i n t he ca mera , the do ck , or the quick r ech arger fo r any per iod of t ime without h a r m to t he batte ry or the came r a , the doc k , or the q ui ck r echa r ger . Al wa y s st or e c har ged batte r ie s in a cool locati on . Safet y Precau tions f o r Rec h arging L i th i u m Io n Batt e r ie s z Do n ot c ha r ge an y batte ry ot he r t han t he HP Ph ot osma rt R0 7 l ith i u m ion b att er y i n th e cam e r a , th e dock, or th e quick re c h a rg e r . z In s ert th e l i thi u m io n b at te r y i n the co rr ec t o r ien tat ion in the cam era , th e dock, or the quick r e charger . z U se the came r a, t he do c k , o r t he q ui c k r ech ar g er i n a dry loca tion on ly . z Do n ot c har ge a lit h ium ion b atte r y in a hot lo cati on , su ch as in di r e ct sunl ig ht or near a fir e. z W hen r ec har ging a lithiu m io n batte ry , do no t cov er the cam era , th e dock, or the quick r e charger i n a ny w ay . z Do n ot operate the c amera , t he do ck , or the quick r ech arger if th e li th iu m ion b att er y appe ars da mage d in an y wa y .
160 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual z Do n ot d isas semb le t he cam er a, th e doc k , or the q u i c k re c h a rg e r . z Unpl ug the H P A C pow er adapt er or the quick r ech arger fr om th e elect r ical outlet befor e cle a nin g the po wer adapter or q u ic k r echarger . z After exte ns ive use , th e li th i um ion ba t ter y ma y b eg i n to s w ell . If it be comes diff ic ul t to in sert t he battery int o or r emo v e th e ba tte ry f r om t he came r a , th e d oc k , o r the qui c k r ech ar ger , disco ntin ue u se of the b attery an d r epl ace it wit h a n e w o ne . P lea se r ecy cle th e o ld b att ery . Sleep T im e -out for P o we r C onser v a tion T o cons erve battery po w er , the Ima ge Dis pla y tur ns off au to matica ll y if the r e is no b utt on acti vity f or 60 secon ds, and the ca m er a s huts down af ter 5 m inu tes. Whe n t he ca me r a i s in t his â sleep â st at e , pr essing an y butt on w il l w ak e u p t he came r a agai n . If no but tons are pressed du r i ng the s le ep st ate, the came r a w ill tur n off aft er a n additi onal 5 min ut es , u nles s it is con nec ted to a c omputer , pr i nter , or HP A C po wer adapter .
App endix B : Pur chas i ng Cam era Ac ce ssories 16 1 Appe ndi x B : P urc h a si n g C am era Accessori es Y ou can pur cha se ad ditiona l accesso r ies f or y our camer a. F or i nfor mat ion on your HP R50 7/ R60 7 and c ompat ible acce ssor ie s, g o to: z ww w .hp .com/ go/m yh pcamer a (US ) z ww w .hp .ca/m yhpcame r a (Ca n ada) z www . hp .c o m (all ot her cou ntr ies ) T o purc hase acc essor ies, vis it your loca l retailer or order onli ne at: z www . hp sh op p in g . co m (U S) z www . hp sh op p in g . ca (Can ada) z w w w .hp . com /eur/h pop tions (Europe) z w w w . hp . com /ap ac/ home andof f ice (A s ia P a ci fic )
16 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Som e acce ss or i es f or this di gital cam er a ar e as f ollo ws: z HP Phot os mart R -s er ies do ck â C888 7A Ch ar ge y ou r came r a's ba ttery plu s a s par e in t he e x tr a ch ar ging ba y , so y our ca mer a is al w a y s r ead y t o go . T r ans fe r ph ot os ea sil y to y ou r computer , send photo e -ma il s vi a H P I nst ant S hare , or pr i nt photos at the touch of a but ton. Connect to y our T V and v i ew p hoto slid esho ws w ith the r emot e contr ol . Inc lud es a doc k w it h e xtr a c har ging b ay f or a lithium io n bat ter y , a r e mote control , a rechargeable HP Ph otosmar t R0 7 lit hi um ion bat tery , a n aud io/video c able , a US B c abl e , and an HP A C p ow er a dapter (N orth Am eri ca on ly) . z HP Phot osma rt Q uic k Re cha r ge Kit f or HP Photosmar t R - s e ri e s c a m e ra s âL1810 A ( Not av a ilabl e in Latin Amer ica) One- hour r ec ha r ging of the lithium ion battery , plus pr ot ection for y our HP Phot os mart R - ser ies c amer a. Includes all y ou need t o p r o vi de a h ome a w a y f r o m ho me f or y our camer a: an ult r a -lig ht weight r e ch arger , a ca mera case, a tr av el pouch , and a r e ch argeable H P Ph oto s ma rt R0 7 lit hi um ion bat ter y . z Rec ha r g eable HP Photosm ar t R0 7 li thiu m ion b at ter y f or HP Photosmar t R -ser ies ca m er as âL18 12A Hi g h- cap acit y ba tter y that can be r echa rged hund r ed s of times .
App endix B : Pur chas i ng Cam era Ac ce ssories 1 63 z HP Photosma rt 3 .3V A C po wer adap ter for HP Photosma rt R - s e ri e s c a m e ra s âC8912 B ( Not av a ilable in Lati n Am er ica) This is the only p ow er a dapter s upport ed fo r use with R - s e ri e s c a m e ra s. z HP Phot osma rt SD memor y c ar ds (Nor th Amer ica only) (F or import ant in for mat ion about s upporte d t ypes of memor y ca r ds, see Stor age on page 16 7 .) ⢠HP Pho to smart 64 M B SD m em ory c ar d âC88 9 6 A ⢠HP Photosmart 128 MB SD memor y cardâC889 7A ⢠HP Photo sma rt 25 6 MB SD memory cardâL1813 A ⢠HP Photo sma rt 512 MB SD memory car d âL181 4A z HP Phot os mart premium case for HP Photo s mar t R -ser ies came r as âL1811A Pr ote ct y ou r HP Phot o smart R -se ri es came r a w ith th is padde d le ather c ase . Des igne d to fit H P d igit al ca mer as, the case feat ur es an eas y-ac c ess magnet ic closu r e , stor age pouch for memor y ca r ds, e xt r a bat ter ies, an d mor e . z www . ca s es on l in e .c om âGo to www . ca se so n li ne . com to de sig n y ou r o wn c ust om cas e to f it y our H P Pho tosm art R - ser ies c a mer a. Ch o ose th e st yle , materi a l , and c olor for y our camer a ca se .
164 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual
Ap pe ndix C : Sp eci f ic at ion s 165 Appe ndi x C : Spe c ifi c a tions Fe a t u re Desc r iption Res o l ut io n Sti ll pict u res: ⢠4. 2 3 MP (2 408 b y 17 5 8) t ot al pi x el co unt ⢠4.05 MP (2 3 2 0 by 17 4 4) effectiv e pi x el co unt Vide o cl ip s : ⢠2 88 by 21 6 total pi x el co unt Sensor Diagonal 7 .2 mm (1/ 2 .5-inch , 4:3 f or mat) CCD Color depth 3 6 bit (12 bits b y 3 color s) Lens F ocal length: ⢠Wi deâ 5 .8 mm ⢠T el ephot oâ17 .4 mm ⢠3 5 mm equi valen t appr o x imat ely 3 5 mm - 105 mm F- N u m b e r : ⢠Wi deâ f/ 2 .6 to f/ 4.3 ⢠T el ephot oâf/4.8 to f/7 .6 Lens thr eads None View find er Zooming optical v i ewf inder , 3x magnifi c atio n w ithout di opter adj ust Zoom 3x opti c al , 7x di gital z oom
166 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Fo c u s TTL a ut o f oc u s . F o c us settings: ⢠Normal (d efa ul t)â auto focu s r an ge of 40 cm (16 in) t o infini ty ⢠Ma cr oâ auto f o cu s r ange of 18 cm to 50 cm ( 7 in to 20 in) at all z oom positions ⢠Super M acr oâ6 c m to 25 cm (2 .5 in to 10 i n) z F ocus settin gs: Nor m al F ocu s (de f aul t), Mac r o , Su per Mac r o Shutt er speed 1/2000 t o 16 secon ds Tr i p o d m o u n t Ye s Built-in f la s h Y es , 2 .5-second typi cal r echar ge tim e Ex te rnal flash No Fl as h s e t t i n g s Fl a s h O f f , Auto F lash (def ault), Re d - E ye , Fl a s h On , Night Image Displa y 1. 5-inch co lor ac ti ve matr i x, 120, 480 pi xe ls (50 2 b y 2 40) Fe a t u re Desc r iption
Ap pe ndix C : Sp eci f ic at ion s 16 7 Storag e z 3 2 MB inter nal f lash memory , w ith appro xim at ely 2 7 M B for s torag e of im ag e s z Slot for me mo r y c a r d z T his camer a su pports both Sec ure Di gital (SD) and MultiMediaCar d TM (MMC ) mem ory ca r ds 8 MB and lar ge r . Only MMC cards that have been verif ied compliant to th e MultiM ediaCar d specification are supported. C ompl iant MMC memory card s have the MultiMediaCar d logo on the card or package. z SD c ards ar e r ecommended , as t he y ar e fa ste r t han M MC car ds at r eading and wr iting dat a . z T his camer a ma y support memory car ds up to 2 GB, though HP h as only tested up to 5 12 M B. Car ds lar ger t han 2 GB w ill not w or k. A hi gh capacity ca r d itsel f doe s not af f ect c amer a perf o rmanc e, bu t a lar ge number o f fil es (o v er 300) does affect the time it tak es for t he ca mer a to t urn o n. z T he number o f ima ges that can be sav ed in memo ry de p en ds on the Image Quality set ti ngs (see Mem ory C apa c ity o n page 1 71) . Image c a ptu r e options z St i ll (default) z Self - T imer â still pictur e or v ideo clip tak e n after 10-s econd de lay z Self - Time r - 2 shots âs t il l pic tu re ta ken a f ter 10-s econd de la y , then a secon d pi ctur e tak en abou t 3 seconds later . Singl e v ideo tak en afte r 10-second del ay . z Burst âc amer a tak es appr o x imat ely 5 shots in a r ow a s qui ckl y as it possibl y can until th e buff er is fu l l z Vid e o â2 4 f r ames per se cond ( include s a udio), until t he camer a r uns out of memo r y Fe a t u re Desc r iption
168 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Audio captur e z St i ll pi ct u res âm aximu m of 6 0 se co nds c a n b e re c o r d e d z Burst âaudio ca ptur e not av ailable z Vid e o cl i p s â a u d i o i s re c o rd e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y Shooting modes Au to (def ault ) , Action , L a ndscape , Po r t r a i t , Beac h/Sno w , Sunset , A p e r t u re P ri o ri t y , Pa n o r a m a Image Qual ity settings z 4MP z 4MP (def aul t) z 2MP z VGA z Cust om... I mage Quality (R eso lutio n and Comp r ess ion) set t ings Expos ur e Comp e nsa tion settings Can be set ma nuall y fr om -3. 0 to 3. 0 E V (Ex posure V a lue ) in 1/3 EV incr ements. Whi te Bala nce settings A uto (def ault) , Sun , Shade , T ungst e n , F luor es c ent , Manual AE Met er ing settings A v er a ge , Center - W e ighted (default) , Spot I S O S peed settings A ut o (d ef ault),100, 200, 400 Adapti ve Light i ng settings Off (d ef ault) , Low , High Colo r settings F ull Col or (def a ult) , Blac k & White , Sep ia Satur ation settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault ) , High Sh ar pn es s settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault ) , High Fe a t u re Desc r iption
Ap pe ndix C : Sp eci f ic at ion s 1 6 9 Date & T ime Impr int settings Off (de f ault), Date Onl y , Date & T ime P lay back ma g n i fica t ion Magnif ie s a still image t o 130x on the Ima ge Dis p la y Compr ession fo rm a t z JPE G (EXIF ) fo r still images z MPEG1 for vi de o clips In ter f ace s z USB M ini-AB r e ceptacle; allow s USB ( A to Mini- B) to a co mp ut er o r US B (M in i -A to B ) to c erta i n pr inte rs (an y HP Phot osmar t or P i ctBr i dge- com patible p rin te rs) z DC inp u t 3 . 3 Vdc @ 2 5 00 mA z HP P hotosmart R-ser ies d ock Or ie n ta ti on Sensor Ye s Standar ds z PTP tran sfer (1 57 4 0) z MSDC tr a nsfer z NT S C/P A L z JPE G z MPEG1 z DPOF 1.1 z EXIF 2 .2 z DCF 1.0 z Pi c t B r i d g e 1 . 0 z US B 2. 0 Fe a t u re Desc r iption
17 0 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Po w e r T y pi cal po wer u sage: 2 .3 W atts (w ith image L CD on) . 4 W atts max imum pow er usage . P o w er sour ces in clude: z On e r e c ha rgeab le H P P h otos ma r t R 0 7 li th i um ion b a tt er y for HP Ph otosm a r t R - series ca m eras (L1812A ) . R echar gea ble battery can be r echar ged in t he camer a using th e HP A C po we r ada pt er or op t iona l H P P ho tos m ar t R - s eri e s doc k. z HP A C pow er ada pte r (3. 3 Vdc, 2 500 mA, 8.25 W ) z Opti onal HP Phot osmar t R -ser ie s dock R echar ging in cam er a w ith the HP A C pow er adapter or optio na l HP Photosmart R -ser ies doc k : av er age char ge time 4 -6 hou r s. Ext er nal bod y dimensions M easur ements wit h cam er a o f f and lens r etract ed: 90 mm (L) b y 2 8 m m (W) b y 5 9 m m (H) 3 . 5 in ( L) b y 1.1 in (W) b y 2 . 3 in (H) We i g h t 13 2 g r a ms (0.2 9 pounds) w ithout batte r y Te m p e r a t u r e ra n g e Oper ational: 0 t o 5 0° C (3 2 to 12 2° F ) at 15 t o 8 5% r el ati v e humi dity Storage : -30 t o 6 5° C (- 22 to 14 9° F) a t 15 t o 90% r elati ve h u mi dit y W a rra n t y 1 y ear li mit ed w ar r an ty b ac k e d b y HP C us t ome r Suppo rt Fe a t u re Desc r iption
Ap pe ndix C : Sp eci f ic at ion s 17 1 Memo r y Capacity Th e follo wing table l ist s the appr ox ima te numb er and aver a ge si z e of still image s that can be s tor ed in the int er nal me mory in the ca me r a when the c am era is set to di f fer ent I ma ge Q ua li t y sett in gs av a ilabl e in the Captu r e Men u . NO TE Not a ll 3 2 MB o f in ter nal me mo ry is a v aila ble beca u se so me is u sed f or in te r nal came r a ope r a tio ns . A lso , th e ac tual f ile si z es an d nu mber o f still im ages th at can b e st or ed in th e in ter nal memory in the came r a o r on a n optional memor y c ar d will vary , dep ending on the conten t o f ea c h still i mag e. 4MP 11 imag es (2 .4 MB each) 4MP (defa u lt) 2 2 images (1. 2 MB each ) 2MP 45 image s (600 KB ea ch) VGA 2 6 5 images (100 KB eac h)
17 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l
In d e x 17 3 Index A AC power adapter attaching fe rrite to cord 15 conne c tor on came r a 25 purchasing 163 ac cess ories f or camer a 161 Action mode, s etting 46 Adaptive Lighting, setting 62 AE M ete rin g restore s etting 6 1 setting 60 AF view fin d er li ght 21 Aper ture Prio rity (Av ) m ode, setting 47 aperture, setting 4 7 arrow buttons on Con tr oll e r 23 audio clips playback 70 reco rd 32 , 83 automatic exp osure, ove rride 45 Av Aper tu re Pr ior ity mod e, setting 47 B battery door on camera 26 ext end lif e of 152 gauge 156 install 14 performance 1 5 4 purchasing lithium ion 162 quick r echarge k it 162 recharging lithium ion 157 shots per charge 155 top points about use 151 Beach & Snow mode, setting 46 blinking lights on camera 21, 25 brackets in Live View s creen 36 brightening an image 51 Bu rst button 23 using 45 buttons on camera 21 buying camera accessories 161 C calibrating color of images 58 came ra purc h asin g a c cess o rie s for 161 purchasing case for 163 rese t 1 12 self-diagnosti c te st 143 specifications 1 65 turn on/ off 17 came ra acce sso rie s 161 came ra d ock conne c tor on camera 26 description 11 dock insert 12 purchasing 162 camera me nus 27 camera parts back of camera 21 front, side, and bottom of came ra 25 top of camera 24
17 4 Index Camer a Soun ds, s etting 1 04 came ra sta tes 2 6 capacity of inte rnal memory 1 71 Capture Menu Help for menu options 51 res tore se ttings 51 using 50 cas e for cam era , purchasing 163 Color of images restore s etting 6 4 setting 64 comp res sion f orma t 169 comp ressi on sett ings, cus tom 56 comp uter, conn ect came ra to 97 conne c tion s as a Picture Transfer Protocol (PT P) d ev ic e 10 6 as a USB Mass Stor a ge Device Class (MSDC) 106 to comp uter 97 to printer 1 00 conne c tors AC power adapter 25 came ra d ock 26 USB 2 5 conse rving batt ery li f e 152 Con trol ler with a rrow b uttons, description 23 cro ssh airs i n vie w find er 36 cust omer supp ort 144 D darkeni ng an i m age 51 Date & T ime Imprint 67 Date & Ti me, settin g 18, 1 05 Delete 79 delete during Instant Review 31 diagnostic test 143 digital zoom 40 direct print printing images from camera to printer/ computer 100 selecting image s 72 disk drive, camera as 1 06 E erro r mes sa ges on camera 130 on computer 140 EV Compensati on restor e setting 52 setting 51 extending batte ry life 15 2 F ferrite , attaching to HP AC power adapter cord 15 flas h description 25 restor e setting 42 set ti ng s 4 1 using 41 Flash button, description 23 F-num ber, s etting 4 7 focu s brackets, using 36 came ra shak e 40 lock 38 Macro se tting 38 Norm al Foc u s set ting 38 rang e 166 search priority 39 set ti ng s 3 8 Supe r Mac ro sett ing 3 9
17 5 Index form at internal memory 79 memory card 79 G gauge, battery 1 56 H Help f or Ca ptu re Me nu options 51 help from cust ome r support 144 Help M enu , usin g 29 HP AC power adapter attaching fe rrite to cord 15 conne c tor on came r a 25 purchasing 163 HP Image Zone softw a re installing 1 9 not usi ng 113 HP Instant Share customizing the HP Instant Share Menu 86 description 11, 85 HP Instant Share button 2 3, 86 selecti ng all images 92 selecti ng indiv idual images 93 turn on/ off 86 using the HP In stant Share Men u 9 0 HP Instant Share button 86 HP Instant Share Menu customizing 86 description 91 selecti ng all images 92 selecti ng indiv idual images 93 set up 86 using 90 HP web sit es 14 4 I Imag e A dv ice , us in g 81 Ima ge Di sp la y description 23 Live View at P ow er O n setting 104 Live View button 2 3 stat u s scr ee n 29 using 35 Imag e Inf o, us in g 8 1 Ima ge Qu a lity setting 52 setting cus tom 5 5 images Adaptive Lighti ng 62 AE Meter ing settin g 60 brightening 51 Color setting 64 colo r tint 58 Custom Image Quality setting 55 darkeni ng 5 1 Date & T ime Imprint 67 Image Qua lity setting 52 ISO Speed setting 59 magnifying 74 number remaining 36, 72 number saved in internal memory 171 Panorama mode 48 reco rd aud io c lips 3 2 Rotate 84 Saturation s etting 65 Sharpness setting 66 shooting modes 45 thumbnails view 73
17 6 Index too dark/light 51 transferrin g camer a to compute r 97 Wh ite Ba lan c e setti ng 57 install battery 14 memory card 13 sof twa re 19 , 20 wrist strap 12 internal memory form at 79 image capaci ty of 17 1 pictures remaining 36 ISO Sp e ed restore s etting 6 0 setting 59 L Landscape mode, setting 4 6 Lan gu ag e change setting 108 choose at first startup 17 LEDs (ligh ts ) on cam e ra AF li ght 21 Self-Timer light 25 Video light 21 li f e of battery , conserv ing 152 lithium ion battery purchasing 162 rech argi ng 157 safety precautions 153 Liv e Vie w button 23 using 35 Live View at P ow er O n setting 104 lo ng ex po sur es , nois e red uction 47 M Macintos h computer conne ct to 97 install sof tware 20 USB s etting on c amera 1 06 Ma cro focus s etting 3 8 Magn ify contr ol on Zoom l ever 2 2 using 74 magnifying images 74 Man ual Whit e B ala nce, setting 58 mem ory c ard door on camera 26 form at 79 install 13 pictures remaining 36, 72 supported types and sizes 167 mem ory, inte rnal form at 79 image capaci ty of 171 Menu/OK button, description 23 menus Capture 50 Help 29 HP Instant Share 90 overvie w 27 Playback 75 Setup 1 03 message s on camera 130 on computer 140 microphone, description 25 Mod e button 24 Mo ve Image s to C ard 1 08
177 Inde x N noise r eduction, long exp osu re s 4 7 Norm al Foc u s set ting 38 number of images in internal memory 171 number of pictures remaining 36, 7 2 O ON/OFF switc h, descri p ti on 22 onli ne Help for Capture Menu options 51 optical zoom 40 over-exposing an image 51 override automatic exposure 45 P Panorama mode Preview Panorama 84 setting 47 using 48 parts of camera back of camera 21 front, side, and bottom of came ra 25 top of camera 24 performance, battery 154 pictures reco rd aud io cl ips 3 2 sha re 8 5 take self-timer 43 take stills 31 Playback button, description 23 Playback Menu, using 75 Playback, us ing 70 Portra it mod e, se ttin g 46 power battery level icons 156 specifications 1 70 turn on/ off 17 power adapter, HP AC attaching fe rrite to cord 15 conne c tor on camera 25 purchasing 163 Power ON/OFF switch, description 22 Preview Panorama 84 Print button description 23 using 72 print images directly to printer 100 selecting images for direct print 72 using HP Instant Sh are 85 problems, troubleshooting 111 product support 1 44 purchasing camera ac cess ories 1 61 R rang e Exposur e Compensati on 168 F- num b er 16 5 focu s 1 66 foc us sett ings 38 recharging lithium ion battery 157 reco rd audio clips 32, 83 vid eo c lip s 3 4 red -ey e r educ ti on description 43 Remove Re d Eyes 80
17 8 Index remaining pictures count 36, 72 rese t cam era 11 2 Reset S ettings 10 9 resolution s ettings, cu stom 56 reviewing images 7 0 rotate image s 84 S safety prec autions for lithium ion battery 153 Saturation restore s etting 6 5 setting 65 se l ec tin g im a g es for dire ct pri nt 72 for HP Instant Share destinations 93 Self- Timer button 23 light 2 5 using 43 settings rese t 1 09 resto re C ap tu re Me nu 51 Setu p Menu, using 103 share pictures 85 Sharpness restore s etting 6 7 setting 66 shooting mode button 24 setting 45 Shutter button description 24 lock exposure and focus 36 shutter s peed ra nge 166 sof tw are install 19 using camera without 113 soun ds of cam era 10 4 space remain ing in me mory 36, 72 spe ak er , de sc rip tio n 2 4 specifications 1 65 state s, ca m era 26 stat u s scr ee n 29 still pict u res, take 31 Sunset mode, sett ing 47 Supe r Mac ro foc us set ting 39 su ppo rt f or us er s 14 4 T te chn ical supp ort 144 Thumbnails contr ol on Zoom l ever 2 2 vie w in g 73 Time & D ate, settin g 18 , 1 05 Timer/ Burst button 23 total images s u mmary scre en 72 tr ansf er im ages to c omp uter 97 tripod m ount, desc ription 26 troubleshoot problems 111 turn on/ off power 17 TV (television) Configuration setting 107 U under-exposing an image 51 USB configuration s etting 106 conne c tor on camera 25
17 9 Index V Video button, description 2 4 vid eo c lip s playback 70 reco rd 34 Video viewfinder light 21 vie wfi nd er cro ssh airs 36 description 21 lights 21 using 36 W web si tes for HP 144 White B alanc e restore s etting 5 8 setting 57 Windows computer conne ct to 97 install sof tware 19 wrist s tr ap, attaching to came ra 12 Z zoom digital 4 0 optical 40 specifications 1 65 Zoom lever, description 22 Zoom Out and Zoom In cont rols 22
Cop yright and T rademark Information © 2004 Cop yri ght Hewlett-P ack ar d D ev elopment Compa n y , LP Reprod uc tion, a dapt at ion, or t r a n s la tion wi th ou t prior writ te n per mission is pr ohib ited, e x c ept a s allo we d u nder the copy ri ght la w s. T he inf or mati on cont ained in t his doc ument is sub jec t t o change w ithou t noti ce . He wlett -P ac k ar d shall no t be lia ble f o r e rr ors cont ained her e in or f or con seq uent ial d a m ages in conn ecti on w it h the f urni shing , perf or mance , or u se o f this mate r ial . Mi cr o soft® and W indo ws ® ar e U . S. r egiste r ed tra demar ks of Microsoft Co rporatio n. Appl e®, M ac int osh®, and Mac® ar e r egister ed tr adem arks o f App le Comp uter , In c. Ar cSoft® is a r e gister e d tr ad emark of ArcS o ft , Inc. Pa n o ra m a M a k e r TM is a trad emar k of Ar cSof t , Inc. PE N T AX® is a r egiste r ed tr ademar k of P ENT AX Co rpor atio n. Mult iMe di aCar d TM is a tr ademar k o f Inf ineo n T e c hnologi es A G . SD logo is a tr adem a r k.
Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapt er 1: Getting St arted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Inst a llin g th e Ca mera Do ck In se rt (O pti on al) . . . 1 2 Attac hing the Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 In stalling a Mem ory Car d (Opt ional) . . . . . . . . . 13 In stalling the Batter y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Attaching the Ferrite to the AC Adapter Cord . . 15 Ch arging th e B attery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Tu rning on P ower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Ch oosing t he La nguage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Sett ing the Date an d Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 In stalling the So ftware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Windo ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Mac intosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Use r Manu al on the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Cam era Part s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Ba c k o f the Camer a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 To p of th e Cam era . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Fro nt, Side, an d Bottom of the Ca mera . . . . . . . 25 Cam era States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Cam era Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using the Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Cam era Status Sc reen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9 Chapt er 2: T aking Pictures and Recording V ideo Clips . . . 3 1 Tak ing St ill Pic tures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Rec ord in g A udi o with Still Pictur es . . . . . . . . . . 32 Orien tat ion Se n s or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Rec ording Video Cl ips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using Live View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5
HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Focu sing the Cam era . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Using Auto Focu s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Using Foc us Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Using the Focus Ra nge Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Und er sta nd in g the Foc us Sea rc h Pri o rity . . . . . . .3 9 Using Zoo m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Op tical Zo om . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Digi tal Zoo m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Sett ing th e Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Using the S elf -Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Using the Burst Se tting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Using the S ho oting Mo des . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Pic ture Q uality for Long Exp osur es . . . . . . . . . . .47 Usin g Pan orama Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Taking a Panoramic S equence of Pictures . .49 Using the Captur e Me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Help for th e Me n u O ptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 EV Comp ensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Ima ge Qu ality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Cus tom I mage Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 White Balan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Man ual White Balanc e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 IS O Spe ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 AE Meteri ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Adap tive Lig hting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Col or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Satu ration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Sh arpne ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Date & Tim e Impr in t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Chapt er 3: Review ing Images and Video Clip s . . . . . . . . . 6 9 Using Pla yback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Tot al Ima ge s Su mmar y Scre en . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 2 Sel ecting Images for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Viewin g Thumb nails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Magn ifying Imag es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Using the Playba ck Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Dele te . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Rem ove Red Ey es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Ima ge Ad vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Ima ge I n fo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Rec ord Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Rotat e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 4 Pr eview P anora ma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Chapt er 4: Using HP Ins t ant Share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 Setting Up the HP Instant Share Me n u on the Cam era . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Setting Up Destinations o n a Windo ws Co mpute r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Setting Up Destinations o n a Mac intosh Comp uter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9 Using the HP Instan t Sha r e Me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Sele cting All Imag es fo r HP Instan t Share Destina tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Se lec ti ng I ndi v idu al Imag es fo r HP Instan t Share Destina tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 How HP In stant S h a r e E -mails I mages . . . . . . . . 94 Chapt er 5: T r a nsferr ing and Printing Ima ges . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7 Tr ansfer ring I mages to a Compute r . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Prin ting Pa n or amas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Prin ting Pa noram as fr om Pan orama Make r . . . . 99 Pr inting Pa noram as fr om H P Image Zon e . . . . 100 Prin ting Ima ges Dire ctly fro m the C amera . . . . . . . . 100
HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Chapt er 6: Using the S etup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 3 Cam era Sound s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Live View at Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Date & Tim e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 USB Config urat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 TV Conf iguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Lan guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Mov e Im ages to Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Rese t Setting s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Chapt er 7: T roubleshooting and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 Rese tting the Came ra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Using Yo u r Cam era without Instal ling the HP Image Zon e Softw are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13 Tr ansfer ring Ima ges to a Co mput er wi thou t HP Image Zon e Softw are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14 Using a Mem ory C ard Reade r . . . . . . . . .1 14 Con fi gur ing t he Ca me ra a s a Dis k Dri ve . .11 7 Prob lems and Solutio ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Err or M essage s on th e Ca mera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Err or M essage s on the Comp uter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Cam era S elf -diagn ostic T ests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 43 Gettin g Ass istance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 HP Accessib ility Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 HP Photosm art We bsite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Su pport Proce ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Pho ne Su pport in the U nited Sta tes . . . . . . . . . .1 46 Pho ne Suppo rt in E urope , the Mid dle Ea st, and Afr ica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 47 Oth er Phone Suppor t Worldw ide . . . . . . . . . . .149
Appendix A: Managing Batterie s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 To p Points A bout B a tteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Ex tending Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Safety Precautions for Using Lithiu m Ion Batter ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Ba ttery P erfor mance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Num ber of Shots per Ba ttery Ch arge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Ba ttery Ga uge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Rec harging the Lith ium Ion B attery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Safety Precautions for Recharging Lithiu m Ion Batter ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Sle ep Ti me-o ut for Power Con servatio n . . . . . . . . . 160 Appendix B: Purchasi ng Camer a Ac cessorie s . . . . . . . . . . . 16 1 Appendix C: S peci ficat ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 5 Memo ry Ca pacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 11 C hapter 1 : Get ti n g St ar ted Co ngr atulati ons o n y our pur ch ase o f this H P Photo smart di gital cam er a! This cam e ra ha s many featu res t o enhanc e yo u r pi ct u r e -ta ki ng e x per ience, in cludi ng HP Adaptiv e Lightin g T ech nol og y , in-came r a r ed-e y e r em ov al , 8 sh ootin g mod es ( i ncl u d i ng P a noram a ) , H P I ma g e Advice, HP In st an t Sha r e TM , direct printing cap abili t y , ma nual an d automatic c ontr ol s, on- cam era Help , an d a n optional ca m er a dock. Wi t h HP I n st an t Shar e , y ou can ea sily se lec t image s in y our cam e r a to b e autom at ica lly sent to your fa vo r i te dest in at ions (such as e -ma il a ddresses and onli ne al bums ) the ne x t t ime y ou connect t he came r a t o y our com pute r . Y our fr iends and f amil y ca n ea si ly r ece iv e and v ie w y ou r p ic tu r e s in e-m ail w ith ou t bein g bur d ened b y la rge f ile at ta chment s. And with the direct pr inting capab il ity , y ou can ea sily sel ect imag es in y o ur cam era to b e automa tic ally pr in te d the next tim e you con ne ct the camera to y our computer or dir e ctly t o an y HP Photosmart pr int er or P ictB r idg e -c ompat ible printer without ev er con nec ti ng to you r c omp uter . T o further enha nce y our e xper ience , y ou may pur chase an HP Phot os mart R - s e rie s d o c k . Th e c a m e ra d o c k a l l o w s y ou to e asily t r a nsfer i mag es to a computer , s end imag es to a pr i nt er or t ele visi on , an d r ec har ge the cam er aâ s bat ter y pl us a sp ar e. The dock a lso pr ovi des a conv en ient home for y our cam e ra .
12 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Setu p NO TE T o loc ate a part on your c am er a (s uch as a but ton or a li ght) w hile f ollo win g the instr uc tions in this s ecti on , se e Came r a P art s on p age 21. Insta llin g t he C am era Doc k Ins ert (O ption al) If you buy the HP P hotosmart R -seri es dock , you w il l noti c e one or mor e cl ear doc k inserts inc lude d in the bo x w ith the do ck . W hen s etting up th e do ck fo r u se with th is camera , make su r e you u s e the dock i nser t that has t he BL UE sti ck er on it . F ol low the i nstructions in t he dock User â s M anual to co nnect the dock in sert to t he cam era dock. At ta c hin g th e W rist Strap A t t ach the w r ist str a p to the m ount on the s ide of the ca mera as s hown.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 13 Insta llin g a Mem or y C ard (O ption al) NO TE I f y o u d o n o t h a v e a m e m o r y c a r d , s k i p t h i s s e c t i o n a n d go on to the n e xt section, In sta lling th e Batt ery on page 1 4. Y our ca mer a con tain s internal memor y that al lo ws yo u to stor e imag es a nd video cl ips. How ev er , y ou c an use a m emory c ar d (pu r c has ed se par ate l y) inst ead to s to r e im ages a nd vi deo clip s . F or mor e in for mat ion about su ppor ted memor y ca r ds, see Storag e on p age 16 7. When y ou inst all a memor y car d in the c amera , all ne w ima ges and v id eo c lips ar e s to r ed on t he car d . T he camer a âs inter na l memory is only used when ther e is no memor y car d in the c a me r a. 1 Hold th e cam era with th e bot tom facing u p , a s sho w n , and sli de th e Batte r y/ Me mor y c ard do or l atch to o p en th e Batter y/M emor y ca r d door . 2 W ith the bac k o f th e came r a fa cing up , in ser t the memor y ca r d in th e smalle r sl ot w ith the not ched si de o f the car d go ing in f ir st , a s sh o w n. Mak e su r e t he m emo ry card snaps into pl ace. 3 Leave t he Bat tery/ M emor y ca r d door op en and go on to the next section , In stalling the Battery on p age 1 4. T o r emo ve the memor y c ar d fr o m the camer a, f irst tu rn th e ca mer a o ff . T hen ope n t he B atte ry /Me mo ry car d d oor , pr ess do w n on t he top edg e o f th e me mory car d , an d it w il l sp r ing out war d fr om t he slot .
14 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Insta llin g t he B at ter y Y our came r a u ses a r e c har gea ble HP Pho tosm art R 0 7 l ithium ion batter y (L1812 A ) . NO TE T he batte ry that w as shipped w ith y our cam er a is par tia l ly char g ed, but y ou s hou ld fully cha r ge it befor e u sing it the fi rs t time . Y ou ca n char ge the batte ry w hile it is in t he c amer a . S ee Char g ing the B at tery on page 16 . 1 If the B at tery/M emor y c ar d door i s al r eady open, skip this st e p and go o n t o s te p 2 . Hold the c a mera wi th the b o ttom facing u p , a s sho w n , and sli de th e Batte r y/ Me mor y c ard do or l atch to o p en th e Batter y/M emor y ca r d door . 2 In se rt t he ba tte ry i n t he l ar ge r s lo t as s hown , a nd push i t i n u ntil th e latch c atche s. 3 Close the Bat tery/ Memor y c ard door o n the b ottom of the ca mer a b y pushi ng the do or down unti l it snaps closed. T o remove the bat ter y fr om the ca m era , first t u rn th e ca me r a off . T hen op en the Bat tery/ M emor y card door , r ele ase the batt ery lat ch , tilt the camer a, and the batte ry wi ll slide ou t of its slo t .
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 15 At ta c hin g th e Ferrite to t he A C Adap te r Cor d A f er r ite is include d in the b ox w ith y our camer a . Th is f er r ite p r e v en ts y our came r a fr om emit ting ra d io f r equency ener gy that might inter fer e with the reception of y ou r r adio , tele vision , or other electr onic dev ices w hic h m ig ht be near the camer a . Th e f er r ite w i ll not degrade the per fo rmance or sa fety of the camera . Attach th e ferr i te to th e thi n HP A C adapter c ord ( the cord tha t atta che s to the came r a , not the co r d that atta che s to the w all) in the fol lowing wa y: 1 W rap the cord ar oun d the fe rri t e s o t h a t t h e c o rd passes t hr oug h the ferr i te three ti m es ( as sh o wn her e ) . 2 Adj ust the cord so that the e dge of the fer r it e is 10 c m ( 4 in ch es ) from th e e nd of the c on ne cto r that c on ne ct s to the camer a (or camer a dock ) . 3 Close the fer r i te so that it snaps snugly int o place ar ound th e c or d .
16 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l C h arging t h e B at ter y NO TE T h i s s e c t i o n t e l l s h o w t o c h a r g e a b a t t e r y i n t h e c a m e r a . Y ou can also c har ge th e batt ery in the e x tr a batte ry ba y o f the c amera dock or i n the HP Photosmar t Qu ic k Re ch a rge r ( s e e Appendix B: P u r chasing Camer a Ac c es s or ie s on p age 161 ) . 1 P lu g the p ow er c ord into the HP A C ad ap ter . If mor e than one pow er cor d is in the box , use the co r d that i s appr opr iate f or p o wer ou t lets in your c ountr y . P l ug the other end of the pow er cor d into an elec tr ical outlet . 2 Ope n th e s mal l ru b ber door on th e side of the camer a. 3 Attach th e thi n c or d fr om the A C adapt er t o the pow er a dapter co nne ctor on the side of the camer a as sho wn .The P ow er l ight on the top o f the ca mera will sta rt blinki ng to s ho w th at the b atte r y is c har ging. The r e ch argeable li thi um ion bat ter y will us ual ly char g e fully i n 4 -6 ho urs . Wh en the P o w er li ght stop s blinking , the ba tte r y is fully charged , and you ca n then unplug the p o wer ad apter f r om the cam er a . Y ou can con tinue to us e the camer a whil e the bat ter y i s bei ng ch ar g ed b y th e po wer adapter . NO TE T he camer a ma y get w ar m wh il e it is cha rg ing the bat tery , as well as af ter pr olon ge d use under b att ery po we r . T his is no rm al .
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 17 NO TE Digit al c ameras use ba tteri es at a muc h faster r ate than f il m came r as . Battery lif e in di gital cam er as can be measu red in hours and m inutes of use rather tha n the y ear s mor e typ ica l o f f ilm came r as . Batte ry l if e ma y a lso v ar y dr am ati call y f r om on e u se r to ano the r , d epe nding o n w hat modes the came r a is b ein g us ed in mo st f r equen tl y . F or hints on optimi zing battery perf ormance , see Appendi x A: Mana ging Batter ies on pa ge 151. Tu r n i n g o n Po w e r T ur n the camer a on by slid ing the ON/OFF swi t ch t o t h e ri g h t a n d t h e n re l e a s i n g i t. The lens exten d s a nd th e P ow er l ight on the top of the c am era tur ns on soli d gr een . Choo si ng the L angu age T he f ir st time y ou tur n the c ame r a on , the f ollo w ing sc r een appea rs and pr ompt s y ou to choose a la nguage. 1 Scr ol l to the la ng u ag e th at you wan t by us i ng t h e buttons on the Contr oll er . 2 Pr es s the Me n u/ O K button to sele ct th e high l ighte d lan gua ge. NO TE If y ou nee d to chan ge t he lang uag e la ter , you c a n do thi s wi t h t he Lan gu age setting in th e Se tu p men u . See Chapter 6: Using the Setu p Men u on p age 103.
18 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Set tin g t he Da te an d Time The ca mera has a clock t hat r ec or d s the da te an d t ime at w h ich y ou t ak e each pi ctur e. This inf or mati on is r ecor ded in th e imag e pr o perties, whi ch yo u can se e when v ie wing the image in th e Im age Inf o scr een (p age 81) , i n the Pl ay b a c k menu scr een ( p age 7 5 ) , or on your computer . Y ou c an al so choose t o have the date and ti me imprinted on the visi bl e imag e ( se e Dat e & T ime I m pr in t on page 6 7) . T he f irs t time y o u tur n the camer a on , a Dat e & T ime screen appe ars af ter you choose the la nguage, pr ompting y ou to set the date an d ti m e . 1 Adjust th e val ue of th e h i g h l ighte d se lecti on u sing the bu ttons . 2 Press the but ton s to move to th e o ther sele ct ion s. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 u ntil the co r r e ct date/t im e format , da te , and time ar e se t . 4 Pr ess the Me n u /O K button whe n you have entered t h e proper values for the da te and time. A confirmatio n scree n appe ars, asking if the cor rect date and time have been s et. 5 If t he da te a nd ti me ar e c orre ct , pr es s t he Me n u/ O K button to se lect Yes . If th e d ate an d time ar e incor rect, pr ess the bu tto n to hig h li g h t No , an d th en p r ess t he Me n u/ OK butto n. The Dat e & T ime screen appe ars aga i n. R epe at ste ps 1 th r ough 5 to se t th e correct date an d t im e. NO TE If y ou ne ed t o ch ang e the d ate an d time s etting s la te r , y ou can do t h is w ith the Da te & T ime setting in t he Se tu p me nu . See Chapter 6: Using t he Setu p M enu on page 1 03.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 19 Insta llin g t he Sof t w are T he H P Im age Z one so ftw ar e al lo w s y ou t o tr ansf er ima ges f r om t he cam er a , an d th en v i e w , edit , p r int , o r e- mail th em . It also a l lo ws y ou to c o nf ig ur e t he HP In sta nt Sh ar e menu on the c a me r a. NO TE If you do not in sta ll th e H P I mage Zone s oft war e, y ou can stil l use the cam er a , but cert ain features w i ll be af fected. F or deta ils, s ee Using Y ou r C am er a w ithou t Instal ling the HP Im age Zone S of t w a r e on page 1 13. Win dow s In or der for the HP Imag e Z on e soft w are to in stal l s ucc essful ly on y our W i ndo w s computer , y ou mu s t hav e insta lled at least Inter net Explor er 5 . 01 on Windo ws 2000 or XP , or Inte rnet E x p l o rer 5.0 1 S e r vic e P a c k 2 o n Wi n d o ws 98 , 98 S E, or M e . 1 Cl o se all pr ogr ams and tem por a r ily dis abl e an y v ir u s pr otecti on softwar e r u nning on y our comp uter . 2 In sert the HP Ima ge Z one so ftw ar e CD int o th e CD dr i v e of y our computer . F ollow the in structions in the inst allat ion scr een t hat automat ica lly appe ars. NO TE If the insta llat ion s cr e en does not appear , clic k Sta rt , cl ick Ru n , t ype X: \Setup .e x e , wher e X is the letter o f y our CD dri ve , then c l ick OK . NO TE If you ha ve tr ouble i nstal l ing or using the HP Im age Z one soft war e, see the HP Cu stomer Supp ort w ebsi te: w w w . hp . com/s uppor t f or mor e i nformation .
20 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Mac intosh 1 Cl o se all pr ogr ams and tem por a r ily dis abl e an y v ir u s pr ot ection soft war e r u nning on your compute r . 2 In se rt the HP Im ag e Z one s oftw ar e CD int o th e CD dr i ve o f y our computer . 3 Doub le - cl ick th e C D ico n o n th e compu ter de sk to p . 4 Double - clic k th e i nst aller icon, and then f ollow th e on -s cr een in struct ions to in stal l t he sof t ware . NO TE Be fo r e y ou can tr ansf er im age s f r om th e came r a t o y ou r M a c i ntos h c omput er wi th th e H P I mage Z on e so f tw ar e , or t o tak e ad v an tage o f the HP Inst ant S har e f uncti onal it y , y ou m u st f ir st chan ge the US B C on figu r at ion se tting to Disk Dr i ve on t he ca mer a. See Chapter 6 : Using the S et up M e nu on page 1 03. NO TE If you ha ve tr ouble i nstal l ing or using the HP Im age Z one soft war e, see the HP Cu stomer Suppor t websi te: w w w . hp . com/s uppor t f or mor e i nformation . Us er Ma nua l o n the C D A copy of this cam er a User â s M anual in se ver al di ffer ent lang uages i s loc ated on the HP Image Z one soft war e CD . T o v ie w y ou r camer a Us er âs Man ual: 1 In se rt the HP Im ag e Z one s oftw ar e CD int o th e CD dr i ve o f y our computer . 2 Click Vie w Us e râs M a nua l on the Main p age of the CD in stal lat ion scr e en to vi ew th e Userâs M a nual.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 21 Camer a P arts NO TE Ref er to the pa ge s in p ar en theses af ter the pa rt nam e s f or m or e inf or mati on abou t tho se parts . Back of th e Ca me r a # Name Des cr ipti on 1V i e w f i n d e r (pag e 31) Al lo w s y ou t o f r ame t he s u b jec t of y ou r pict u res or vide o cl i ps. 2V i e w f i n d e r l i g h t s z solid r e d â V i d e o i s re c o rd i n g. z AF soli d gr een â When you press the Shutter button ha lf way down, this ligh t tur ns on soli d when the camer a is r eady t o t ake a pi ctur e (a uto e xposur e and au to f oc us ar e lock ed, and the f la sh is re a d y ) . z AF blinki ng gre en âE it he r a f oc u s w a rning occurr ed wh en yo u pr es sed the Shutter button ha lf way down, the flash is still c har ging , or t he camer a is pr ocessi ng a picture (see the follo wing NO T E) . 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 1 13 12 14 15 2 3
2 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual z Bo th an d AF bl inking âAn err o r has oc cur r ed that pr e vents th e ca mer a fr om tak ing the p i ct ur e (s ee the f oll o w in g NO T E). NO T E If an er r or pre vents a pi ctur e fr om being tak en , then a n err or message w ill appear on the I mage D ispla y . See Err or Messages on the Camer a on pag e 130. 3 ON/OFF sw it ch ( page 1 7) T urns the camer a po wer o n and o ff . 4 Zoom le ver (pag e 40) z Z oom O ut âWhile t akin g stil l pict u r es , z o o ms ou t th e len s to th e wide angle po sition . z Thu m b n a i l s âWh il e i n P lay bac k , allo w s yo u to v ie w still images and the f irs t f r am es of v i deo c lips ar r anged in a matr i x of nin e thumbn ail images per s cr een . z Z oom In âWhil e taking still p ic tur es , z ooms in the lens to th e teleph oto positi on . z Ma gnify âW hil e i n P lay bac k , all o ws y ou to magnify a still ima ge. 5 W r ist stra p mount (pag e 12) Al lows you to at ta ch a wrist s t r ap to th e camera . 6M e m o r y l i g h t z B li n k ing rapidly âCamer a is w ritin g to either the i ntern al memo ry or to an opti onal me mory car d tha t is instal led. z Off âCamer a is not wr iting to eit her the inter nal memory or to an opti onal memory car d that is ins tall ed . # Name Des cr ipti on
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 2 3 7 Controll er w it h an d buttons Al lows you to scrol l th roug h me nus a nd images on th e Image D ispla y . 8 Men u/ OK bu tton (pag es 50, 7 5 ) Allows y o u to di sp lay th e Captur e an d P l a yback menu s and to sel e ct men u options and conf ir m c ertain acti ons on the Imag e Disp la y . 9 Pr int button (pag e 7 2 ) A l l ows yo u to m a rk th e c u rre n t i m a g e for pr inting l ater w h en y ou connect the camera t o your comp ute r or dire ctly to an y HP Photo smart pr inte r or P i ctBri dge - compatible p r inter . 10 HP I nst an t Shar e button (pag e 85) Tu r n s t h e HP Ins tan t Sha r e menu on and off on the Image Displa y . 11 P lay back button ( page 7 0) Tu r n s Pl ay b a c k on and off on the Image Displa y . 12 Liv e V i ew button (page 3 5 ) Tu r n s Li ve V i ew on a nd off on the Image Displa y . 13 Imag e Displ ay (pag e 35) Allo ws y ou t o fr a me pi ctur es and v ideo clips u sing Live Vi ew and r e vi ew them af t erw ar d in Pl ay b a c k , and to v i ew all the me n u s . 14 Ti m e r / Bur st button (pag es 43, 4 5) Allows y o u to se le ct b et wee n Nor mal , Se lf- Ti m e r , Se lf- Tim er - 2 S hots , and Bur st settings. 15 Fl as h button (pag e 41) Allow s y ou to select between the differ ent f lash settings. # Name Des cr ipti on
24 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l T op o f t h e C amera # Name Desc r iption 1 Speaker P la ys camera sounds and a ud i o clips . 2 Mod e bu t ton (page 4 5) Allo ws y ou to s elect bet w e en differ ent shooting modes for t a king still pi ctur es. 3 Ma c r o button (page 38) Al lows you to se l ec t be t we en th e Ma c r o , Super Mac r o and Nor mal set tings. 4 Sh u tt er button (pages 31, 3 2) T a ke s a pi ctur e and r e cor ds audio . 5 P o wer light ( Ar ound the Shutter butt o n.) z Sol id â Came ra is on . z Blink ing sl ow l y âCamer a is off and is char ging the battery . z Off âC ame r a i s o ff . 6 Vid e o bu t to n (page 3 4) S t arts an d st ops r e co r d ing a v i deo c li p . 6 4 1 2 3 5
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 25 Fr ont, Si d e, an d B ot tom of t he Ca mer a # Name Desc r iption 1F l a s h (pag e 41) Pr o vi des additional light to imp ro ve pict u re - tak i n g. 2 Self-T imer lig ht (p ag e 43 ) Bl ink s red when th e Self - Timer is acti v ated . 3M i c r o p h o n e (p ag e 3 2 ) R e co r ds s o un d (a u di o an d v i de o). 4 US B connect or (pag es 9 7, 100) Allo ws y ou to connect a USB cable fr om the camer a to a U SB -enabled compute r or pr int er . 5 Po w e r adapter connector (pag e 16) Allo ws y ou to connect the HP A C pow er adapter to the cam er a to either operat e the camer a with out a battery , or r e char ge the lithium ion r echar geable b att er y in the camera . 6 7 8 1 4 5 2 3
26 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l Came r a St ate s Y our camera has t wo main s tates that a llow y ou to complete certa in task s. Each of t hese states has a n ass ociated me nu th at y ou c an use to ad ju st c a mer a s et ti ngs or per for m tasks i n th at state. See Cam er a M enus on page 27. Capt u r e â Allow s you to ta ke stil l pi c tures and record v ide o clips . F or inf orma tion a bout us ing Capt u r e , se e Chapter 2: T akin g P i ctur es an d R ecor ding V ide o C lips on page 31 . Pl ay b a ck âAll o w s y ou to r e v ie w t he s till im age s and v i deo cli ps th at you capt u r e . F or in for m ation about usi ng Pl a yb a c k , see Cha pte r 3: R ev ie w ing I mage s an d V ide o C lips on page 6 9. 6 Camer a dock connect or (p ag e 1 6 2) Allo ws y ou to connect the cam er a t o the optional HP Phot osmart R -ser ies dock . 7 T r ipod mount Allo w s y ou to mo u nt the cam e ra on a tr ipo d . 8B a t t e r y / M e m o r y car d door (pag es 13, 14) Allo ws access t o insert and r emov e the batter y and an optional memory card . # Name Desc r iption
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 2 7 Camer a Menus Y our came r a h as fi v e men u s th at , w hen acce ssed , app ear in the I ma ge Dis play o n the b ack o f the c am era . Whe n an y m enu is disp la ye d, y ou can then a ccess the ot her menu s by u sing the menu tabs at the top of the scr e en . T o di splay anoth er m enu , u se the butt ons to mo v e to the men u tab f or that me nu . To d i s p l a y t h e Capt ur e M enu , pr ess the Li ve Vi ew bu t t on t o tur n Live Vi ew on , t hen pr ess the Me n u / OK bu tto n . A sh ort c ut is t o simp l y pr ess the Menu /OK but ton when Live Vie w i s off . F or i nformation about u sing t his menu , see Us ing t he Captur e M enu on page 50. To d i s p l a y t h e Pl a yb a c k M e n u , pr ess the Pl a yb a c k b utt on t o tur n Pl ay b a c k on , an d th en p r ess t he Men u/OK but ton . F or in for mat ion about using this m enu , se e Us in g t h e Pl ay b a c k M e n u on pa ge 7 5.
28 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual To d i s p l a y t h e HP Inst an t Shar e Men u , pr ess the HP Ins tant Shar e butt on . F or inf o r mati o n about using this m enu , se e Us in g t h e HP Inst ant Sh ar e M enu on page 90. NO TE Bef or e y ou can use the HP Inst ant Sh ar e Me nu , y o u mu st f ir st set u p the me nu . F or inf orma tion on ho w to d o this, see Sett ing Up the HP In stan t Shar e M en u on the C ame r a on page 86. To d i s p l a y t h e Set u p Me nu , f ir st acce ss e ither the Captur e , P l a ybac k , or HP Inst an t Shar e me nu , t hen us e the butt on s to move to th e menu tab for the Set u p Me nu . F or inf orm atio n a b out u sing the Setup Men u , see Chapter 6 : Usin g the Setup Menu on p age 103. To d i s p l a y t h e Help Men u , f irs t acce ss e ither the Captur e , P l a ybac k , or HP Inst an t Shar e me nu , t hen us e the butt on s to move to th e menu tab for the Help Men u . For inf orm atio n a b out u sing the Help Men u , see th e next se ct ion.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 29 Using t h e Help M enu The Hel p M enu pr o vi d es hel pful i nformation and ti ps for us i n g you r c a me ra . 1 Use the but ton s to mov e acr oss the me nu tabs to th e Help M enu tab . The Hel p M enu displ a y s in t he Image D isplay . 2 U se t he bu ttons t o hi ghligh t the Help to pi c y ou w ant to read. 3 Pr es s the Me n u/ O K button to di splay th e He lp topic. 4 Use t h e butto n s to scr ol l th r oug h the H elp to pi c to re a d i t. 5 Pr ess t he Me n u/O K but ton to e xit th e Hel p to pic a nd return to th e Help M enu . C a m e ra S ta t us S c ree n A stat us scr e en app ea rs f or a f ew sec onds in the Ima ge Displ ay an y time you pr ess the Mode , Fo c u s , Fl a s h , or Ti m er /B u rs t but tons when Live Vi ew is o ff . As sho wn in the e x a mple her e , a te x t de sc r ipti on of th e c ur r en t se t tin g f or the button that was j ust pr esse d app ears at the top of th e scr een. B ene ath t hat , ic ons for th e curr ent s hoot in g mo de, Fl a s h , Fo c u s , and Ti m er /B u rst setting s ar e sho wn , w ith the ico n f or the butt on that w as j u st pr essed hig hligh ted . T he botto m por tion of the scr een show s wh ether a me mor y car d is i nsta l le d (in dica ted b y the SD ico n), th e ba ttery l e ve l , t he num ber o f p ic tu r es r emaining , and the Im age Quality setting (indi cated in t he e x amp le b y t he 4MP and tw o star s ) .
30 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 3 1 C hapter 2 : Ta k i n g P i c t u r e s a n d Reco rdin g Vi de o C lips T akin g Still P i c tures You can take a picture almost any time the camer a is on , rega rdle ss o f what is being s hown on the Imag e Di splay . Fo r exam ple, if a men u is cur rently display ed whe n you pre ss the Shutter button, the menu will b e canceled, and the camera will take a pictu re. To tak e a s till pictu r e: 1 Fr ame t he su bje c t for your pic tu re in t he v iewfi nder. 2 Hold th e ca mera ste ady (espe cially if using zoom) a n d pre ss the Shutter button o n the to p of t he c ame ra ha lfw ay d own. T he came ra m easures and th en lock s the focus and expo sure (th e AF viewf inder l ight turn s on solid gr een w hen focus is lock ed - see Usin g Aut o Foc us on pag e 36 for deta ils). 3 Pr ess th e Shutter button all the wa y down to tak e the picture. You will hea r a shutter click whe n the camera takes the pictur e . After a pi ct ure is ta k en, th e ima ge app ea rs for seve ral sec on ds on the Im age Di s play . Thi s is c alle d In st an t R e v i e w . Y ou c an delete th e image during Instant Re v ie w b y pr es sing the Men u/OK but ton .
3 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Yo u c a n u s e Pl ay b a ck to r e vie w the pi ctu r es yo u hav e tak en (se e Us i n g Playba ck on page 7 0) . NO TE If you r ele ase the Shutter button only hal fwa y after t aking a p i ctur e , th e f oc us , e xpo sur e , and white bal ance measu rements f r om the pr ev iou s pi cture ar e r etai ned. Y ou can then p r ess the Shutter but to n a ll th e way down agai n an d tak e an oth er p ic tur e w ith th e same f oc u s, e xpo sur e , and whi te bala n ce as t he pr e vious picture . Y ou c an conti nue to do th i s to capt ur e a sequence of p ictu res u s ing t he sa me f ocu s, e xpos ur e , an d w hite bala nce . T his is helpful whe n r api d ly tak ing pictures . Recordin g Audio wit h S till P ic tures Ther e are two wa ys to at ta ch an audio cli p to a sti l l pi c ture: ⢠Add an audio clip to the pictu r e later , or r e- r e c or d the audio that w as captu r ed when the p ictu r e was t a ken . F or deta il s on how to do thi s, se e Re c o rd Au d i o on p age 8 3. ⢠R ec or d th e a u dio wh il e y ou ar e t akin g th e p ic tur e , as e x plai ne d i n thi s sect ion. Y ou w i ll not be able to use this me thod if the came r a is in Pa n o r a m a mo de , or when us i n g t he Se lf - T im er or Burst setting s . An a udio cl ip can be up to 6 0 seco nds lon g . 1 Pr es s the Shu t te r but ton al l t he way down to take the pictu re . 2 Co nti nu e to ho l d th e S hu tter but ton down to r e cord the au dio c lip . A mi cr op hone ic on ( ) an d a udi o cou nte r appea r on the Im age Disp lay during r ec or d ing. 3 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g au d i o, re l e a s e t he Shutter button .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 33 A udi o r ecor din g st op s w hen y ou r el ease the Shut ter butto n; ot herwis e, the audi o w ill contin ue r ecor ding f or up to 60 secon ds o r u n til th e camer a r uns o ut o f mem ory , w hic he v er happen s first . After r ec or d in g has stop pe d , the ima ge i s disp la ye d fo r se v er al seco nds in In stant Re vie w on the Image Di splay . Y ou c a n delet e the image an d the audio clip that is att ach ed to the i mag e duri ng Ins tant R e v ie w b y pr essi ng t he Menu /OK but ton . Yo u c a n u s e Pl ay b a ck to re view t h e a ud io cl i ps you ha ve re c o rd e d. S e e Us i n g t he Playba ck M enu o n p ag e 7 5 . T o d el e t e o r re c o rd a n ew a u d i o c l i p, u s e t h e Re c o rd Au d i o option in the Pl ay b a c k menu . See Re c o rd Au d io on p age 83. O rienta tion Sensor An elec tr o -mec hani cal de vi ce in th e came r a de te rmin es w het her the ca mer a i s bei ng held hor i z ontal l y or vertically w h en a st il l pictur e is taken . The c am er a uses the data fr o m thi s sens or to autom atic a l ly r ota te the i mage to i t s prope r orientat ion when saving th e f i le. NO TE Y ou can als o man uall y r ota te stil l images using the Ro t a t e opt ion in the Pl ay b a ck M e n u . Se e R ota te on page 8 4. NO TE The o r ient at ion senso r is dis ab le d whe n th e c a mera is in th e Pa n o r a m a s hoot ing mod e .
34 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Record in g Vid eo C lips NO TE Z o om does not w or k whil e r e cor ding vi deo clips . T her ef or e , yo u ma y wan t to z oom f ir st bef or e starting to re c o rd a vi d e o c l i p. A video clip inc ludes audio. 1 F r a me t he subject f or y ou r vi de o in the v iew fi nder . 2 T o s tart r ecor ding v ideo , pr es s and re l e a s e t h e Vide o bu tton , which is lo ca ted o n top of th e cam er a. T he Vi d eo vie wfinder li gh t and the Self - Time r ligh t tur n on sol i d r ed . A â vi deo st art â s oun d is play ed an d, if Live V iew is o n, a v ide o icon, RE C , and a v i deo coun t er a ppe ar o n t he Image D ispl ay . (S ee Using L i ve Vie w o n pa ge 3 5.) 3 T o stop r e c or di ng v ide o , pr es s and r eleas e the Video button ag ain ; oth er wise , the vi de o will c ontin ue r ecordin g u n t i l t h e c a m e ra ru n s o u t o f m e m or y . NO TE If y ou ha ve se t the camer a t o Self- Timer or Sel f- T i mer - 2 Shots (see Using the Self - Timer Settings on page 43) , t h e c a m e ra wi l l s t a r t re c o rd i n g 1 0 s e c o n d s a f t e r y o u p re s s the Video bu t to n . H owever , wi t h t h e Se lf - Timer - 2 Shots s e t t i n g, t h e c a m e ra o n ly re c o rd s o n e vi d e o c l i p. After recor d in g has sto ppe d, the image appe ars fo r se ver al secon ds on the Image Disp lay . Whil e it is pr o ces sing , y ou can delete th e v ide o cli p by pr es s ing the Me n u/ O K bu t ton. Yo u c a n u s e Pl ay b a ck o n th e c a mera to r evie w th e vide o cl ips yo u h a ve re c o rd e d.
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 35 Usi n g Liv e Vi e w T he Im ag e Disp la y al lo w s y ou t o f r ame p i ctur es an d vi d eo c lips us i n g Live V iew . T o a cti v ate Live Vi ew fr om the menu s or w hen t he Im age Dis pla y is of f , pr ess t he Live Vi ew button. T o t u r n o ff Live Vi ew , press the Li ve Vi ew button again. NO TE Us in g Live V iew consum es a lot o f batte ry pow er . T o conser ve batt er y pow er , use the vi ew f inder ins tead. The follo wing table describes the i nformation tha t is disp lay e d in th e Live V i ew sc reen of the Image Disp lay wh en the c amera se tting s ar e at the ir d ef a ult v alue s and an opti on al me mory car d is instal led in th e camer a . If y ou c hang e othe r came r a se ttings , ic ons f o r th ose s ettings w ill als o be d ispl ay ed in th e Live Vi ew scr e en . # Icon Desc r ipti on 1 Indi cate s that a mem ory c ar d is instal led in the camer a 2 or z Bat tery le vel when us ing ba tter y power (actual ic on shown depe nds o n t he st ate of your ca mera batt er y ; see B attery G auge on page 15 6) z A C pow er when us ing the HP A C pow er ada pte r or opt iona l H P P hotosm a r t R -s e r ies d ock 2 3 4 1 5
36 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Fo c u s i n g t h e C a m e r a Using Au to F ocus The focus br ackets in the Li ve Vi ew scr een s ho w the foc us r eg ion f or the pictur e y ou ar e taki ng or the vi deo clip y ou ar e re c o rd i n g. ( S e e Using L i ve V ie w on p age 35 .) W he n y o u pr ess the Shu t ter b ut t o n h a l f way d own, t h e c a m era u se s z o n e s w ithin this f oc us r egio n to au toma tical ly mea sur e and then lock the fo c us. The AF v ie w f i nder light turns on solid gr e en and one or mor e pai rs of green f o cu s z one br ackets appea r in the Live View scr een when the i mage i s i n focu s and t he ca mer a can lo ck the fo cus . H oweve r , t h e AF vi ewfinder light bli nk s gr een a nd the focus br ackets in Live View t urn re d w h en t h e c a me ra i s u n a bl e to focus. 3 12 Remaining pi ctur es coun t ( actual number depends on ho w much space r emains in memory) 4 4MP Ima ge Q uali t y setting (de fault is 4MP ) 5 F oc us br ack ets (see Us i n g Aut o F o cus on page 3 6) # Icon Desc r ipti on
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 3 7 z If the AF v iew f in der l ight bli nks g r een a n d the focu s br ack et s t u rn re d , re l e a s e t h e Shutter b u t t o n , re - fra m e t h e s u b j e c t fo r y our pict ur e or vi de o cli p , and th en pr es s the Shutter button h a l f way do wn a g a i n. I f t h e AF viewfi n de r l ight c o nt i n ue s to bli nk green a nd th e focus brac kets co ntin ue to t urn r e d after se v er al tr ie s, the r e ma y no t be eno ugh con tr as t o r li ght in t he focu s r egion. T r y us ing a tech nique ca ll ed Fo cu s L o c k to focu s on an obje ct about t he sa me dist anc e aw ay but in a hig her -con tr ast r egio n , and the n, w itho ut r elea sing t he Shutter butt on , po in t the came r a at t he o bj ect yo u w e r e or igina lly t r ying to phot og r aph ( see Us i n g Focus Lock on pag e 38 ) . Y o u can a lso simpl y tur n on mor e l igh t , if th at is possi ble. z If t he AF v ie w f in der li ght bl inks gr een , the f oc u s br ack ets tur n r ed , and e it her the Ma c r o icon or the Super Mac r o bl inks in t he Live Vi ew scr e en , one of th e f ollo wing is tr ue: ⢠T he camer a is set t o the Nor mal F ocu s ran ge but dete cts the f oc us is c lose r than the no rm al r ange . T he camer a wil l n ot tak e a p ict ur e if it cann ot f ind f oc u s. ⢠The c a mera i s s e t to th e Mac r o (c lo se-up ) fo cu s r ange b ut dete cts the f o cus is closer or farth er aw ay t han the Mac r o r ang e . I n this case , th e camer a w ill no t tak e a p i ctur e if it canno t f ind foc u s. ⢠T he camer a is set t o the Sup er Macr o (supe r c los e-up ) f oc u s r an ge bu t det ects t he f oc u s is far th er a w a y than t he Super Macr o ra n g e. I n t h i s c a s e, t h e c a m e ra wi l l n o t t a ke a pi c ture if it ca nn ot find focu s.
38 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual U s i ng F o cu s L o ck Fo c u s L o c k all ow s y ou t o f ocu s on a su b jec t th at is n ot in t he center of the picture , or to c aptur e action s hots mor e quickl y b y pr e-foc u sing in t he ar ea w her e the ac ti on w ill oc c ur . Y o u can also use Focus Lo ck to hel p achie ve f o c us i n lo w light or low con tr as t situati ons. 1 F rame the s ubject f or y ou r pic t ure w ithin the focu s br a ck ets. 2 Pr ess th e S hu tter but ton ha lf wa y down to lo ck the fo c us and ex p os u re. 3 Cont i nue to h old the Shu t ter button h alf wa y dow n whi le you r e -fr ame or adjust your s ubj e ct for pr op er pos it ioning . 4 Pr es s the Shu t te r but ton al l t he way down to take the pictu re . Usin g t h e F oc us Ran g e Set tin g s The Mac r o bu t to n le ts y ou t ogg le be t w een thr ee f oc us sett ings on the c amera . The f oll o wing t ab le descr ibes ea ch of t he f oc u s r an ge se tting s on th e came r a: Setting Desc r ipti on Nor mal F ocu s Use when tak ing pictur es of subjects gr eater tha n 0.4 m (16 in) a w ay . A ut o fo cu s is limited t o a r a nge o f 0.4 m (16 in) to inf init y . T his is the de fault focus set t in g. Mac r o Use when taking clo se -up pic tu r es of subj e cts less t han 0.4 m (16 in) a w ay . In this setting , the c amer a w ill not tak e a pi ctur e if it cannot fin d foc us (the AF v ie w f inder ligh t blinks gr een and the f ocu s br ack ets t u rn re d i n t h e Li v e V i ew sc r ee n). A u to f oc u s ha s a dis tanc e r a ng e of 0.18 m to 0. 5 m ( 7 to 20 in) .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 39 Und erstand ing th e Focus Searc h Priorit y When the ca m er a is set to Nor mal F oc u s or Mac r o fo cu s, i t be g i n s s e a rch i n g for fo cus fr o m t h e la s t fo cus po s i t io n. How ev er , y ou can use the bu tto ns to ch a nge th i s behavio r . This feature is usef ul when t here ar e mult ip le objects at di ffer ent di stan ces i n the foc us region. z Ho ldi ng t he bu tt on w hil e pr essi ng t he Sh utter ha l f way do w n cau se s the cam er a to begin sear ching fo r f oc us f r om the f arthest positi o n (inf init y in Nor mal F oc u s , 0.4 m in Mac r o , an d 0.18 m in Su pe r M ac r o ), thu s making the cam er a mor e l i k ely to f o c us on a n ob j ect in the back g r ound. z Ho lding th e bu tton w hile p r essing the Sh utter halfw ay do w n cau se s the cam er a to begin sear ching fo r f oc us f r om the ne arest p osi tio n ( 0. 4 m i n Norma l F o c u s , 0. 18 m in Mac r o , an d 0. 06 m in Super Ma cr o ), t h u s m ak in g th e c a m e ra m o re l i ke l y t o fo cu s o n a n o b j e c t i n t h e fo re g rou nd . Supe r Ma cr o Use when taking clo se -up pic tu r es of subj e cts less t han 0. 18 m ( 7 in) aw a y . In this s etting , the camer a w ill not tak e a pi ctur e if it cannot fin d foc us (the AF v ie w f inder ligh t bl inks gr een and the f ocu s br ack ets t u rn re d i n t h e Li v e V i ew sc r ee n). A u to f oc u s ha s a di sta nc e r a ng e of 0.06 m to 0. 25 m (2 .5 to 10 in ) . Setting Desc r ipti on
40 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Usi n g Z oo m NO TE The mor e y ou zoom in on t he sub ject of your p ictur e , the more th at ev en sma ll mov ements of t he cam er a are ma gnif i ed ( this i s cal led â came r a s hak eâ ) . So , es pec ia ll y at f ull t ele ph o to z oom ( 3x), y ou r e all y n eed t o ho ld the cam era steady in order to take a pi c ture that is not blurr y . If an icon of a s hak in g ha nd ( ) appea rs i n the Liv e Vi ew scr een, y ou should set the c amera on a tr ip od or stable sur f ace; o th erw is e , th e pi ctur e w ill lik el y b e blur ry . O ptical Zoom NO TE Opti cal z o om d oes no t w or k w hile r ecor ding v i deo clip s or whil e in Su pe r M ac r o focus ra ng e . Op tica l z oom w or ks lik e th e z oom o n a tr adi tio nal f ilm came r a , w i th phy s i ca l lens element s mov ing ins ide t he ca mer a to m ak e the subject of y our pictur e app ear closer . Pr es s Zo o m O u t an d Zo o m I n on the Zo o m l ev e r to mo ve the lens bet ween w ide ang le (1x ) an d teleph oto (3 x) pos it ions. Dig ital Z oom NO TE Digital z oom does not w ork while shooti ng p anor a mic ima ges , w h ile r ecor ding v i deo cl ips, or w hile in Su per Mac r o fo cus ran g e. Unli ke optical z o om , dig ita l z oom uses n o mo ving lens pa rts. T h e came r a e ss en ti all y c r op s t he im age to gi v e an a p pear an ce of the subject of the pic t u r e being an add it i o nal 1.1 x to 7x larger . 1 Pr ess th e Zo o m I n on the Zoom l e ver to optically z o om i n t o t he m ax im um le v e l , th en r elea s e th e b utt on .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 4 1 2 Pr es s Zoom In ag ain and h old it until you r ea ch the desir ed s i z e in t he Im ag e D ispl a y . A y e llo w f r a me sur r ounds t he a r ea o f the im age that w i ll b e c aptured . T he re s o l u t i o n numb er on the r ight sid e of the screen al so be comes sm al ler as y ou di g itall y z oom . F or e x am ple , 3. 2 M P app ea rs in plac e of 4M P , indi cating tha t the imag e is be ing r educed to a si ze of 3 . 2 Me gapix el s. 3 W hen t he y el lo w f r ame is at th e desir ed si z e , pr ess th e Shutter but to n to ta ke the pi ct u re . T o turn d igital z oom off and r et u r n to optica l z oom, pr ess Zoom Out on the Zoom l e ve r un ti l dig ita l z oomi ng stops. Release Zo o m O u t , and then pr ess it aga in. NO TE D i g i t a l zo o m re d u c e s t h e re s o l u t i o n o f a n i m a g e, so y ou r picture will tend to be more p ix i lated th a n the sam e im ag e ta ken with opt ica l zoom. I f you just in ten d to e- m ai l an ima ge or po st it to a w eb site , th is loss o f r es oluti on w ill n ot be n oti ceabl e , bu t in situ atio ns w her e the highe st qu ality coun ts (suc h as pr inting), limit the u se of di gital z oom . It is also r ecomme nde d to us e a tr ipod w hen u sing digita l zoom . Set tin g t h e F l ash NO TE The f las h do es no t w ork in Pa n o r a m a mod e , w ith the Burs t setting , o r while r ecor ding v ideo c lips . The Fl a s h bu tton l ets y ou c y cle thr ough the fla sh se t ting s on th e came r a . T o chang e the f lash setting , pr ess th e Fl a s h bu tton until th e de sir ed setting a ppear s in the Imag e Disp la y . The follo wing tabl e describes each of the flash set ti ngs on the c a me r a.
4 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual NO TE If y ou c han ge t he fl as h setting , th e cam er a w ill r ema in in th at se tting un til y ou c han ge it o r tur n o ff the camer a . W hen y ou tur n t he came r a on a gain , f las h r ese ts t o th e defa ul t Auto Flash setting . Hold ing do wn the Me n u/ OK bu tto n whe n y ou tur n the camer a ba ck on w ill r es t or e t his se tting to w hat it w as w hen y ou tur ne d it of f . Setting Desc r iption Auto Flas h Th e cam era measu res ligh t and u ses the flash if nece ssary. Re d -E ye T he c ame r a me as ur es l igh t an d u se s th e fl ash w it h r ed-ey e r ed ucti on if ne cessar y (see t he fol low ing NO TE f o r a de sc r iption of r e d-e ye r e duction). Fl a s h O n Th e cam era alway s flashe s. I f the light is behind your subje ct, you can use this setting to increa se the light on the front of y our subje ct. This is called âfill-flash .â Fl a s h O f f The camera w ill not f lash , no mat ter the lighting conditions . Nig ht The camer a f ir es the f lash if necessar y (u s ing r ed-e y e r educti on) to illuminate obj ects in the fo r egro und . It then continues t o ex p ose as if the flash had not f ire d to gather the back g r o und (see the f ollow ing NO T E f or a descr iption of r ed- e ye r e ductio n) . A A
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 43 NO TE The r ed-ey e phenomenon is cau sed b y l ight f r om the fl as h r eflecting of f the s ub jectsâ e yes, which s ometim es makes a humanâs or ani mal â s e yes appe ar r e d i n the capt ur e d imag e . When you u se a flash sett in g with re d - eye re d u c t i o n, t h e c a m e ra fl a s h e s t w i c e, m i n i m iz i n g t he r ed-e y e in t he ca pt ur ed ima ges of h u ma ns o r anim als . It wil l ta ke lo ng er to ta k e a pictu r e us i ng red - e ye r educ ti on , beca us e the sh utt er is del a y ed f or t he ad ditio nal f la sh . In tu rn , ma k e sur e y o ur su b jec ts w a it f or the s ec on d flash. NO TE Y ou c an r em ov e r ed e y es f r om h uman s ub j ects in stil l im ag es th a t you h ave ta ken usi n g t he Rem ove Re d E yes option in the Pl ay b a ck M e nu (see pa ge 80). Usin g t h e Self - T im er Set tin g s 1 Secur e the ca mera to a tripod or set it on a s table surface. 2 Pr ess th e Tim er / Bu rst button until Self - T imer or Self- Timer - 2 Shots appe ars in the Imag e Dis pla y. 3 Frame the subject in either the viewfinder o r in Li ve Vi ew . (See Using Live View on p age 3 5 . ) 4 Th e next steps dep end on whether you ar e capt uring one or two s till pi ctur es , or ar e r ecor ding a v id e o cl ip . F or Still Pic tures: a. Pr ess th e Sh utter button h alf wa y do wn to gai n Fo c u s Lock (the ca mer a m eas ur es and then lo cks th e focu s and e xposur e) . Th e camer a will ho ld the se setting s u n til it ta k es the pi c tu r e.
44 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual b. Press the S h utter but ton all the wa y down . If the Im age Di splay is on , a 10 -se cond cou ntdo wn appea rs on the scr een. T he Sel f- Tim er light on the fr ont o f the ca mer a then bl in k s for 10 se co nds before the ca m er a ta kes th e p ic tur e . If you se t the camera to Se lf - T ime r - 2 Sh o ts , the Se lf - T imer li ght bl inks f or a fe w mo r e se conds un til the second picture is tak en. NO TE If you immediate ly press the Shutte r button all the way down with out using Focus L ock , the camer a will lock focu s and e xposur e just be fore the en d of the 10 -second co untd own. T his is us eful wh en one or more subje cts wi ll be en te ring the pictu re during the 1 0-second countdown per io d. NO TE Y ou ca nno t recor d audio with a st il l pictu r e when usin g the Self- Timer s ett in gs, but you c an add a n aud io cl ip later (se e Re c o rd Au d io on pa ge 83) . F or Vid eo C lips: T o s t a r t re c o rd i n g vi d e o, p re s s t h e Vid e o bu tto n an d then r elease i t . If the Im age Di splay is on , a 10 - second countdo wn appea rs on the scr een. T he Sel f- Timer light on th e front of t h e c a m e ra th e n b l i n k s fo r 1 0 s e c o nd s b e fore t h e c a m e ra s t a r t s re c o rd i n g t h e vi d e o. NO TE W ith e ithe r the Self- Timer or the Se lf - Timer - 2 Shots se tting, onl y one vi deo c lip is r ecor ded af te r the 10 - secon d countdo wn . T o stop r ec or di ng the v ideo cl ip , press the Vid e o but ton ag ain; othe r w ise , the v i deo will con tinue r ecor d ing until the camera runs out of memory .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 45 Usin g t h e B urst S et tin g NO TE The Burst setting do es not w or k in Pa n o r a m a mode, nor w hile r ecor d in g vi deo clip s. Y ou also canno t r ecor d au dio w h en using th e Burst set t in g , b ut y ou ca n add an audio cl ip lat er (s ee Re c o rd A u d io on p age 8 3). Als o , the f lash do e s n ot work wh i l e us i n g t he Burst set t ing. Burst al low s you to ta k e appr o ximately 5 sti l l pi ct ur es in a r ow as quickly as th e c a mer a p ossi bly c a n . 1 Pr es s the Ti m e r / B u r s t bu t t on until Bur st appears in t he Ima g e Di spl a y . 2 F rame the s ubject an d pr ess the Sh utt er bu tto n all th e w a y dow n a nd hol d it . The c am er a takes a p pr ox i mately 5 pi ct u r es as quickly as poss i ble unti l th e Shutter button is re l e a s e d. T he I mage Disp la y r ema ins o ff du r ing the ca ptu r e . A fter the burst pi c tur es have been ta k en, each image appe ars one at a time on the Imag e Disp lay . Us ing the Shoo ting M o des NO TE The shoo ting mode does not apply when you ar e re c o rd i n g vi d e o cl i p s . Sho oting mo des ar e p r e-de f ined ca mer a s ettin gs t hat ar e optimiz ed fo r taki ng pi ct ur es o f certa in scene t ypes to giv e you be t t er r esults . In eac h shoo ting m ode , the camer a se le cts the best sett in gs, s uch as the ISO spee d, F -num ber (ap erture) , a nd shutter spee d, optimi zi ng them for the par tic ula r scene or situ ati on .
46 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l T o change the sh ooti ng mod e , pr ess th e Mod e button on the t op o f th e came r a u ntil t he des ir ed sh ootin g mo de ap pear s in the status scr een. Altern a tiv ely , y ou can pr ess the Mode bu tto n j us t on ce a n d th en use th e b ut tons t o scr o ll to th e d esired sh ooting mode . Th e f oll o w ing ta ble de sc r ibes eac h o f the sh o o ting mode setting s on the came r a . Setting Desc r ipti on Au to The camera aut omaticall y selects the b est F -number (apertur e) a nd shutter speed f or the sce ne . Au to m o d e wo rk s we l l fo r m o st s h o t s i n n o rm a l s i t u a t io n s. This mode is also usef ul when y ou need to t ake a good shot qui ckl y , and do not h ave time t o select a spec ial shooting mode on the camera . Action The camera us es fast sh utter speed s and hi gher ISO speed s to stop moti on. Use Action mode to ca ptu r e sporting e ven ts, mo ving car s, or an y scene wher e yo u w a nt to st op the action . Land s cap e T he camer a c ombine s a higher F -n u mber f or be tter depth of f ield wit h higher satur ation and sharpness fo r a m o r e vivid e f fe c t . U s e Landscape mode to captur e mount a in scenes or an y shots w ith a deep pe r sp ec ti v e . Po r t r a i t T he camer a c omb ines a smaller F - nu mb er to blur the back gr ound , w ith lo w er sa tu r ati on , contr ast , and sharpness f or a mor e natur al eff ect . Use Po r t r a i t mode f or pi ctur es that ha v e one or mor e p eopl e as the ir pr imar y f ocal poin t . Beac h & Sno w This mode lets y ou capture br ight , out do or s c enes and b ala nc e ou t ha rsh l ig hti n g.
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 4 7 P ic ture Q u alit y for Lon g Exposures A t longe r shutte r spee ds the camer a will a ut oma tical l y tak e a seco nd e xposu r e w ith t he sh utte r cl ose d in or de r to mea sur e and r educe the no ise (gr ain y look) in the im ag e. In the se case s, t he e xposu r e w ill see m t o ta k e tw ic e a s lo ng a s ex pec ted . F o r e xam ple , in a 1-se con d exp osu r e , the Imag e Displ a y w ill st a y dar k f o r 2 se cond s until th e no ise r educ ti on f r ame is e xpose d . This mean s that at long er shutter spee ds, y ou may not be a b le to ta k e qu ite as ma n y sh ots ba ck -to - b ack. Suns et The f oc us st arts at inf init y and the f lash is set to Fl a s h Off . This mode impr ov es the satur atio n of sun set color s and r etains the w armth of t he scene with a bias to wa rd s t h e o ra n g e c o l o rs o f t h e s u n s e t. Apertu r e Pr io rity Av This m ode l ets you select the F -num ber ( aperture) setting in Live View us i n g th e butt ons, wh ile the camera selects th e b est shu t te r spe ed . This allo ws y ou to contr ol the depth of f ield (for e xampl e to blur the bac k gr ound ). Us e th e Apert u r e Prior it y mode when you w ant specif ic contr o l o ver th e apertur e. Pa n o r a m a T h i s m o d e a l l ow s y o u t o s h o o t a s e ri e s o f o ve r l a p p i n g f r am es f or stitc h ing int o one pa nor amic image using the included comput er soft w are . Use Pa n o r a m a mode f or landscapes, suc h as mountain r anges, or gr oup pi ctur es wher e y ou nee d to ca ptur e a w ide shot that one image ca nnot captur e . F lash is set to Fl as h O f f in thi s mo de . (S ee Using P anor ama M ode on page 48 ) . Y ou ca n vi ew th e ent ir e pano r a m i c i mag e in t he P lay back Me n u (se e Pre v ie w P anor ama on pag e 84) . Setting Desc r ipti on
48 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Using P a norama Mode NO TE If the HP Image Z one softwar e is not ins talled on y our com pu ter , se e Using Y ou r Camer a w ithou t Inst alling t he HP Imag e Zone So f t war e on p age 113 . Pa n o r a m a mode al lo ws yo u to ta k e a s equenc e of 2â 5 pictur es that c a n b e â st itch ed â t oget her i n order to c aptu re a sc e ne too wi de to fit i nto a sin g le pictu r e . In Pa n o r a m a mode , y o u tak e a p i ctur e a s th e f irs t in t he pan or ami c s eq uen ce, an d eac h subse quent pi ct u r e y ou ta ke is ad ded to the pa no r ama until y ou end t he sequen ce b y pr ess in g the Me n u/ O K button, or until y ou hav e tak en the f ifth pi cture in t he sequence . Y o u can then vie w a low - r esol ut ion i m age of your pan or ama w i th t he Pr e v ie w P anor ama Men u option in the Pl ay b a c k Men u (see page 84 ) , or you ca n transfer the imag es in the pa nor amic seq uence to y our comp uter f or s titching togethe r and t hen v i ew ing or pr inting . Y our camer a came w ith t he Ar cSo f t® P anor a ma Mak er⢠soft wa r e tha t autom atic a lly s ti tches the i m ages in th e panora m ic sequence together on yo u r computer d ur ing image transfer . T he P a nor ama M ak er soft war e was automatica lly insta lle d on y our computer du r ing the HP Ima ge Z one soft w are insta llat ion pr oces s (se e In stal li ng the Soft war e on p age 1 9) . T o transfer the pa noramic sequenc e of imag es fr om y ou r camer a to y our comput er so tha t the Ar cSoft P a nor ama Make r soft ware ca n sti tch th e ima ges toget her , see Tr a n s f e r r i n g Images to a Computer on pa ge 9 7 .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 49 T aking a P anor amic Sequence of Pictures 1 Pr es s the Mode bu t ton on top of the ca m era unt i l the Pa n o r a m a mode app ea rs in the I mage Di splay . The c amera switches to Live Vi ew wi t h disp lay ed in t he Im ag e Di spl a y . Y ou ar e n o w r e ady to ta k e th e first pictu r e i n y our pan or ami c seq uen ce. NO TE P ano r ama image s ar e stit ched to gethe r f r om left to r igh t , so y our f ir st ima ge m u st be at t he le ft-m ost e n d of t he pan or ama v ie w . 2 Pr es s the Sh ut ter but ton to ta k e the f irst pi ctur e in the panor ami c se q u ence. After In stant R ev ie w , the camer a s w itch es to Liv e V iew wi t h displ a y ed in the Imag e Disp la y . 3 P os it ion the ca m era to ta ke the sec ond pic t ure . Notice the tr a ns paren t ov erla y of the im age of the fir st pictur e i n the se quence sup er imposed on the left thi r d of the Liv e V iew scr e en . Use this o v erla y to al ign y ou r se c ond pict u re hori z o nta ll y wi th th e first. 4 Pr es s the Sh ut ter but ton to ta k e the se cond pictu r e . After Instant Review , the c amera s w i tches to Live Vi ew wi th di sp l aye d i n t he Im ag e D ispl a y . Ag ain , th e transpa r ent ov erlay o f the pr ev ious ima ge is su per impo sed o n the lef t thi r d of the Liv e V iew screen to enable y ou to al ig n your thi r d pictur e .
50 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 5 Continue addi ng mor e pic t ures t o the pa nor ama, or press the Me n u/ O K button t o end the panor am ic s equence . The pan or am ic sequen ce ends automat ical ly after y ou ta k e the fi f t h p i c t u r e. NO TE T o vi e w a low -resolution im age of the pa norama on yo u r c a m e ra, s e e Pr e vi ew P anor a ma on p age 84. Usin g t he C ap ture Menu The Ca p t u re Men u al lo w s y ou to a dju st v ar iou s came r a settin g s t hat af f ect t he qual itie s o f the imag es an d v i deo clip s y ou captur e with y our camera . 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Capt ure M enu , press the Li ve View button , and then pr ess the Menu /OK but ton . If the i mage Di splay is al r ea dy off , y ou c an s imply pr ess Men u/OK . 2 U se the buttons t o scr oll thr o ugh th e Capt u r e Menu options. 3 E i ther pr ess Menu/ OK to s ele ct a hig hlig hted option an d dis pla y its sub-m en u , or u se th e butto ns to change the se ttin g f o r the highlig hted option w ith out go ing to its sub- menu . 4 W i thi n a s ub- menu , us e the bu t tons and then the Men u/OK but ton to chan ge the set t i ng for th e Capt u r e Men u option . 5 To e x i t t h e Capt u r e M enu , hig hli ght the EXI T option an d pr ess Menu/ OK .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 5 1 6 To r e s t o r e Capture Men u se ttings to w hat th e y w er e w hen y ou tur ned the came r a off , h old do wn the Menu /OK button as y ou tu r n the camer a bac k o n. Help for th e Menu O ptions Hel p ... i s the last option in each of the Captu r e su b-men u s . Th e Help . .. option pr ov ides information ab out that Captur e menu op tion a nd it s sett ing s. F or e x a mple, if yo u pr ess Men u/OK when Help ... is hig hligh ted in the Whi t e Ba la nc e su b-me n u , the Whit e Ba la nc e Hel p sc r een is dis pla y ed , as shown . U se the buttons t o scr oll thr o ugh the Help sc r ee n s . T o e xit the H e lp an d r etu rn to th e pa rt icul ar Capture sub -men u , pr ess the Me n u /O K bu t ton. EV Com pens a tion In difficul t lighting co nditions, you can use EV (E x pos ur e Valu e) Compe n sa tion to override the au tomatic expo su re setting that the camera makes. EV C ompe nsati on i s usef ul in s cenes that contain m an y light obj e cts ( like a white house in the sno w ) or many dark ob jects (lik e a bl ac k ca t on a dar k ba ck gr o und). Sce nes co nt ainin g man y light obj e cts or man y da r k objects c ould t urn out gr ay w itho ut the us e of EV Com pensati on . F or a s cen e w it h m an y li gh t ob jec ts , in c r ea se t he EV Compens ation t o a positi v e number to pr o duce a br ighter r esu lt . F or a sc ene w i th many da r k obje cts, d ecr e as e the EV Com pensati on to da r ken th e scene to b e closer to black .
5 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect EV Compen satio n . 2 In the EV Comp ensatio n sub- me nu, use the butt ons to change the EV setting in 0.33 ste p s fr om -3 .0 t o 3. 0. T he new setting is appl ied to the Live View scre en b ehind th e men u, so y ou ca n see th e effe ct each sett ing will have o n the picture . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Captur e Men u . If the settin g is an yt hing othe r tha n the def au lt se t ting o f 0 (z er o) , the number value will app ear i n the Live Vi ew screen ne xt to the ico n . T he ne w setting r emains in e ff ect un til it is ch anged again or un til th e came r a is tur ne d off . Hol ding do w n th e Menu /OK bu tto n wh en y ou tu r n th e cam er a bac k on w ill r es to r e t his se tting to w hat it w as w hen y ou tur ne d it of f . I mage Qual i t y NO TE This set t ing do es not apply when r e cording video cli ps. This sett ing a llow s y ou to set the r es olut ion and JPE G compr ess ion of the sti l l imag es yo u captu r e with your camera . The Imag e Quality su b-men u h as f our p r e-d ef ine d se ttings , a s w el l as a menu option t hr oug h which yo u can cr eate your own cus t o m Image Qualit y setting .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 53 NO TE T he r es olu ti on po rti on o f all t he I mage Q uality set t ings exc e p t fo r t h e VGA sett ing is r epr esented b y a number and MP (Meg ap i xe ls), suc h a s 4MP or 2MP . T he h igh er the number of M egapi x els, the higher the resolution . In the cas e of t he VGA se t t ing , the image w il l be 6 40 b y 480 pi x el s (0. 25 M P) , wh ich i s t he lo west resolut ion . T he c om p r essi on porti on o f t he Ima ge Q ual ity s ettings is r epr es en ted b y th e st ars . Th e m or e st ar s , th e l ess compr ession of the imag e , and the higher the quali t y . Con v ersely , the less number o f stars , the higher compr es sion of th e imag e , a nd the low er the quali t y . 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Ima ge Q ual ity . 2 In the Im age Qu alit y sub -men u , use t h e button s to high lig ht a pr e -define d set ti ng or the C us t om ... me nu option . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to save a pr e - de f ined setting an d r etur n to the Captur e Men u . Or , when the Cus to m. . . menu op tion i s highlighted , pr ess Menu / OK to go to the Cus t om I ma g e Quality sub- m enu (se e pa ge 5 5) .
54 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l The follo wing tabl e helps e x pl ain t he pre- defined Image Quality setting s in mo r e d etail: Setting Des cr ipti on 4MP Images will be full resolution and have the lowest pre-de fined com pres sion. This setting produ ce s very high quality imag es , with grea ter color accura cy, b ut uses the most memory. Th is is reco mmende d if you plan to enl arge im age s, or pr int image s to a size large r than 18 by 24 cm ( 8 by 10 in). 4MP Images will be full resolution and have medium compress ion. This setting produ ces high quality images, but u ses less m em ory than the 4M P setting above . This is the default setting a nd is r ecomm ended if yo u pl an t o enl arge imag es, o r pr int images to a size of 18 by 24 cm (8 by 10 in) or la r ger . 2MP Image s wil l be 2 M P (me dium) resol ution and hav e medium com pression. Th is se tting prod uce s high- quality ima ges, but use s less memor y than the 4MP settings a bove. Th is setting is reco mme nded for printing ima g es u p to 13 by 18 cm (5 by 7 in). VGA Images will be 640 by 480 (lowest) resolu tio n and have medium com pression. This is a memory- efficient s etting, b ut produ ce s the lowe r qu ality images. Th is s etting is good for image s you want to send v ia e-mail or post to the Interne t.
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 55 The Imag e Quality set t ing af fect s not only the quali t y of the imag es, but a ls o the n u mb er of im ages that can be stored e ithe r in th e int er nal m emo r y in t he came r a or on an o pti onal memor y ca r d. Images wi th higher r esolut ion and low er com pr essio n w ill t ak e up mor e s pace than image s w ith lo w er r eso lu tio n an d/or h igh er com pr essi on . F or e x amp le , th e highes t pre- def i ne d set tin g , 4MP , r esu lts in high q uality imag es, but c ons um es mor e stor age sp ac e in memor y tha n the ne xt lo we r setting , 4MP . Lik ew is e , man y mor e sti ll i mag es can be stor e d in memor y at the 2MP or VGA setting s tha n at 4MP ; ho we ve r , th ese se ttings wi ll r esult in m uc h lo w er qual it y imag es. The Pi c t u r e s r e m a i n i n g count at th e bo ttom o f the sc r een updates when y ou h igh light e ach pre-define d set ti ng. See Mem ory C apa city on page 17 1 f or mor e i nformation about how t h e Im age Q ual it y se tting af fec ts t he n umbe r o f imag es t hat can be sa ve d in y our cam er a me mory . T he i con f or th e ne w se tting (in t he pr e vi ou s ta ble ) w ill ap pear in the Live Vi ew screen. The new set ti ng r emai ns in effect u nti l it is c hange d ag ain , e v en w he n y o u turn the camer a of f . NO TE When y ou use d igital z oom , t he r e solut ion c h anges as yo u zo o m i n . S e e Di gital Z oom on page 40. Custom Ima g e Qualit y If you se le ct the Custom... op tion fr om the Ima ge Qual ity sub- menu , the Cus to m I m ag e Q u a l i t y sub- men u dis pla y s. T his su b- menu al lo ws you to sele ct a c ustom Image Q uality setti ng, incl uding indi v i dually setting t he r es oluti on and the compr ess ion of the i mages you capt u r e. In the Custom Image Qu ali t y s ub-m enu , the default Res o l u t io n se tting is 4MP (fu ll r es olu tio n) , an d t he de fa ult Com p r ess ion se tting is (medium comp r es sion).
56 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 1 In the Imag e Quality su b-men u (pag e 5 2), se lec t th e Cus t o m.. . option . 2 Use the butto ns to mo ve bet w een the Resolution and Compr es sion opt ions. 3 U se th e bu tto ns t o ch ang e t he Re so l ut io n or Compr ess ion setting . T he foll o w ing tabl es help e x plai n th ese set t ings. NO TE At high er com pr es sion le v els , imag e qu ality is r educe d . 4 Pr es s Menu /OK to sav e th e c u sto m Image Q ual it y se t ting a n d re t u rn t o t h e Captur e M enu . The custo m Im age Qual it y se t ting w ill a ppear in th e Live V iew sc r ee n. T he cu sto m setting r emains in eff ect un til it is chang ed agai n , e ven w hen y ou tu rn th e ca mer a off . NO TE When y ou use d igital z oom, the r esolut ion changes as yo u zo o m i n . S e e Di gital Z oom on page 40. R esolu ti on S etting s 4MP âF u ll r esol utio n; ther ef or e , h ig hes t qua lit y 2MP â2MP (medium) r esolu tion VG A â640 b y 4 80 (l o w es t) r es olu tio n; lo w es t qu ality Co mpr essi on S etting s âHig he st c ompression ; most me mor y- efficient , an d mi nimum qual it y âM e diu m compression âLo w com pr essi on âL ittle to n o com pr ess io n ; t her ef o r e , lea st memory -eff i c ien t (bes t se t ting f or ima ge editing)
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 57 White Bal ance Differ ent kind s of lighting c onditions c ast dif fer ent c olors . F or e xam ple , sunli ght is mor e blue , wh ile indoo r tungst en li ght is mo r e y ell o w . S cen es d omin at ed b y a s ingl e co lo r m a y r equir e an ad ju st men t o f the whit e balan ce se tting to hel p the camer a r epr od uce co lors mor e accur at ely and ens u r e th at whi tes appe ar w h it e in the f in al i mage. Y ou can als o ad j ust th e whi te bala nce to pr od uce cr ea tiv e effects. Usi ng the Sun setting can pr o d uce a war m er look to the i mage. 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Whi te B al a nc e . 2 In the White Balance su b-men u , use t he buttons to hig h ligh t a se t ting . The new setting is appl ied to the Live View scree n behind the menu, so you ca n see th e effe ct each sett ing will have o n the picture . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Captur e Men u . The follo wing tabl e helps e x plai n t he sett in gs in more detail : Setting Des cr iptio n Auto Th e c amer a automatic ally id entifies and co rrects fo r scene illuminance . This is the default setting. Sun T h e came r a bal an ces c ol or ass umin g th e su b j ect is outd o ors u nde r su n ny or br ig ht clo u dy c o ndi t ion s . Shade T h e came r a bal a nce s col or as su min g th e su bj ect i s out do or s in shade , in dar k cl oudy conditions , or at dusk .
58 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual If the se t ting is an ything othe r than the de fa ult Au t o se tting, the icon fo r the set t in g (i n th e pr evi ous table) will app ea r i n th e Li ve Vie w scr een. T he ne w setting r emains in e ff ect un til it is ch anged again or un til the cam er a is tur ned o ff . T he White Balance s etting r es ets to the de fa u lt Au t o se tting w hen y ou tur n t he camer a off . Holdi ng do wn the Menu /OK butt on w hen y ou turn the camer a ba ck o n wi l l res to re t h i s s e t t i n g to w ha t i t wa s wh e n you t u rne d it off . Manual White B al ance If you se le ct the Man u a l opt ion , the Man ual W hite Ba lanc e screen dis play s. The Live Vi ew port ion of the scr een s ho ws the color ti nt fr om the pr e vious M anual W hite Ba lance se tting tha t w a s made . NO TE To r e s t o r e t h e p r e v i o u s Man ual W hite Ba lanc e setting , sim ply pr ess t he Me n u / OK bu t to n in t he M an ual W hite Bal ance scr e en w i thout pr ess in g the Shutter button . Tu n g s t e n Th e ca mer a b alances color based on incandescent or halogen li ghting ( t yp icall y f ound in h omes ) . Fl u o re s c e n t T he camer a balances color b ased on f luor escen t lig ht in g. Ma n ual Th e camera calc u lat es a cust om White Ba lance based on yo u r target image ( see th e foll ow in g subsecti on) . Setting Des cr iptio n
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 5 9 To c h a n g e t h e Manual Whit e Balance sett ing : 1 P oint the ca m er a at a whi te or g r ay t arget (such as a piec e of paper ) , maki ng su r e that the entire sc r e en encompass es the whi te or g r ay ta rget . 2 Pr ess th e S hu tter button (the camer a will not t a k e a pic tur e) . T he ca m er a t hen cal c ulat es a cu s tom Whit e Balance set t ing based on th e r eg ion i ns i d e the foc u s br ackets. Du r i ng th e calc ulation , PROC ESSING. .. is di splay ed on th e scr een. When the ca lculat ion i s c omp lete , th e co lor ti nt i n Live Vi ew chan ges to m atch th e n e w Man ual Whi te B a l anc e setting , and WHITE B AL ANCE SE T is displ a ye d . 3 If nee ded , r epe at ste ps 1 an d 2 un til y ou ge t th e des ir ed Man ual W hite Ba lanc e setting . 4 W hen y ou ar e sa tisf ie d w it h th e Man ua l set t ing you ha ve made, pr es s th e Men u/OK b utton to e x i t t he Manu al Whit e Balance s c re e n a n d re t u rn t o t h e Cap t ure Me n u . I S O S peed NO TE This set ti ng do es not apply when reco r din g vi de o cl ips. T his s etting adj us ts th e sensiti vity o f t he came r a to l igh t . W hen IS O Speed is s et to the defaul t Auto sett ing, the ca mer a sel ect s the best ISO spee d for th e scen e. L o w e r IS O sp eeds w ill ca ptu r e t he b est q uali t y im ag es w ith t he lea st amou nt o f gr ain (or no ise), bu t r esult in sl ow er sh u t te r spe eds . If t akin g a p i ctur e in l o w li gh t cond itio ns w ith out a flash at I SO 100 , y ou ma y w ant t o use a tr ipod . In c on tr ast , higher IS O numb er s allow faster s hutter spee ds, and ca n be used when taking pi ctures in dark ar eas w ithout a flash , or pi ct u r es of fast mo ving obje cts. Higher IS O spee ds pr oduc e p i ctur es w ith m or e gr ain (or no ise) a nd , th us , ca n be o f lo wer quali t y .
60 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sele ct IS O Speed . 2 In the ISO Speed sub-menu, us e the butto ns to hig hligh t a se tting. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u . If the se t ting is an ything othe r than the de fa ult Au t o se tting, the n umb er v alu e f or t he set ting w ill a ppe ar in th e Li ve View scr een. T he ne w setting r emains in e ff ect un til it is ch anged again or un til th e came r a is tu rn ed o ff . T he I S O Sp eed set t ing resets to the d efau lt Au to se tting wh en y ou tu rn t he came r a o ff . Hol ding dow n th e Men u/OK bu tton w hen y ou tu r n the cam er a bac k on w ill r est or e this se t ting t o wha t it w as w hen y ou tur ned it o ff . AE Meterin g NO TE This set t ing do es not apply when r e cording video cli ps. T his se t ting all ow s y ou to s pecify w hi ch r e gi on o f a sce ne the came r a w ill u s e t o cal c ulat e the e xpos ur e . 1 In the Capt ur e M enu (p age 50) , sele ct AE Mete r ing . 2 In the AE Meter i ng sub-me n u , use the butto ns to hig hligh t a se tting. The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View scr een behind the menu, so you can see the effect each setting will have o n the picture. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Captur e Men u .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 6 1 The follo wing tabl e explai ns the set ti ngs i n more detail : If the ne w se t ting is an ything othe r than the de fa ult Cent er - We i g h t e d setting , the ico n f or th e setting (in the pr e vi ou s tabl e) w i ll app ear i n the Live Vi ew screen . T he ne w setting r emains in e ff e c t until it is cha nged ag ain or un til the came r a is tur ned of f . T he AE Mete r ing se tting r es ets to the d efau lt Center - W eighted setting w hen y ou tur n t he came r a of f . Ho l d i n g d own t h e Menu/ OK button w hen y ou tur n the ca mer a bac k o n w ill r es to r e th is se tting t o w hat it w as wh en yo u t u r n e d i t of f. Setting Descr iptio n Ave ra g e The cam er a uses the entir e scen e regi on to me asur e and calc u lat e e x posur e . Us e this s etting when y ou w ant e v er ything in th e pi cture to be u se d equall y whe n calc u lating e xposure . Cen te r - We i g h t e d T he came r a u se s a l ar ge ar ea in th e cen te r of th e scene r e gion t o measur e and calc u late e x posur e . This setting is good to use when the subj ect of the p ictur e is in the center of th e fr a me. Exp osur e w il l b e based mor e on the subj ect than o n its sur ro u ndings . This is the def ault setting. Sp ot The cam er a u ses a sm all ar ea in th e cent er of the scene r e gion t o measur e and calc u late e x posur e . This can be usef ul in b ack l it sc enes or when the subj ect of the pi ctur e is v er y dark or li g ht com p ar ed to t he rest of the scene . When u s ing this setting , fr a me the subj ect of the pi cture in the center of the foc us br ack ets , then pr ess the Shutte r button halfw ay do wn t o lock the e xp osur e a nd f ocu s on the sp ot in the center . Then r e compose the scene as desir ed and pr ess the Shu t te r bu tt on a ll th e w a y d o w n . NO TE: Whe n t his set tin g i s used , pa rts of the image ca n end up o ver or u nder - exp os ed.
6 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Ada ptiv e Li gh ting NO TE T his setting d o es n ot ap ply in Pa n o r a m a mo de or when re c o rd i n g vi d e o cl i p s . T his se t tin g balan ces th e r el ati onship be twee n br ig ht an d dar k ar e as in a picture , pr eser ving ge ntle co ntr asts but c ompr essi ng ha r sh co ntr as ts . So me ar ea s in t he p i ctur e ar e li gh te ned , wh ile ot he rs ar e le ft al one . He r e is an ex ampl e o f ho w A d aptiv e Lig h t i n g can enhance an image: Adaptiv e Lighti ng is use ful in situa tio ns lik e the se: z Ou tdo or s cen es w ith a m i xtur e of sun an d shade z Cloudy d a ys w hen t her e is a lot of â g lar e â fr om the sky z Indoor s cenes that use flash photograph y (t o soften or e v en ou t the effe ct of the f lash) z Backlit scenes w h er e the subject is too f a r a wa y for the re g u l a r fl a s h t o re a c h NO TE When Adapt iv e L igh ti ng is tur ned o n , t he c amer a wi ll tak e longer to stor e a n ima ge in me mory , si nce the i m age is be ing pr ocess e d be f or e sto r in g it . With out Adapt iv e Li gh ti ng : Wi t h A da pti ve L igh ting :
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 63 Y ou ca n use Adapt iv e Lighti ng w ith or wit hout f l a sh , but it is not r eco mm ende d as a replacem ent for f las h . Unl ike f las h , Adaptiv e Lighti ng does n ot affe ct exposu r e sett in gs, so br ightene d a r eas may appe ar â noisyâ or grain y , and in door or nig ht imag es ma y be blur ry if tak en w ithou t a r egular f lash o r a tripod. 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sele ct Adapt iv e Li gh ti ng . 2 In the Adapt i ve L ig htin g sub - me nu, use the butt ons to hig h li g h t a setting . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u . The follo wing tabl e explai ns the set ti ngs i n more detail : If the ne w setting is an y thing o ther than the def ault Off set ti ng , the ic on for th e set ti ng ( i n t he pr evious table ) will app ea r in the Live Vi ew s cr een . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen you turn the camera off . Setting Desc r iption Off T he came r a w il l pr oc ess t he im age a s no r mal . T his is t he def ault setting. Lo w Th e c a m e ra w i l l b rig h te n th e d a rk re g i on s o f t h e i m a g e . High The ca mer a will gr eatly br ighten the dar k r egions of the image .
64 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Colo r Th is se t ting allo ws you t o con tr ol the co lor in w hich y our ima ges w ill be cap tur ed . F or e x am ple , w hen yo u set Color to Sepia , your im ages will be c aptured in br ow n c olors to mak e them lo ok ag ed or old -fashioned. NO TE Once y ou hav e tak en a p ictur e u s ing e ither the Blac k & Whi t e or Sep ia se t ting , the image cannot be adj ust ed back to F ull C olo r lat er . 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Color . 2 In the Color sub-me n u, u se the bu ttons to hi ghlig ht a se tting. The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View scr een behind the menu, so you can see the effect each setting will have o n the pic tu re . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Captur e Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in e ff ect un til it is ch anged again or un til th e came r a is tu rn ed o ff . T he Color se tting r ese ts to t he defa ul t F ull C olor se tting wh en y ou tur n th e camer a o ff . Holdi ng do wn the Menu /OK butt on w hen y ou turn the camer a ba ck o n wi l l res to re t h i s s e t t i n g to w ha t i t wa s wh e n you t u rne d it off .
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 65 Satura tion T his se t ting all o ws y ou to deter mine ho w sa tur ated t he colo rs w i ll be in y our pictur es. 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Satur ati on . 2 In the Sat ur ati on sub -men u, u se the butto ns to hig hligh t a se tting. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u . The follo wing tabl e helps e x plai n t he sett in gs in more detail : If the ne w se t ting is an ything othe r than the de fa ult Me diu m se tting, the i co n f or the s etting (in t he pr e vi ou s ta ble ) w ill appea r i n the Liv e V iew s cr een . T he ne w setting r emains in e ff e c t until it is cha nged ag ain or un til th e came r a is tu rne d off . T he Sat ur ati on se tting r es ets t o the d efau lt Medium setting w hen y ou tu rn the camer a off . Holdi ng do wn the Menu /OK butt on w hen y ou turn the camer a ba ck o n wi l l res to re t h i s s e t t i n g to w ha t i t wa s wh e n you t u rne d it off . Setting Desc r iption Low Mu te s c ol ors to g ive a s oft er , m ore ânat u ral â l oo k to th e subj ect . Medi u m Col ors wil l be normall y satur ated . T his is the def ault setting. High Emphasi z es mor e v i vi d color s in a scene . Outdoor landscape ph otogr aph y can use hi gh satur ati on to cr eate sk ies that ar e mor e bl ue , or sunsets that ar e mor e or a nge . -
66 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Sh arpnes s NO TE This set t ing do es not apply when r e cording video cli ps. T his se t tin g allo ws y ou t o se t ho w shar p the f ine de tail w ill be in yo u r i m a g e s . 1 In the Capt ur e Me n u (pa ge 50 ) , sel ect Shar pne ss . 2 In the Sha r pn es s sub-m en u, u se the butto ns to hig hligh t a se tting. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u . The follo wing tabl e helps e x plai n t he sett in gs in more detail : If the ne w se t ting is an ything othe r than th e def ault Me di um se tting, the i co n f or the s etting (in t he pr e vi ou s t able ) w ill appea r i n the Liv e V iew scr e en . Setting Des cr ipti on Low Th e e dges in your i mages will b e softer , with l ess g r a in (or noise ) . Y ou can us e this setting f or ta king portr ait pi ctur es with softer , mor e natu r a l edges. Me diu m The edges in your images will hav e normal sharpness. This is the def ault setting. Hi gh T he ed ge s in y ou r ima ge s w ill be mo r e pr ono un ced . T his setting ma y be help f ul f or out door landsca pes , b ut the images w ill con tain mor e gr ain (or noise). -
Chapt er 2: T a kin g P ictur es a nd Recor din g Vi deo Clips 6 7 T he ne w setting r emains in e ff e c t until it is cha nged ag ain or un til th e came r a is tu rne d off . T he Sha r pne s s set ti ng r e sets to the d efau lt Medium setting w hen y ou tu rn the camer a off . Holdi ng do wn the Menu /OK butt on w hen y ou turn the camer a ba ck o n wi l l res to re t h i s s e t t i n g to w ha t i t wa s wh e n you t u rne d it off . Da te & T im e Im pr int NO TE T his setting d o es n ot ap ply in Pa n o r a m a mo de or when re c o rd i n g vi d e o cl i p s . This setting imprints e ither the date o r the date and time of when t he ima ge was captur ed in the lo wer le f t-h and corne r of the i mag e. Onc e you se l ect ei th er o f th e Date & Time Imprint settin gs, the date or date and time will be im printed on all sub se qu en t sti ll i ma ges th at a re ca pt ur ed, not to pr ev i ousl y captu red images. NO TE On c e you have ta ken a pictu re us in g ei th er th e Date Onl y or Date & Tim e s et t in g , th e d ate or da te an d ti me th at is impr inte d on th e imag e canno t be r emo ved late r . NO TE If you r ota te t he i mage us ing th e Ro ta t e option in the Pl ay b a c k M e n u ( pa ge 7 5 ) , the date or da te a nd ti me imprint will li ke wise rotate with the i mage. 1 In the Capt ur e M enu (pag e 50 ) , sele ct Date & T i me I mp r in t . 2 In the Date & Tim e Imp r int sub- men u , use th e but t ons to hig h li g h t a setting . 3 Pr ess Me n u/ OK to save th e se tting and r etur n t o th e Cap t u re Men u .
68 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual The follo wing tabl e helps e x plai n t he sett in gs in more detail : If the new set t ing i s any thi ng oth er th an the de fault Off set ti ng , the ic on for th e set ti ng ( i n t he pr evious table ) will app ea r in the Live Vi ew scr ee n. T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen yo u turn the camer a off . Setting De s cr ipti on Of f The camer a will not imp rint a date or dat e and time on the image. Date O n l y The camer a w il l per manently im prin t the dat e in th e lo w er lef t-hand cor n er of th e im age . Date & T ime The camera w il l permanentl y impr int the date and time in the lo we r left- hand corner of the image .
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 6 9 C hapter 3: Re vie win g Im a ges an d Vi d e o C l ip s Yo u c a n u s e Pl ay b a ck to r e vi e w the im ages and v id eo c lips in yo u r c a m e ra . W h e n rev i ewi n g i m a g e s i n Pl ay b a c k , y o u can use t h e Pr int but ton to select sti l l ima ges t hat y ou want to have printe d autom atic al ly th e next t im e y o u c on ne ct the c am era t o you r c om p ut er or di re ct ly t o a ny H P P h ot os ma rt o r P ictBridge -c omp ati ble pri nter s. Se e Se lecting Ima ges fo r Pr inting o n pag e 7 2. W hile in Pl ay b a c k , y ou ca n al so u s e the Zo o m le v e r to v ie w th umbnails of image s, or t o m agnify ima ges so yo u ca n tak e a c l ose r l ook a t th em o n t he cam er a . See Vi ewi n g Th u m b n a i l s on pag e 7 3 and Ma gn i fy i ng Im a ge s on pag e 7 4. In ad ditio n , the Playb ack M en u allows yo u to d elete ima ges or v ide o cl i ps, man ipu late i mages, such as r emov i ng r e d ey es f r om ima ges and r ot atin g ima ges , an d e v en ge t HP Im age Advi c e (an an aly sis o f im ages f or an y p r oble ms w it h f oc u s, e xposu r e , and so f ort h , tha t ma y ha ve occ ur r ed w hile capt ur ing the imag es ) . T o d o these thi ngs a nd more , se e Us in g the Playback M e nu on pa ge 7 5.
70 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l Usi n g P l ay ba c k 1 Pr ess th e Pl ay b a c k but ton to act iv ate Pl ay b a c k . T he mo st r ecently tak en or r e vie w ed image or v ideo cl ip appea rs on t he Ima g e Di spl a y . 2 U se the bu tto n s t o s cr oll t hr ough y ou r ima ges an d v ide o c lips . Pr es s and ho ld e it her of t he b utto ns to scr oll fa s ter . NO TE A udi o c lips att ach ed to s till imag es and v id e o c lips pla y autom atic al ly af ter the st i l l imag e or th e f irst fr am e of the v id eo cli p di sp lay s for 2 se con ds. Y ou c a n adjust t he v ol um e of the audio playback by pressi ng th e buttons. 3 T o tur n o ff the Im age Dis pla y aft er r e vi e wing y our im ag es and v ide o cli ps, pr ess the P la ybac k button again. Dur ing P la y bac k , the I mage Dis play also i ndic ates add i tion al inf or mati on a bout each im age or v ide o clip . The f ollo wing table describe s t hi s in for ma tion. 1 3 5 4 6 7 2 8
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 71 # Ico n Desc r iption 1 Displa y s only wh en an optio na l memory car d is install e d in the c amer a. 2 or z Battery level when using battery ( actual icon sh own depends on the state of your cam era battery; see Battery G aug e on page 15 6). z A C po we r when u sing the HP A C po wer ada pte r or opt ion al H P P h oto sm ar t R -series do ck. 3 D i sp l ays for th e fi rs t few se c o n d s wh e n yo u e nt e r Pla y b a ck to in d ic ate th a t you ca n scrol l th rou gh th e images or v ideo clips using the buttons . 4 3 Indicat es this image has been selected to b e sent to 3 destinati ons u sing HP Inst ant Sha r e (s ee Chapter 4: U sin g HP I nsta nt Shar e on page 85) . 5 2 Indicat es this image has been selected f or pr inting 2 copi es (see Selecting I mag es f or Pr inting on page 7 2) . 6 17 of 43 Sho ws t he number o f t his image or v i deo clip ou t of th e to tal nu m b e r of im ag e s a nd vid e o cli p s th a t a r e s tor ed in memory . 7 0:29 or z Sho ws the r ec or ded lengt h of this au dio or v ideo cl i p . z Ind ica tes this imag e ha s an a udio clip atta ch ed. z Indi cates this is a vi deo c lip . 8 Indi cates this image is the second image in a panor a mic s e quen c e of images th at was tak en using th e Pa n o r a m a s hooting mode .
72 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l T otal Im a ges Summ ar y Sc reen When y ou pr ess the button while v i e wing the l ast im age , a sc r een appea rs sh o wing t he num ber of p i ct ur es t ak en , an d t he n umber o f p ic tu r es r em aining. C oun ter s ind ic at in g th e tota l num b er of i mag es sele cted fo r printin g an d for HP Inst ant S har e ar e sho w n in th e uppe r le ft -han d cor ner of the scr een, a nd icons f or an optional memor y c ar d if inst alled (t he SD icon ) and the ba tter y lev el are shown in t he up p e r ri g h t - h a n d c o rn e r o f t h e s cre e n. Sel ec tin g Im a g es f o r Printi n g The Pr int b u t t o n o n t h e b a c k o f t h e c a m e r a a l l o w s y o u t o s e t ho w many copies of a st il l image you w a nt to hav e printed autom atic al ly th e n ext t im e y ou co nn e ct th e ca mera to your c omp ut e r or di rec t ly to a ny H P P h ot os m a r t or P ic t B ridg e - compat ib le printers . NO TE Y ou can sele ct only i ndiv id ual i m ages i n a pa noramic s eq uen ce f or pr int ing v i a t he Pr int button . Even if you se lec t all the image s in a pan or ami c seq uence in di vi dual ly us i n g t he Pr i nt bu t ton, only the indiv id ual images will print the ne xt ti me you connect y our camer a to y our comput er or pr int er . T o pr int an en tir e pano r ami c seq uen ce of ima ges ins tead , se e Pr inting P anor ama s on pa ge 99. Yo u c a n u s e t h e Prin t b u t t on an y time t hat yo u see a st ill imag e dis play ed on the Ima ge Di spl a y , such as dur ing Pl ay b a c k , or when y ou acces s the mai n Pl ayb a c k M e n u or the HP Inst ant Sh ar e M enu .
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 7 3 T o selec t a still imag e fo r dir ect p r int: 1 Pr es s the Pr i n t bu tto n . 2 Use t h e bu ttons t o se t th e number of copies y ou w ant to pr int . The maximum n u mb er of cop i es is 99 . T he p r int er i con w i th the nu mber of c opies that you set appe a rs in the lo wer r ight- hand corner of the image . T h e ne xt t ime y ou c onn ec t t he ca mer a t o y o ur c om put e r o r pr int er , th e imag es you hav e select ed will print automatic ally (se e Chap ter 5: T rans fer rin g and P r in tin g Im ages on page 9 7) . Vie wing Thumbn a ils Thum b na il vi ew a l l ow s yo u t o vi e w t h e s t i l l i m a g e s yo u h av e t ak en an d the f ir st f r ames of t he vi deo clip s y ou ha v e r ecor ded ar r ange d i n a matr i x of nin e thumbn ail imag es and v i deo c lip fr am es per scr een. NO TE In T hum bnail v ie w , ea ch ima ge in a pano r ama disp la ys in di v idu all y . T o pr e vi e w an e n tir e pan or ami c seq uence of imag es, se e Pr e v ie w P anor a ma on page 84 . 1 Whil e in Pl ay b a ck (pag e 7 0), pr ess Th u m b n a i l s (s ame as Zo o m O u t ) on t he Zoom lev er . A Th umbn ail vi e w o f up to nin e ima ges an d v id eo c lip f r ame s appea rs on the I mage D i spla y . A ye l l o w b ord e r s u rro u n d s t h e c ur r en t imag e o r v i deo clip fr ame . 2 U se the butto ns to sc r ol l ho r i z ont all y to the pr ev io us or ne xt thu mbnail .
7 4 H P Photosma rt R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 3 Pr ess th e b utt ons to scr oll v erti call y to the th umbnail directly ab o ve or be lo w th e curr ent thumb nai l. 4 Pr ess the Me n u /O K button to ex i t Thu mb n ai l view an d re t u r n t o Pl ay b a ck . The curr e nt imag e or vi de o cli p ( that was in the yellow bor der in Thu m b n ai l v iew) is di splay ed i n fu ll v iew on the Image Disp lay agai n . A t t he bo t t om o f ea ch th umbna il , a n HP I nst ant Shar e ico n si gnif ie s that th e still image is se lecte d f or one or mo r e HP Inst an t Shar e destin ati ons , a pr int er icon signif i es that it is select ed fo r pr i ntin g , a pa n or ama icon i ndic at es the ima ge is part of a pan or ami c seq uen ce , a Vi deo i con si gnif i es tha t t his is a vi deo clip , and an A udi o ic on si gnif ie s tha t an a udi o c lip is a ttac hed t o t h is s till imag e . Magni fyi ng Images NO TE T his f eatur e onl y w or ks on s till ima ges; it does not w ork w ith vi deo c lips . Als o , this f eatur e is f or v ie win g pur pos es onl y; it do es n ot pe r manen tly alte r th e imag e . 1 Whil e in Pl ay b a ck (pag e 7 0), pr ess Magn if y (same a s Zo o m In ) on the Zo o m lev er . T he c u r ren t ly d isp lay ed i ma ge is automatical ly magn ified 2x. The ce nter po rt ion of th e mag n i f ie d ima ge is displ a y ed alo ng w ith f o ur ar r o w s, w hic h ind icat e th at y ou can pa n ar oun d the ma gnifi ed im age . 2 U se the an d butt ons t o p an ar ou nd the ma gnifi ed im age . 3 Use Zo o m I n and Zo o m O u t to in cr e ase or de cr ease the m a gn i f ic at ion.
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 7 5 4 Pr es s the Me n u/ O K button to ex i t Magnify vi ew a n d re t u r n to Pl ay b a c k . T he c ur r ent image is dis pla y ed in f ull v ie w on the Image Di s play agai n. Usi n g t h e P l a yba c k M e nu The Pl ay b a c k M e n u allows y ou to delet e sti ll i ma ges or vi deo clip s , undele te ima ges , f or mat the came r a's in te rnal mem ory or optional memor y c a r d , a nd remo v e r e d ey es fr om st il l i m ages. A dditi onal ly , y ou can get HP I mage A dv i ce (a n ana ly sis of an imag e which identi fies pr oblem s w i th foc us, exposur e, and so f orth) , vi e w a ll the set t ings y ou us e d when y ou captur e d an imag e or v ide o cli p , r ec ord audio cl ips to at tach to an i mag e , r ota te imag es , and pr e v ie w panor ami c se qu ences o f image s. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Pl a yb a c k Me n u , press the Me n u/ OK button w hile yo u ar e in Pl ayb a c k . If you a r e not cu rr ent l y in Pl ay b a c k , pr ess the Pl ay b a c k bu t ton fir st , t hen pr ess the Men u/OK but ton . 2 Use t h e bu ttons t o hi ghligh t the Pl ayb a c k M e n u option that y ou w a nt to u se on the left side of the Image Disp la y . T he Pl ay b a c k M e n u options are e xpla ined later in thi s se ct ion. 3 Mov e to the im age or v ide o cli p y ou want to use by pr ess ing th e b uttons. Th is mak es it eas y to perf o rm the same action on sever al im ages or video cli ps, s uch as delet ing m ultiple im ages or v i deo clips . 4 Select the highlighted Pl a yb a c k M e n u opt ion b y pr ess ing the Men u/OK but ton .
7 6 H P Photosma rt R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 5 U se on e of se ve r al w a y s to e xi t the Pl ay b a c k Menu . If , imm ed iate ly af ter entering th e Pl a yb a c k Me n u , you decide n ot t o c han ge an ythi ng , sim pl y p r es s Men u/OK ag ain to e xit th e m enu . Af ter you h ave used th e Pl ay b a ck Men u , y ou can nav ig ate to ano ther men u via the m e nu tabs at the to p o f the Imag e Displ a y . Y ou can als o selec t the Ex it option and pr es s Men u/ OK . If y ou want to r et u r n to Pl ay b a c k , or sw itch to an other cam era stat e , pr ess the appr opr ia te button on the back of the cam er a . Th e follo wing table s umm ar iz es e ach of the Pl ay b a c k M e n u options and des cr ibes the information in th e bot to m r ight cor n er of each ima ge or video cli p w h i le the Pl ayb a c k Menu is dis play ed. Still Imag e Sc r e en 1: Vi deo Clip Scr een 1: S til l Image Scr een 2: V id eo Clip Sc r een 2 : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 15 14 13 12 16
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 77 # Ic on Desc r iption 1 Dele te - P r esents a sub-m enu wh ere y o u can delete this image or video clip , delete the entir e panorami c sequenc e of images, delete all images and v ideo clips, f or mat the inter nal memor y or an option a l memory car d, and un d elet e the last deleted ima ge . ( See De l e te on p age 7 9.) 2 Rem ove Re d Eye s - Cor r ects the r e d effect w hich appears in the e y es of human s ub jects in still images . (Se e Re m ov e Re d E ye s on page 8 0. ) 3 Im age Adv ice - Pr o vi des an analy sis o f the image wh ich ide nt i fie s prob l e m s wi t h fo cus , ex p o s u re, and so f orth . Also p ro vi des r ecomm endations on ho w to impr ov e sim ilar images in t he f utur e . (See Im age Adv ic e on page 81.) 4 Im age Info - Al lows you to view al l of th e s et t ing s that we r e used when capturing this image . (S ee Im age I nfo on page 8 1.) 5 Rec ord Au d io - R ec or ds an audi o clip to attach to this still image. (See Re c ord A u d io on p age 83.) 6 Ro t a t e - R otates the c urr entl y displa y ed still image 90 d eg r ees clockwise. (See Ro ta te on page 84. ) 7 Pr e vi e w P anor a ma - Dis pla y s a l o w-r esoluti on , stitc hed image of the cur ren tly select e d panorama . (S ee Pr e vie w P anor a ma on page 84. ) 8 EXIT - Ex its t he Pl a yb a c k Men u . 9 4MP Sho ws t he Image Q ualit y setting that w as used to tak e this image , or blank if it is a vi deo clip . (See Im age Qual it y on pag e 5 2.) i
78 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l 10 0:2 9 Visibl e if this image has an au d io c lip at tac he d to it, wi th th e len g th o f th e a ud io cl i p d is p layed to th e l ef t o f th e ic o n. 11 14 o f 4 3 Sho ws t he number of t his image or v ideo c lip out of the total number of images and v ideo c l ips in inter n al m emory or on an option a l memory car d. 12 Indi cates this image is t he second image in a panor amic sequence of images th at was tak en usi n g th e Pa n o r a m a shooting mode . (See Using Pa n o r a m a M o d e o n p age 48 .) 13 3 Indicates t his image has been se lected to be sent t o 3 destinati ons u sing HP Ins tan t Sha r e . (See Cha pt er 4: Usi ng HP Ins tan t Sh ar e on page 85.) 14 2 Indicates t his image has been se lected for pr inting 2 copi es. (Se e Selecting I ma ges f o r Pr inting on p a ge 7 2 .) 15 3/15/ 2004 S hows t he d a te th a t th i s i m ag e wa s c apt u red o r this vi deo clip was r ecor ded. 16 0: 3 7 Visibl e if this is a v ideo c lip , w ith the len g t h of the v ideo clip displa yed to the left of the icon . # Ic on Desc r iption
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 7 9 Delete In the Playba ck Me n u (pa ge 7 5), wh e n yo u se l e ct Delete , the Dele te su b-me n u displa y s. The Delete su b- menu pr ov ides the f ollow i ng options: z Cance l âR eturns you t o the Pl ay b a c k Men u w it hou t de letin g the i ma g e. z Thi s I ma g e âDel etes th e curr ent l y di splay ed ima ge or vi d e o c l i p. NO TE When one shot fr om the center of a panor amic seq uen ce is d elet ed , all of t he pan or ama ta gs ar e r emo ved , ther efor e br e aki ng the pa nor amic se quence . Th es e imag es a r e no w cons i d er ed indiv idual st il l ima ges. Ho w e v er , if yo u de le te an image f r om t he b eginning o r end of the p ano r ama, and ther e are at least 2 images r em aining , the pa nor amic sequ ence is p r e se r v e d . z E n t i re P a no ra m a S e q u e n c e â Del etes a l l imag es asso ci at ed with th e pan or am ic sequen ce . z All Ima ges (i n Me mor y/on Ca r d ) âD el etes a ll of the imag es and vi de o clips either in inter na l memory , or on a n optional me mory car d t hat is ins talle d in the camer a . z F ormat ( M emor y/ Car d ) âD eletes a ll of t he image s, v ide o clips, and f i les i n inter nal memor y or on an optional memor y ca r d , and then for mat s the i nternal m emor y or memor y ca r d. z Und e let e Last â Recov er s the most r ec ent l y deleted im age.
80 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l NO TE Y ou can r eco ver o nly the mo st r ecen t dele te ope r ati on, inc lu ding en tir e pan or ami c se que nces . On ce y ou p r oceed to a nother operation , for ex a mple , pow er in g off t he camera or taki ng another pi ctu r e , the delete op er a tion y ou perf or med is per man ent , and th e image is n o lon ger re c ove ra b l e. Also, y o u ca nnot Undel ete a Dele te A ll I mag es op er a tion . Use t h e bu tto n s to hi ghlig ht an op tion , and the n pr ess the Me n u/ O K b utt on t o sel ect it . Rem ov e Re d Ey e s NO TE T his men u op tion is onl y a vail ab le f or still imag es that we re t a ken wi t h a fl as h. In the Pl ay b a c k Men u ( page 7 5 ) , wh en yo u se lect Rem ove Re d Ey e s , t he camera imme diately beg ins pr oces sing the sti ll i mage to r emov e red ey es fr om the s ubjects in t he i mage . The r e d -e ye r emo val pr o c ess ta k es a fe w seco nds. After pr oc ess ing i s complete, the corr ected ima ge d isp lay s, along w i th the Re m ove Re d Eye s s ub- menu , which li sts t hr ee opt i o n s: z Sa ve Cha nges â Sav es the red e y e changes and returns to the Pl a yb a c k Me n u . z View Ch a n g e s âDispl ay s a v ie w of the ima ge w hic h h as gr een bo x es ar ound t he port io ns th at w er e cor r ect ed f or r ed e yes . Y ou can z oom in and pan ar ound the ima ge in this vi ew . T o re t u rn t o t h e Re m ove Re d E yes Men u , press the Men u/OK but ton . z Cance l âRet urns to the Pl ayback Me n u w ithou t sa v ing the r ed e y e ch ange s.
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 81 Im ag e Adv i c e NO TE T his men u op tio n is no t a va ilabl e f or v i deo cl ips o r f or im ag es tha t wer e copie d to the ca m er a. In the Playba ck Me n u (pa ge 7 5), wh en y ou s ele ct Im age Advi c e , the cam er a c hec ks th e im age f or an y p r oble ms w it h f oc u s, e xpo sur e, an d so f ort h . If there ar e any pr oblems, a n ana ly si s appea rs on the I mage D i spla y li sti ng the pr obl em , i ts c ause , and t he r ecom men ded sol ution for ima ges ta k en i n th e futu r e, as shown in the e x a mple scr een her e. If Image Advi c e f ind s mor e than one problem w i th the imag e , the t wo most sev ere pr oblems w i ll be di spl a yed , one p er ca te go ry . To e x i t t h e Image Ad vice scr e en, pr es s Men u/ OK . Im a g e Info In the Playba ck Me n u (pa ge 7 5), wh en y ou s ele ct Im age Inf o , the Im age Inf o scr e en di sp lay s. This screen sh o ws all of the se ttings tha t w e r e us ed wh en ca ptur ing t he c ur r en tl y disp la y ed imag e or vi de o cl ip . The follo wing tabl e e x pl ain s th e in fo rmat ion that is d i spla yed f or eac h imag e wh en y ou se lec t the Image Inf o opt io n .
8 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual NO TE T he inf or mati on in th e l as t thr ee r ow s in th e botto m , r ight-hand corner o f the ima ge is the sa m e infor mation that i s pr ov ide d in t he Pl ay b a c k Me n u view o f th e i m ag e. # De s c r ip ti on 1 Non-def ault shooting mode ( Action , La nd sc ap e , Po r t r a i t , Beach/Sno w , Sunset , A p e r t u re P ri o ri t y , Pa n o r a m a ) 2N o n - d e f a u l t Fl a s h set ting ( Re d - Eye , Fl as h O n , Fl a s h O f f , Night ) an d non -d ef au lt Fo c u s setting ( Mac r o , S up e r Ma c r o ) 3 Al l non- de fault Ca pt ur e M en u setting s 4 F - number ( apertur e) , shutter speed, and EV Compensati on sett ing 5 IS O Sp ee d setting 6 Displa y s only w hen an opti ona l memory car d is inst alled in the cam er a 7 F ile name of th e image in int ern a l memo r y or on a n opti onal me mo ry ca r d 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 8 9
Cha pte r 3: R ev ie wi ng Image s and V ideo Clips 83 Rec o rd Au d i o NO TE T his men u o ptio n is n ot a va ila ble f or v i deo clips . T o r ecor d an a u dio clip fo r a s till image that doe s no t alr ead y ha v e an au dio clip attac hed to it: 1 In the Playb ack Me n u (pa ge 7 5) , sel ect Re c o rd Au d i o . A udi o r e cor ding st arts imm edi atel y afte r y ou se lect this menu option . A micr ophone i c on and a n elapsed time c o u n t e r a re d i s p l a ye d d u ri n g re c o rd i n g. 2 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g, p re s s Menu /OK ; otherwise the audio con tinues t o r e co r d until the camer a r uns out of m e mo ry . W h e n re c o rd i ng s t o p s , t h e d i s p l ay re t u r n s t o t h e Pl ay b a ck Men u . NO TE A udi o clip s can be atta ch ed to singl e panor ama imag es i n a se quenc e , but ar e not at tach ed to th e f in al sti tched pan oramic f i le. If t he cur rently di splay e d ima ge al r e ady has an audio cli p atta che d to it , w hen y ou se lect Re c ord Au d i o , t he Re c o rd Au d i o su b-me nu is disp la y ed inst ead . T he Re c o rd Au d i o sub-m enu lis ts sever a l opt ions: z K eep Curr ent Cl ip âR et ains th e c ur r en t au dio clip and r e tu rn s to the P la y bac k Men u . z Re c o rd N ew C l i p â B e g i n s t o re c o rd a u d i o, re p l a ci n g t h e pr e vious audio cli p . 8 F ile siz e of the image in int ern al memory or on an optional me mo ry ca r d 9 In addition t o the Ima ge Q ual ity set ting and t he date , the Ima ge In f o scr e en displa y s th e time that this image w as captur ed or this v ideo c lip was r ec or de d . # De s c r ip ti on
84 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l z Del ete C lip âD eletes the c urr ent audio c l ip and returns to the Pl a yb a c k Me n u . Ro ta te NO TE T his men u op tio n is no t a va ilabl e f or v i deo cl ips o r f or still images th at w er e captur e d in Pa n o r a m a mo de . In the Playba ck Me n u (pa ge 7 5), wh en y ou s ele ct Rot a t e , the c u rr ent ly di sp lay ed i ma ge is automa tic a l ly r o tate d 90 de g r ees cl oc kwis e . T he imag e is dis pla y ed in its ne w or ie ntati on . Y ou can then p r ess Men u/ OK to ro t ate the i ma ge ag ai n as ma n y ti me s as ne e de d to ga i n the orienta tio n of th e im age you want . Whe n you ex i t th e Rot at e men u , th e imag e w ill be sa ve d in its new o r ienta t io n . Pr e vie w P anoram a NO TE T his men u o pti on is on ly av ailab le f or im ages in a pan or ama. Pr e v ie w P a nor ama d ispl ay s a low - r esol ut ion , st itch ed i mage of a p anoramic s equenc e of i mag es. 1 Use the button s to scr oll to one of the images in a pan or am i c se quence of i mag es. 2 In the Playb ack Me n u (pa ge 7 5) , sel ect Pr e v ie w P a no r am a . T he cen t er of th e pano r ami c seq ue nce displ a y s f ir st , and the r ight an d lef t side of the sequen ce app e ar cr opp ed b y the bo u n dar ies o f the scr een . U se the bu ttons to s cr oll to the le ft an d r i ght of t he ima ge to r e v ie w th e entir e pa nor ami c seque nce. Press Me n u /O K to e xit the Pr e vi ew P a nor ama op tion and r etur n to the Pl ay b a ck Menu .
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 85 C hapter 4 : Usin g HP Inst an t Sh are This camer a ha s an ex c iting f e atur e called HP In stant Sha r e . T his f eatur e all o ws yo u to e asil y s elect s till imag es in y our came r a t o be au t omati ca lly sen t to a v ar ie ty o f destin ati ons t he ne x t time y ou co nnect the camer a to y o ur compu ter . F or e xam ple , you can se lect imag es in yo ur camer a to be automatic ally sent to e -ma i l ad dresses ( in cludi ng g r oup dis tribution list s) , on li ne al bum s, or other on li ne ser vi ce s the ne x t time y ou connect the camer a to y our compu ter . NO TE A v ai lable onl ine ser vices vary b y r eg i o n. Once y ou hav e tak en stil l pi ctures with y our camer a , using HP I nstan t Sha r e is as e asy as 1- 2 -3! 1 Set u p the HP I nst ant Sh are Me nu on y ou r cam er a , a s e x plai ne d i n th e n ext se ction star ti ng on pag e 86. 2 Use t h e HP In stan t Shar e Men u to sele ct image s in y our camer a fo r partic ular HP Ins tant S har e dest in ations. First see U sing the HP Inst ant Sh ar e Menu on page 90, and then se e Selecting All I mages f or HP Instant Shar e Destinations on page 92 or Se lecting In di vi dua l Im ages f or HP Inst an t Shar e Des tinations on page 9 3. 3 Connect the cam er a to your compu ter and tr ans fer t he ima ges as e x plain ed in T r a nsferr ing I mages to a Computer on page 9 7. Once the ima ges are tr an sfer r e d to yo u r com pu ter , the y w ill be a ut oma tica lly s ent to th ei r r es pe c ti ve HP I nstan t Sha r e dest in ation s. NO TE Vi s i t ww w . hp . co m/ g o/ i ns t an t s ha r e to see HP I n stan t Shar e in ac ti on .
86 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Set tin g Up th e HP Insta n t Share Menu o n t he C a mera Bef or e you can use HP Ins tant Shar e , y ou mu st f irs t set up the HP I nstan t Sha r e Menu on y our cam er a. T he f oll o win g pr o c ed ur e e x plai ns how to do thi s. NO TE Y ou w ill need an I nte r net connec tio n to comp lete this pr o ced ur e on a W indow s comput er . Macint os h user s, ho w ev er , will not ne ed an Inter net connection . NO TE If you ha ve an opt ional memor y c ar d inst alle d in y our c a m e ra, m a ke s u re t h a t t h e m e m o r y c a rd i n yo u r c a m e ra is n ot l ock ed an d ha s so me f r ee space on it . 1 Ma k e sure that the HP I mag e Zone sof t war e i s in stal le d on y our comput er (se e page 19) . 2 T u rn on the cam er a , a nd th en pr ess t he HP In stant Share button on the back of the ca mer a. 3 The HP I n stan t Sh ar e Menu appe a rs on the Im age Di s play . Use the bu tto n to s cr ol l to the bo tt om of t he li st i n the HP Inst an t Shar e Me n u , h ighlight HP Inst ant Shar e Setup ... , and pr es s t he Menu /OK button . Once y ou hav e sel ected HP Inst an t Shar e Setu p ... , a messag e app ears on the Image D isplay as ki ng you to connect t he camer a to y our com pute r . NO TE If y our comput er is r unning Windo ws XP , w hen yo u connect t he camer a to y our com pute r in the ne xt s tep , a di alog bo x ma y disp la y th at r eq ues ts y o u to Sele ct the pr og ram to l aun ch for th i s act ion . Simply c l ick Canc el to close th is dial og box .
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 8 7 4 Connect the c amer a to your computer b y usi ng either the spec ial USB ca ble fo r connecting the came r a to a com pute r that ca me w i th your ca mer a, or the optional HP Photosmar t R- s e r i e s d o c k : ⢠Connect the c amer a to the co mput er with th e USB ca bl e b y co nne ctin g t he larger end of t he cable to t he com put er , an d connecting the small end of th e c able to the US B connect or behin d the r ubb er door on t he side of the c a me r a. ⢠Connect the c amera to the computer w ith a n optional HP Pho to smart R - se r ies dock b y p utting the camer a in the do ck and pr es sin g t he Sav e/Pr int button on the d o ck. Thi s activates the ca me r a HP Inst an t Shar e Me n u setu p w i z ar d o n y o ur co m pu te r . S ee Setting U p Destina tions o n a W indow s Computer on pa ge 88 or Setting U p Destinati ons on a M ac i ntosh Computer o n p a g e 89 fo r i n st ru ct i o ns fo r y our computer .
88 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Set tin g U p Des tin at ions on a Windo ws Com pu ter 1 At t h e We l c o m e scr een, clic k Start . 2 The Set U p Y ou r HP Ins tan t Shar e Destina tio ns scr e en appea rs. An y HP In stan t Shar e destinati ons you hav e already set up will be l i ste d here . Click Cr eat e to add a new desti nation to your c amera HP In stan t Shar e Men u . 3 The Go Onlin e scr e en appe ars, pr omptin g you to c onn ect to y our Inter net ser vi ce pr ovi der . Connect to the Intern et, if not alr ead y onlin e , and c li c k Next . 4 Sig n in to your se c u re HP I nst ant Sha r e account: ⢠If this is y our f ir st time u sing HP I nsta nt Share , th e On e- T ime Se tu p - R egi on an d T er ms o f U se s c r e en a ppea r s. Se lec t y our r egi on , r ead an d agr ee t o the T er ms o f Us e , and cl ick Nex t to continue . T hen fo llo w the instr uctio ns to re g i s t e r f o r a s e c u re HP Inst ant Shar e accoun t . ⢠If yo u hav e used HP Inst an t Shar e b efo r e, sign i n to your HP I nstan t Sha r e account . Click Ne xt to con ti nue. 5 Choose an HP I nst ant S har e Servi ce fo r you r de s t i n a t io n. Click Ne xt , and f ollo w the instr ucti ons to set up t he serv ice to be use d when you select th is des ti nat ion . 6 W hen y ou f inish se tting up th e serv i ce f or this des tina tio n , y ou a r e r eturned to the Set Up Y our HP Instan t Shar e Des tinations sc reen , and t he nam e of your new desti nat ion appe ars in the li st of desti nat ions. NO TE Y ou can co n f igur e a m ax imum o f 34 HP I nst ant S har e desti nation s (such as i ndiv idua l e - mail add r esses or gr oup distr ibu tio n lists) th at can be list ed in the HP I nst ant Sh ar e Men u on y our camer a.
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 89 7 Click Cr eat e to add a noth er desti nat ion ( r ep eati ng steps 2 , 5, an d 6 abov e ) , or sele ct a desti nat ion and do one of the fol l ow i n g : ⢠Click Edit to mo di f y the dest in ation. ⢠Click Rem ove to de lete th e dest in a tion. 8 When y ou ha ve f ini shed add ing HP I nst ant Sh are desti nat ion s, click Sav e to m y c amer a . The new desti nation s ar e then sav ed to the camer a âs HP In stant Sha r e M enu . When the computer conf irms the y have been sav ed to yo u r camer a , disconnect the camer a f r om th e com put er . Set tin g Up D es tin ations on a Ma c in tosh C omp u ter 1 At t h e Modify Shar e Men u scr een, an y HP Inst an t Shar e desti nat ion s you h av e already set up will b e li ste d. Click Ad d t o add a ne w des tina tio n to y our came r a âs HP I n stan t Shar e Men u . 2 The New Shar e M enu Item scr e en appea rs. Enter a nam e f or the destin ation in the Menu Item Name f ield , and do e ithe r o f th e f oll ow ing: ⢠Select Use m y lo c al e -ma il ap plic ation to se nd imag es dir ectl y to the e -mail addr ess(s) y ou s pecify bel o w in this sc r een w ithou t using HP I nst ant Sha r e . ⢠Select Us e HP Ins ta nt S har e e-mail an d se rv ic es to c r eat e an HP In stan t Shar e des tinati on . 3 Click OK to ad d the new desti nat ion to the c am er a â s HP Inst an t Shar e Me n u . Y o u a r e r etur n ed t o t he Mod ify Shar e Men u scr een, and the na me of y ou r ne w destin ation appe ars in the li st of desti nat ions.
90 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l NO TE Y ou can co n f igur e a m ax imum o f 34 HP I nst ant S har e desti nation s (such as i ndiv idua l e - mail add r esses or gr oup distr ibu tio n lists) th at can be list ed in the HP I nst ant Sh ar e Men u on y our camer a. 4 Click Add to add an other des ti nat i o n (repeat ing steps 2 & 3) , or sele ct a des ti nation an d do on e of t he follo wing : ⢠Click Edit to mo di f y the dest in ation. ⢠Click Rem ove to de lete th e dest in a tion. 5 When you hav e f in is hed add in g desti na tion s, click Update Came r a . T he new desti nations are t hen s av ed to the camer a's HP In stan t Sh ar e Men u . W hen th e com pu te r con f ir ms th e y h a ve bee n sa v ed t o y our ca mer a , dis conn ect the came r a fr om the comp uter . Usin g t he HP Ins tant Sh a re Menu Once y ou hav e set up the HP Ins tan t Sh ar e Men u on the camer a (see pa ge 8 6) , yo u can no w use the HP In stan t Shar e Men u . Whe n y ou pr ess t he HP In sta nt Shar e but ton on the ca mer a , t he mos t r ece ntl y t a k en o r v ie w ed imag e a ppe ar s on t he Ima g e Di spl a y . T he HP In stan t Shar e Men u al so d ispl a y s on the lef t side of the scr een. The follo wing tabl e descr ib es e ach of the HP I nstan t Sh ar e Me n u option s as shown in the f ol lo wing exa m p l e HP Ins tan t Shar e scr een.
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 91 # Icon Des cr ipti on 1 Shar e All Images... let s y ou sh ar e all st ill imag es in int ern al memory or on an opti onal memory car d to the selected destinations. 2 Ch e c k mark indi cates this destinati on has b een se lected for the cur re ntly displa y e d image . (Y ou can se lect mor e than one des tination per image.) 3 E -ma il destinati ons that w er e set u p in this e xampl e HP I nsta nt Share Me n u . 4 A w ebsite destinatio n that w as se t up . Other types o f destinati ons ma y hav e di ff er ent icons. 5 HP In st ant Sha r e Setu p ... lets you add mor e e -mail and other HP Ins ta nt Shar e d est i n at io n s to th e HP Inst an t Shar e Men u . (See Setti ng Up the H P In stant Shar e Menu on t he Camer a o n p ag e 86 .) 1 2 3 4 5
92 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual Sel ec tin g Al l Ima ges for HP Ins tan t Sh are D estin a tions To s e l e c t HP Inst an t Shar e destin atio ns f or al l still ima ges in inter na l memory or on an opt i onal memor y car d : 1 T u rn on the cam er a , a nd th en pr ess the HP I nstan t Shar e button. 2 U se the bu tton t o high li ght S har e All Im age s . 3 Pr ess the Me n u /O K button to dis play the Sh ar e All Im ages su b-me n u . NO TE If y ou hav e not y et set u p desti nat ion s for HP I nst ant Shar e , a mes sage appe a rs off er i ng y ou help in sett ing u p yo ur destina tions . F o ll ow t he instr uc tions to se t up y our HP I nstan t Sha r e dest in ation s. 4 U se the butto ns to scr oll to th e desti n atio n th at you w a nt to sel ec t in the Sha r e All Im ages su b-me nu , an d pr ess the Menu / OK button. Th e Share All Image s icon appe ars b esid e the sele cted desti nat ion , and a appe ars ov er the dest in ation. T o dese lect the des ti nat ion , pr ess the Me n u /O K bu t ton ag ai n. 5 R epe at step 4 to sel ec t any addit ional HP I n stant Sh ar e de stina tions f or all o f t he imag es in in ter nal mem ory or on an optional m emor y ca r d. 6 W hen y o u ar e f inis hed se lec tin g all of th e HP In sta nt S har e desti nat ion s for yo u r i mages, se lec t EXI T to r et u rn to t he HP I nstan t Sha r e Menu .
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 93 7 Pr es s the HP In stan t Shar e butt o n again to e xit the HP I nstan t Sha r e Menu . 8 Connect the cam er a to your compu ter and tr ans fer t he ima ges as e x plain ed in T r a nsferr ing I mages to a Computer on page 9 7. Once the ima ges are tr an sfer r e d to yo u r com pu ter , the y w ill be sent au tom ati call y to the HP I nst ant Shar e de stin atio ns . Mac int osh u ser s wi ll ne ed t o ad d addressi ng information for thei r HP Ins tan t Sh ar e desti nation s bef ore the i mages a nd mess ages ca n be sent . Sel ec tin g In dividua l I ma g es for HP Ins tan t Sh are D estin a tions NO TE Y ou can select each stil l im ag e f or an y nu mber of HP In stan t Shar e dest inat ion s. How ev er , you ca nn ot selec t v ideo c lip s f or an y HP In stan t Sh ar e desti nat ions, and imag es withi n a p anoramic sequenc e selec ted for HP I nstan t Sha r e dest inat ion s will b e sen t as ind iv idual ima g es . 1 T u rn on the cam er a , and t hen pr es s the HP Inst ant S har e button. 2 U se the buttons t o scr oll to the de stinati on in the HP I nstan t Sha r e Menu t ha t y ou w an t to se lect , su ch a s an e-mail destina tio n . 3 U se the butto ns to s cr oll to a s till imag e f or wh i ch y ou want to sele ct th is HP I nst ant Sh are destina tion. 4 Pr es s the Me n u/ O K b utto n t o sele ct the destin ati on , and a appe ars o ver that desti nation in the HP Inst an t Shar e Men u . T o desel ect the dest inat ion, pr ess the Men u /OK button ag ain. 5 R epe at steps 3 an d 4 to sele ct any other HP In stan t Sh ar e de stinati ons f or t his image .
9 4 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 6 S cr oll to ot her image s b y usin g t he b utt ons , an d r epea t steps 3 thr ough 5 to s ele ct HP Inst ant Shar e des tinat ion s fo r each of the other images. Y o u c an al so use t he b uttons to scroll to othe r i mag es to r evie w their d est in atio ns. 7 W hen y o u ar e f inis hed se lec tin g all of th e HP In sta nt S har e desti nation s for y our imag es, pr e ss the HP I nst ant Shar e button ag ain to ex i t t he HP I nst ant S hare Menu . 8 Connect the cam er a to your compu ter and tr ans fer t he ima ges as e x plain ed in T r a nsferr ing I mages to a Computer on page 9 7. Once the ima ges are tr an sfer r e d to yo u r com pu ter , the y w ill be a ut oma tica lly s ent to th ei r r es pe c ti ve HP I nstan t Sha r e des tina ti ons . Mac into sh u se rs w ill ne ed t o add add ressin g in formation for their HP Inst an t Shar e desti nation s bef ore the i mages a nd mess ages ca n be sent . Ho w HP In stant S har e E- ma il s I ma ge s Th e wa y images a r e e -maile d vi a HP I nst ant Sh are work s mu c h t he sa me o n W ind o w s and Mac in t osh comp ut er s . Images ar e not e - mail ed a s att achments. Rather , a mess age i s se nt to eac h e-ma il ad dr es s t hat y ou sel ect ed in the HP Ins tan t Shar e Men u . T h e mess age co ntain s thu mb nai l images of th e pi ct u r es you sele cte d f or th a t address, as well as a lin k to a w eb page wher e the r ec i pien t ca n v iew t he image s. F rom t hat w eb pag e, th e r e c ip ie nt ca n do things lik e r epl y t o y ou , pr int the i ma ges, s av e imag es to th eir co mputer , f or war d images, and mor e. T hi s makes it easy fo r people who us e dif fer ent e-ma il progr am s to be able to see your i mages without the dif fi cult y of dea l ing with e-ma il at tach ment s .
Chap ter 4: Us ing H P In sta nt Sha r e 95 On Wi ndo ws, the p r ocess o f e -mailing imag es v ia HP I n s tan t Shar e i s fully automated : on ce you have selec ted y our de st inati ons , mess age s w ill be sen t t o ea ch of y our r ec ipi en ts and the i mages will b e p osted on the web page when you transfer the i mages fr om the c am er a to the computer . On Mac into sh , th e pr oce ss of e -mailing images is n ot autom at ic. Af ter i ma ge s m a rk e d with HP I n stant Sh ar e desti nation s a r e t r an sferr ed to your M ac i ntosh , the y wil l be dis play ed in the HP I nstan t Sh ar e appl icati on . Simpl y f ollo w the instr uc tions in the HP Instan t Shar e appl icat ion to sen d your me ssa ges and p os t y our imag es on th e w eb page .
96 H P P h o t o s m a r t R 5 07 / R 6 07 U s e r â s M a n u a l
Cha pte r 5: T r ansfer r ing and Pr intin g Images 9 7 C hapter 5: T ransf e rring an d P r i nt i ng I mage s T ransferring Im a g es to a Co mput er NO TE Y ou c an al so us e the optional H P Photosmart R -ser ies dock to do th is task. See the do ck Userâs M anual f or instr ucti ons. 1 Conf irm th e follo wing: ⢠T he H P Im age Z one so ft w ar e is ins t alled o n yo ur computer (s ee Ins tal ling th e Sof t w a r e on page 19 ) . T o transfer images to a computer that do es not hav e the H P Im age Z o n e so ftw ar e in sta lled o n it , se e Us i ng Y ou r Ca mer a wit hout Ins talling the HP Imag e Zo ne Sof t w ar e on page 11 3. ⢠If yo u are using a Mac intosh computer , the camer aâs USB Con figu ration is s et to Dis k Dr iv e in th e Setup Me n u (see USB Co nfig uratio n on p age 106 .) ⢠If im ages on the c amer a ar e sel ected for pr inting or sele cted fo r HP I nstan t Shar e dest inat ions, ma k e s ure the comp uter is c onn e cted to a printer and / or the i nternet . 2 Tu r n o f f t h e c a m e r a .
98 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anual 3 Y our camer a cam e with a special US B c able for connecting t he came r a to a com pu ter . C on n ect th e lar ge r end of th at USB cable to th e com pute r . 4 Ope n the r ubb er door on t he si de of t he came r a an d connect the sma ll end of the U SB c ab le to t he U SB co nn ec tor on the ca m era . NO TE If y our comput er is r unning Windo ws XP , w hen yo u turn on the ca mer a i n the ne xt s tep , a dialog bo x wil l dis play tha t reques ts you to Sele ct the pr og r a m to launch for t h i s a ct i on . Si mply click Canc el to close thi s dia lo g box . 5 T u rn on the cam er a. The HP Image T rans f er soft w a r e will launch on y our computer . If y ou hav e set the so f t war e to aut om atical ly tr an sfer the ima ges in the ca mer a, the images w ill a uto mati call y tr ansf er t o th e compu ter . Othe r w ise , in the We l c o m e scr een, c l ic k St art T r ansf er . The imag es ar e tr ansf er r ed t o t he co mp ut er , an d t hen if th er e ar e an y st ill imag es that wer e pr ev iously selec ted for printin g (p age 7 2 ) or selected f or HP Inst an t Shar e de sti nat ions (page 8 5 ) , those actions ar e start ed. NO TE If th e image s be ing tr ansf e rr ed to y our comp ut er include a p anor a mic sequence of ima ges (see Us i ng Pa n o r a m a M o d e on page 48) , the ArcSo f t P anorama Ma k er soft war e start s automatica lly . F ol lo w th e instr uc tio ns on the sc r een t o stit ch t he ima ges in the pan or am ic sequen ce to geth er as a sin gle p ano r am ic image on your comput er .
Cha pte r 5: T r ansfer r ing and Pr intin g Images 99 6 When the tr a nsfer scr een on the c ompute r say s Fi n i s h e d or T r an sfer Complete , y ou can disconne ct the camer a fr o m the com pute r . Pr i nti ng P ano ra mas When a set of im ages ma r ked as a p anoramic sequenc e i s transfer red to y ou r computer w i th HP I mag e T rans fer , t he A r cSo ft P ano r ama Mak er a ppli cati on t hat w as inst alle d wit h the HP I mag e Z on e soft w a r e on y our computer aut o matically sti tches the i mages to gether to for m a si ngle p anor am ic imag e . T his pa nor ami c imag e can the n be pr inted f r om P an or ama Ma k er or f r om HP I mag e Z o ne . Printin g P anorama s from Pa n o r a m a M a ke r T o p r i n t a p a n o ra m i c i m a g e fro m P a n o ra m a M a ke r: 1 S tart t he Ar cSoft P ano r ama M ak er a ppli catio n inst alle d on y our computer . 2 Click Open , and br owse to the p anoramic i mage f ile on y our computer â s ha r d d is k. NO TE T he pano r a mic im age f ile nam e is th e sam e as the na me o f t he la st i mage in t he p ano r ami c s equ en ce , w ith â -P â adde d to t he file n am e . 3 Click Pr int , se lec t a p r inte r , a nd sp ec ify t he desir ed f or ma t f or pr inting the ima ge .
100 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Printin g P anoram a s from HP Im a ge Z on e T o pr in t a pan or ami c ima ge f r om HP I mag e Z on e : 1 Sta rt th e HP Imag e Z one app lication on y our compute r . 2 In the My I mag es tab, sel ect th e pa no r am i c i ma ge , an d do one of the f ollo wing: ⢠Select Pr int , and the n sele ct Quic k Pr ints . Cli c k Fi t To Pa g e , and cli ck Pr int . ⢠Select Pr i nt , and t he n s elec t Ph ot o Pr in ts . In the Advanced se ction, spe cif y th e Cust o m S iz e dimens ions tha t will pr o d uce the des ired outp ut (use the Pr ev ie w bu tton to con firm) , and cl ick Pr int . ⢠Select the Ed i t t ab, se le c t Pr in t , an d t hen se lec t Cu rre n t Image . Click Fi t T o P a g e , and cli c k Pr int . Printin g Im a g es Direc tly fr o m the Camer a NO TE Y ou c an al so us e the optional H P Phot osm ar t R -seri es dock to do th is task. See the do ck Userâs M anual f or instr ucti ons. Y ou can connect t he came r a dir ectl y t o an y HP Pho tosmart pr inter or P ict Br idge -c ompati ble printer to pr i nt ima ges. Y ou can then pr int e ith er all ima ges in t he camer a, o r ju st tho se imag es y ou hav e selected usin g t he Pr int button on the camer a (s e e Se l ecting Images f or P r inting on page 7 2) . NO TE HP does not pr ov id e supp ort for printer s fr om oth er manuf acturer s. If yo ur non- HP pr inter w ill not pr int , c ont act th e m anu fact u r e r of yo ur print e r .
Cha pte r 5: T r ansfer r ing and Pr intin g Images 101 NO TE Pr inting onl y w or ks w i th still im ages ; it doe s no t w or k w ith v id eo c lips . Also , images w ith in a pano r a mi c seq uence ca n be pr inte d indi vi du all y dir ect ly f r om the cam er a , but yo u ca nnot pr i nt an entire pa nor ama fr om t he ca mer a . T o p r in t a pa nor ama , see Pr inting P anor amas on page 99. 1 Ch eck that the pr inte r is tur ned o n . T her e shoul d be no bli nki ng lig hts on th e printer or err or m ess ages di splay e d about the printer . Load pap er into the printer , if ne eded. 2 Conne ct y our camer a t o the pr int er . ⢠If you ar e printin g d i r ectly to an HP printer that does not disp la y th e P ic tBr id ge logo (see below) , use the special US B c able for connecting the came r a direct ly to an H P pr in ter . Connect t he squar e end of that USB cable to the HP printer . ⢠If you are c on n ec ti n g the ca m era to a printer dis play i ng the P ic t Bri d ge lo go (se e r ight ) fr om HP or another manufactur er , do the fol l ow i n g : a. M a ke s u re yo u r c a m e ra i s s e t t o t h e Digita l Came r a USB Conf igur ati on s etting (s ee US B C on figu r a t io n on page 1 06) . b . U sin g t he U SB cab le t ha t y ou w ou ld no rm all y co nnec t bet w een the cam er a and the computer , connec t the larger , fl a t end of the USB c able to the co r r es ponding connect or on t he P ictb r id ge pr in ter .
102 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 3 Ope n the ru bb er door on the side of the c amera and co nn ec t th e s ma ll en d of th e USB cable to th e USB c on ne ct or on the camer a. 4 Whe n the ca mer a is co nnected t o the printer , a Prin t Setup me nu di spl a y s on t he cam er a . If y ou already sel ecte d im ages to pr in t us i n g t h e c am e ra Pr in t button , the numb er of images sele cted i s sh ow n. Othe r w ise , Ima ges: AL L is dis play ed. T o select or change t he sele ctions of im ages to pr i nt , pr ess the Pr int b u t t o n , s c ro l l t h ro u g h t h e i m a g e s u s i n g the bu tt on s, then use th e bu t to ns to ad just the number of copies for each i mag e . Wh en sa ti sfied with y ou r select ion s , pr ess the Pr int but to n ag a in to retu rn to the Pr int Setu p menu . 5 If al l the set t in gs in the P r in t Setup men u l oo k cor r ec t , pr es s Men u/OK on th e camer a t o begin pr inting . Or , y ou can ch ange se ttings in the Pr int S etu p m e n u u s i n g t he a rro w key s on the ca me r a, then f ol low i nst ruct io ns on the scr e en to beg i n printi ng . NO TE T her e is a pr int p r ev ie w in th e lo we r r ig ht-han d co rne r of t h e Pr int Setu p scr een show in g the page la yout th at w il l be used for pr i nti ng i mages. This print pr evie w up dates as y o u cha ng e th e set t i ngs for the Pr int Si z e an d P aper S i z e .
Chapter 6: Usi ng the Setup M enu 103 C hapter 6 : U sing the Setup Menu The Setup Menu all o w s y ou t o a dju st a n umbe r o f cam er a se ttings , suc h a s th e camer a so unds , dat e and time , an d the co nfigu ration of th e USB or T V c onn e ct ion. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Setup Men u , f ir st dis pl a y an y o the r me nu (s ee Came r a M enus on pag e 2 7) and then u se the bu tton s to move to th e me nu tab for the Se tu p Men u . 2 U se the buttons t o scr oll thr o ugh the Se tu p Men u options. 3 E i ther pr ess the Me n u/ OK but ton to select a hig hlig hted op tio n and disp la y its su b-men u , or use the buttons to change t h e se tting for the hig h lighted o ption without go in g to its sub-menu . 4 W i thi n a s ub- menu , use the bu t tons and then the Men u/OK but ton to chan ge the set t i ng for th e Setup Me n u option . 5 To e x i t t h e Setup M enu , highli ght the EXIT opt ion and pr ess the Me n u /O K bu t ton. Sc r e en 1 : Scr een 2:
104 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Camer a So und s Ca mer a s oun ds ar e the so unds that the camer a m ak es w h en y ou tur n it on , pr es s a bu t t on , or t ak e a pi c tur e. C amer a so unds ar e not the audio sou nds r e co r de d wit h im ages or video cl ips. The defau l t Ca mer a Soun ds set ti ng is High . 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103) , sele ct Camera Sound s . 2 In the Cam er a Sounds sub-m enu , high light th e volume lev el you prefer . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to save th e se t ti n g a n d re t u rn t o t h e Setup Me n u . T he ne w setting r emains in ef fec t until it is c ha nged again , e v en whe n y ou tur n th e came r a off . Liv e Vie w a t P o w er O n T his s et ting al lo w s y ou t o ha ve the camer a a uto mati call y dis play Live Vi ew e ve r y time y ou tur n the cam er a on , or to hav e t he Im a ge D isp la y tur ned o ff e v e ry time . NO TE Sett ing L i ve V ie w at P o w er On to Off can sa v e batte ry pow er . 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103), sele ct Live Vi ew S e t u p . 2 In the L i v e V ie w at P o w er On su b-me n u , h ighli g ht Live V iew On or Li ve Vi e w O f f . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Setu p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen yo u turn the camer a off .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup M enu 105 D ate & Ti m e T his s etting allo w s y ou t o s et th e date/ time for mat, a s well as the current date and tim e for the camera. This is usually done when you f ir st set u p the camera; however, you m ay ne ed t o re-set the date and time when you ar e tr avel ling to di ffer ent time zones, or if the date and time is incorr ect. NO TE The date/ ti m e f ormat chosen w i l l be u s ed to d i splay the date i nformation in Pl ay b a ck . A lso , th is f or mat c hos en in th is settin g is wha t is u s e d in t he da te & tim e im pr int fea t u re ( s e e Date & T i me I mp r int on page 6 7 ) . 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103) , sele ct Dat e & T ime . 2 In the Date & T ime su b- men u , adju s t the v a lue of the hi g hl ighted sele ction by u s i ng th e buttons. 3 Press the b ut ton s to m o ve to the o the r s elec t ion s. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 unti l th e corr ect date/ ti me for mat , date, and t ime are set . 5 Pr ess Men u/OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn to t he Set u p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen you turn the camera off .
106 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual USB Confi guration T his s et ting de termin es h ow t h e camera is recognized when connected to a computer. 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103), sele ct US B . 2 In the US B C onfigu ration sub-m enu , hig hlight one of thes e tw o c ho i ce s : ⢠Digital Camer a âCau ses t he computer to recogn ize the camera as a digital camera using the Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) standard. This is the default setting on the camera. ⢠Disk Dri v e â Causes the compu ter to recogn ize the camera as a disk drive using the Mass Storage Device Class (MSDC) standard. Use this setting to transfer im ages to a computer that does not have the HP Image Zone software installed on it (see Transferring Images to a Computer without HP Ima ge Zone Soft ware on page 11 4). This s etting may not w ork with a Windows 98 computer that doe s not have the HP Image Zone software in stalled on it. 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Set u p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen yo u turn the camer a off .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup M enu 10 7 T V C onfi gura tion Thi s set ti ng a llow s y o u to set th e f ormat of the video s igna l for dis play i ng camera images on a tel e vis ion (T V) that i s connecte d to the camera w ith an opt ional HP Phot osma rt R - s e ri e s c a m e ra d o ck . The def ault T V Co nfig urat ion set ti ng de pend s on the lang uage that y ou selected when y ou t urned on the ca mer a for th e f irst time . 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103), sele ct T V Con figurat ion . 2 In the T V Con figu r at ion sub-m enu , hig hligh t one of thes e t w o choi ces: ⢠NT S C âF orm at u sed p r imar il y in Nor th Amer ica an d Japa n ⢠PA L âF or m at used pr imar il y in Eu r o p e 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to sa ve the s etting and r etu rn t o t he Set u p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen you turn the camera off . F or mor e inf or mati on on conne cting the cam e r a to a T V , see th e Us erâ s M an u a l fo r th e HP P h o tos ma r t R - se rie s c a m era d o ck.
108 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual La n g u a g e T his s etting allo ws yo u t o se t the language used in t h e ca m era interface, su ch as the text in m enus. 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103), sele ct . 2 In the La ng uage sub -menu , high light the l ang uage you w a nt to us e . 3 Pr es s Menu /OK to s ave the se tting and r etur n t o th e Setu p Men u . T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect until it is cha nged again , ev en w hen yo u turn the camer a off . Mo v e Im a g es to C ard The M o ve Ima ges to Ca r d option is av ailab le in the Set u p Men u if an optio nal memory ca r d is ins talled in t he c ame r a an d the inte r nal me mo ry co ntain s at leas t one image . In the Se tu p Menu (page 103) , if y ou pr ess Menu /OK when the M o ve Im ages to Car d option is highl ight ed and ther e is r oom on t he mem ory c ar d , a co nf irm ati on scr een ap pear s e xpl ai nin g t hat ther e i s enough r oom to mo ve all i nter n al files t o t he me mo ry car d . If onl y some of the im ag es w ill f it , th en a confir mat ion scr een app ears e x plai ning ho w man y images in inter na l me mory ca n be mo ved to the memor y c ard . I f no imag es c an b e mov e d to t he memor y ca r d, then t he scr een dis play s CARD FULL . Dur ing the m o v e , a pr ogr ess bar is sho wn . All of t he imag es t hat ar e s uccess f ully mo v ed to th e memo ry car d ar e then deleted fr om the c amera's i nter na l memor y . Onc e the mov e is co mplete, y o u return to the Setup Menu .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup M enu 109 Re s e t S e t t i n g s T his opti on all ow s y ou to r es et the cam er a to the f act ory def ault sett in gs. 1 In the Se tu p Menu (page 103) , sele ct R es et Se t tings ... . 2 In the Re s e t A ll S e t t i n gs ? s ub-menu , high light one of these tw o c ho i ce s : ⢠Cance l â Exit s th e me nu with ou t r ese t t in g any of the sett in gs. ⢠Ye s â R es ets all cam er a se ttings t o the ir de f ault v alu e in the Captu re Menu and Setup M en u (e x cep t Date & Tim e , Lang uag e , T V Con figu r at ion , a nd USB Confi gu r ation ). 3 Pr es s Menu /OK t o re s e t s e t t i n gs a n d re t u rn t o t h e Setup Men u .
110 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 111 C hapter 7 : T rou b l esh o otin g and Suppo r t This chapter conta ins information on the f o llow i ng topics : z R ese tting the cam er a (page 112) z Us in g th e c a mera with out in stal l i ng th e H P Im ag e Z o ne so f t war e (p age 113) z P ossib le pr oble ms, causes, an d solu tions (page 1 19) z E rro r m e s s a g e s on t he c a m e ra ( p a g e 1 3 0 ) z Er ror messages on the computer (page 140 ) z Self-di agnostic tests on th e camer a (page 143) z How t o get as sistance fr om HP ( page 143) NO TE F or mor e in for mat ion ab out sol utions to problems me nti on ed he r e , as w el l as an y o the r issue s y ou mi g ht ha ve w it h y ou ca mer a o r the HP Im age Z one s of t w ar e , see the HP Cust om er Support website: ww w . h p . c o m /s u p p o r t
112 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual R e s ett i ng the Ca me r a I f y o u r c a m e ra d o e s n o t re s p o n d whe n y ou p r e ss an y bu t to ns , try r e se tting the camer a a s f oll o ws: 1 Ho lding th e camer a u psi de do wn w ith the fr on t o f the c a m e ra fa c i n g y o u, o p e n t h e B a t t e r y / M e m o r y c a rd d o o r o n the b ottom of the cam er a. 2 If yo u ha ve an o pti on al mem ory ca r d ins tall ed , r em ov e it . ( Although r emov ing an optional m emory ca r d is not necess ary fo r perf orming the r eset , it e liminates the me mory card as a pos si ble cause of the pr oblem.) 3 Remo ve th e bat ter y fr om the ca me r a, a nd ma ke su r e the HP A C po wer a dapter i s n ot c onn ecte d to t he cam era . 4 The Reset sw i tch i s the sma ll hol e loca ted a bo v e the bat ter y sl ot , as s ho wn. Pr ess the straightened end of a pap er cl ip i nto t he R ese t sw it ch un til the sw itch is d epr esse d, and hold it dow n for appr ox i mately f iv e secon ds, th en remo v e t he pape r clip . The came r a is n ow r es et . 5 R e inse r t the batt ery an d th e opti onal mem ory car d (if y ou ha ve one) and close the Battery /M emor y card do or . Y ou may now use t he c am e ra aga i n.
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 113 Usi n g Y our C am er a wit hou t In st all ing the H P I m age Z one Soft w are I f you d o no t, o r c a n n ot, i n s t a l l t h e H P I m a g e Zon e so f t ware o n y our computer f or some reason (such as ther e is not enough R AM in y our computer , or y our computer is not r un ning a supporte d operating sy stem) , y ou can sti l l us e y our c amera to take pictur es and v ideo cl i ps. How e ver , some of the th ings you ca n do w it h th e came r a w ill be a ff ect ed: z The HP In stant Sha r e f e ature dep ends on the HP Ima ge Zone so ft w ar e , so if the so ft w ar e is not in stal led on y o ur com put er , y ou w ill no t be ab le t o us e the HP I nstan t Sha r e f eatu r e o n t he ca mer a . z The Pa n o r a m a shoo ting m o de on the ca mer a u s es the A r cSo f t P anor ama Mak er comp onent of the HP I ma ge Zone soft w a re to automa tic a lly st itch im ages tog eth er i n th e computer . Ther efo r e, if the soft war e i s not insta lled on y our computer , images tak en in Pa n o r a m a mo de w ill no t be autom atic al ly st itch e d into a pa n orama whe n you tr a n sfer the ima ges to y our computer . H o we v er , y ou c an stil l use Pa n o r a m a mode i n t he c am er a to ta k e se que nc es of pictu res t hat y ou w an t to mak e int o a pan or ami c ima ge la te r . Y ou w ill sim ply nee d to u se so me o ther kind of image stit c hing soft w a re to cr e ate the p anoram a on your com puter . z Images y ou hav e ma r ked fo r pr i nting using the Pr in t button on t he cam er a w ill not a uto mati call y pr in t ou t whe n the cam e r a i s co nn ec ted to the c omput er . How ever , thi s featu re w ill s till w or k in the f ollo wing scena r io s: ⢠When you co nn e ct th e ca mera di r e ct ly to a printer .
114 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual ⢠If y our pr inte r has a mem ory car d slo t in it , and if y ou ar e u sing a memo ry car d in y our camer a , y ou can simpl y re m ove t h e m e m o r y c a rd f ro m t h e c a m e ra a n d i n s e r t i t i n the me mor y ca r d slo t i n th e printer . z T he p r oces s f or t r ansf er r ing im age s an d v i deo c lips f r om the cam er a to your computer w i ll be di ffer ent , si nce nor ma lly t he HP Im age Z one so ft w ar e hand les this ta sk . See th e fol l ow i n g se ct i o n fo r d et a i l s. T rans f erri n g Ima ges to a Com pu ter with ou t HP Ima g e Zone Sof t w a re NO TE If y ou hav e a W indo ws Me, 2000, or XP s y stem , y ou do not need to r ead t his s ecti on . Simp l y con nect t he ca m era to your co mput er with the US B cab le , an d the oper a ting s yst em will launch a progr am t o help you transfer i ma ges. If you do not , or ca nnot , in stal l HP Image Z one on yo u r computer , t her e are t wo w a ys to tr an sfer images fr om y our camer a to the com puter : using a memory car d r e ad er , or con figuring the ca mer a as a d isk driv e. Usi n g a Memor y Card Reader If you ar e using a memory ca r d in y our camera , yo u c an sim ply r emo v e it fr om th e camer a an d put it in a memo ry car d re a d e r ( p u rc h a s e d s e p a ra t e l y ) . T h e m e m o r y c a rd re a d e r a c t s j u st lik e a f lopp y disk dr i v e or CD-R OM dr i v e . In ad ditio n , some c ompute rs and HP Photosmart p r inters ha ve memory car d slots buil t into them , a nd y ou c an use these memor y ca r d slots as you w ou ld use a regul ar m emor y card r eader to save imag es to th e computer .
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 115 T r an sfer r i ng Images to a Windo ws Computer 1 R emo ve the memor y c ar d fr om y our camer a and ins ert i t into th e memor y ca r d r e ader ( or the m emor y ca r d slot i n y our computer or pr inter ) . 2 R ig ht-cl ick o n th e My Computer icon on y our des ktop , then sele ct Explor e f r om t he men u . 3 A scr e en appe ars th at wil l sh o w a li s t of di sk driv es un der M y Comput er . T he me mo ry ca r d w ill s ho w u p as a r emo vable dis k d r i ve cal led either HP_ R50 7 or HP_R6 0 7 . Click on the sig n j us t to th e left of th e r emov abl e d isk. 4 T wo dir ector ies ( folder s ) should appea r u nder the remo vable dis k. Cl ick on the sig n next to the folder cal l ed DCIM , an d a s ubd i r e ct ory s hould app e ar . Wh en yo u c lick on the su bd ir ec to ry u nd er DCIM , the l ist o f y our im age s sh ould appea r on the ri g ht sid e of th e Ex plor er screen. 5 Se lec t all the im ages (in t he Ed it pull-d o w n men u cli c k on Select All ) , then c op y them (in the Ed i t menu click on Cop y ). 6 Click on t he Lo c a l D i s k unde r My Computer . Y o u ar e no w w or k ing in y our com put er's h ar d disk dr i ve . 7 Cr eate a ne w folder under Loc al Di s k (go t o the Fi l e pu ll - do w n men u an d cli c k on Ne w , then c lick on Fo l d e r . A f olde r called Ne w F olde r a ppear s in th e r igh t si de o f t he Expl or er scr een) . Whi le t he te x t of this new folder is highl ighted , y ou can t y pe in a ne w nam e (f or e x am ple , Pic t u re s ). T o c h a n g e th e name of the f older late r , y ou can simpl y r igh t-cl ic k on t he f ol de r nam e , ch oo se Ren a m e fr om t he menu that app ea rs , then t yp e i n the n ew na me. 8 Click on th e new f o lder you just cr e at ed, then g o to the Edit pu ll-do wn m en u and c lic k o n Pa s t e .
116 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 9 Th e ima ges that you copied i n step 5 s hould then get p asted i nt o t h i s n ew fo l de r o n yo u r c o m pu t e r ' s h a rd d rive. T o c h e ck to see i f the i mag es w ere succ essful l y t r a nsfer red fr om the memor y ca r d , click on the ne w f older . Y o u should se e the same lis t of f iles in that f o lder that y ou saw when you look ed at th em o n th e mem or y card ( step 4 ) . 10 Once yo u ha ve v er if ied th at t he im ag es w e r e su cce ssf ull y transfer r ed fr om the m emor y ca rd to y ou r c omputer , put the ca r d bac k in y ou r cam er a . T o f r ee u p spac e on th e car d , y ou ca n either delete the i mages or for mat the ca r d (under the Dele te o ption in the Pl a yb a c k menu in the cam er a) . T r an sfer r i ng Ima ges to a Macintosh Computer 1 R emov e the memor y car d fr o m your camera a nd i nser t it into the memor y ca r d r e ader (or the memor y car d slot in y our computer or pr inter ) . 2 De pen d in g on th e config uration a nd /o r versio n of the Ma c O S X o per atin g s y st em y ou ar e r unning , e ith er an applic ation c alle d Ima ge Capt ur e or one ca l led i Photo will launch au tom atically and guide y ou th r oug h the pr ocess of tr an sferr i ng ima ges fr om y our cam er a to your computer . ⢠If t he Ima ge Capture applic ation i s laun ched, cl ick on e ithe r the Do wn load S ome or Do wnl oad All bu t ton to transfer the im ages to y our c omputer . By def aul t , t he imag es will b e put in the Pi c t u r e s or Mo vi es fol d e r (depending on whi ch kind of f ile th ey a r e ) . ⢠If th e iP hoto appl icat ion i s launche d , click on the Imp ort button to tr an sfer the images to y our comput er . The imag es wil l be s tor ed in th e iP hoto appl icat ion it self, so to acc es s th em later , just sta rt up i P ho to .
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 117 ⢠If no ap plica tio n la unc hes au tom ati cally , loo k o n the desk top for a d isk driv e ico n which repr esent s the memor y ca r d , then c op y the i mages f r om ther e to y our loca l ha r d d r iv e. F or mor e i nfor mat ion about how to copy f iles , v i s it Mac h elp , t he help s y st em inc luded w it h y ou r com pute r . Config ur in g the C amera as a Disk D riv e This method set s up y ou r ca m er a to func tion as a di sk driv e w hen it is con nected to y ou r computer . NO TE This method may n ot wor k on Windo ws 9 8 computer s. 1 Set y our came r a to Dis k Dr i v e mo de (you on ly n ee d to do thi s ste p on ce ) : a. T urn the cam er a on, and then pr ess the Men u/OK bu tton to d isplay the Capt ur e Menu . b. Use th e b ut to n to naviga te to t he Setup M en u . c. Us e the but to n to h ig h lig ht th e USB menu opt ion , an d then pr ess Men u/OK . d. Us e th e butto n to sele ct Disk Dr i v e , and then press Men u/OK . e. U se the butt on t o hi ghl igh t EX IT , an d th en p r e ss Men u/OK . 2 Once y our came r a is s et to Disk Dr iv e mod e , connect the camer a to y our com pute r usin g the U S B ca ble .
118 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual 3 A t this poin t , the pr oces s fo r tr ansf err ing imag es is the same as described i n th e sect ion Us ing a Memor y Card R ead er on page 11 4. On W indow s computer s, the camera will appea r as a remo v able dis k in the W in do ws Ex plor er scr een. On M acint os h computers, either the I mage Captu r e or i Photo app lication will lau nch automat ica lly . 4 When y ou ha ve f ini shed tr an sfer r i ng images fr om the camer a to the com pute r , simp ly disco nnect the came r a f r om the c omputer . The ca mer a w i ll not t urn off a utomat i c al ly aft er the tr ansf er is com plet ed if the camer a is in Disk Dr i ve mo de . If y our com p ute r is r unnin g W in do w s 20 00 o r XP , y ou ma y ge t an âU nsaf e R em o v alâ w ar ning u pon disco nnecting t he cam er a . Y ou can d isr egar d this w ar ning. NO TE On Macintosh c omputers, if either Image Capture or iPho to do not l au nch a ut oma tical ly , l o ok on t he desk to p f or a disk dr i v e i con w ith the la bel HP_ R 50 7 or HP_ R60 7 . F or mor e in for mat ion about ho w to copy files, visit M ac help , the hel p s ystem included w ith your computer .
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 119 Proble ms an d So lu tions Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion Th e c a m e ra does not turn on . The battery is fu n ct i o n i n g incor r e ctl y , is dead , is install e d incor r e ctl y , or is missing . z T he char ge in the battery c ould be lo w or comple te ly dr ained . T r y i ns tall i ng a new or r echar ged ba t t ery . z Ensur e that the batte r y is in ser t ed co r r ec tl y (p age 1 4 ) . z Ens ur e that yo u a r e usin g the co r r ec t ty pe o f ba tte ry . F or b es t re s u l t s , u s e o n l y a re c h a rg e a b l e HP Phot osmar t R 0 7 lithium i on battery for HP Photo s mart R - s e ri e s c a m e ra s ( L 1 8 1 2 A) . If you ar e using th e H P A C pow er adapter , it is not connected t o th e ca m era , o r is not plugge d int o a pow er outlet . Ensu r e t hat the HP A C po we r adapter is connected to t he cam er a and is pl ugge d int o a w orking electri cal outlet . Th e H P A C pow er adapter is not fu n ct i o n i n g cor r ectl y . Ensu r e t hat the HP A C po we r adapter is not damage d or de f e cti v e and i s pl ugg ed i nt o a w orking electri cal outlet . Th e c a m e r a has st opped oper ating . Re s e t t h e c a m e ra ( s e e Re setting th e C a me ra on page 112) .
120 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Th e c a m e ra does not turn on (con tinu ed) . If you ar e using an opti onal memory ca r d, it may be c o rru p te d o r fu n ct i o n i n g impr operl y . R emo ve the memory car d and see if y ou can tur n on the camer a. I f you c an, th en th e prob lem is m o st likely with th e m emo r y ca rd . Eith er a t te m pt to forma t th e memory ca r d (see Fo r m a t (M e m or y/ C ard) on page 7 9) or r eplace the m emo r y car d. T he b attery gauge goes up and down fre q u e n t ly . Di ffer ent oper ating modes o f th e cam er a r equir e differ en t po wer lev e ls. See Battery G auge on page 156 f or a f ull e xpla nati on. I ha v e t o re c h a rg e t h e lithium io n battery fre q u e n t ly . Extend ed Image D ispla y use for Li v e View or vi deo re c o r d i n g, e x cess i ve f lash use, a nd e x cess i ve zo o m i n g consum e a lot of b a t ter y pow er . See Extending Battery L if e on page 15 2 . Th e li t h i um ion battery y ou ar e usi n g was r e char ged incor r e ctl y . A lithium ion battery is not f ully char ged when ne w . A bat tery that is ne w or has not been char ge d r e centl y mu st be r echar ged to re a c h f u l l c a p a ci t y ( s e e Ap pendix A: Managing Batte r ies on pag e 151) . Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 121 I ha v e t o re c h a rg e t h e lithium io n battery fre q u e n t ly (con tin ued). Th e li t h i um ion battery has dr ained on its ow n b e c a u s e it ha s not been use d l a tely . A lithium ion battery dischar ges on its o wn w hen not in use and wh en not inst alled in the cam er a. So , if yo u hav e not used it in t w o mont hs or mor e , it ma y b enef it f r om being c ha r ge d (see Appendi x A: Ma naging Bat t er ies on page 151). Th e l i t h iu m ion batte r y will not char ge. Battery is alr eady ch arge d. Battery char ging w ill no t start if the battery wa s r e centl y charged . T ry char ging it again af t er it has dr ained awhile . Th e wro ng A C pow er adapter is be ing used . U se on l y th e HP A C po w er adapter appr o ved f or use w ith th is c a m era ( se e Appendix B: P u r chasing C a mer a Accessori es on page 161). Battery voltage is too l o w fo r ch arg in g to start . Th e camera will not attem pt to char ge a bat te r y that may be damaged or o ver -dischar g ed. Rem ove th e b at ter y fr om th e cam er a and c h ar ge it in the HP Qui ck R ec ha r ge r fo r R -ser ies cam er as or the spar e bat tery char ging bay of the do ck (bot h pur chased separ atel y ) , then tr y it in th e camera again . If this does not work, it is likely t hat th e battery is bad. P u r chase a new lithium ion battery and tr y a gain . (Se e A pp endi x B: P ur chasing Camera A c cessor ies on pag e 161) Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion
122 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Th e l i t h iu m ion batte r y wi l l n o t char ge (con tinu ed) . The battery is damaged or bad. A li t h ium ion battery degr ades o ver tim e and can fail . If th e cam er a detects a pro blem w ith the bat te r y , it w il l not start ch argi n g or wil l sto p cha rgi n g pr ematu r ely . P ur cha se a ne w battery . (Se e Appe ndi x B: P u r chasing C a mer a Accessori es on page 161) Batte r y is not inser ted cor r ectl y . Ensure that t he battery is inserted co r r ectl y ( see page 14) . Th e c a m e ra does not re s p o n d when I pr ess a button. Th e c a m e r a i s tu rne d of f or has sh ut do wn . Tu r n o n t h e c a m e r a . Th e c a m e r a i s connected t o a comp uter . Most of the cam er a buttons do not r espond when the camera is connected t o a computer . If th ey r espond , it is only to turn the Image Displa y on if it is o ff , o r , in some cases, turn the I ma ge Displa y off if it is on. The battery is dr ained . R eplace or r echar ge the b attery . Th e c a m e r a has st opped oper ating . z If the A C adapt er is c onne cted to the ca mer a, disc onnect i t . Then r es et the ca mer a ( see R esetting th e Cam era on page 112) . z F orm at or re - forma t th e i nte rna l memo ry or t he opti onal memo r y car d (se e Fo r m a t ( M e m o r y / Car d ) on page 7 9) . Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 12 3 A lon g d elay occurs be tw een pr essing the Shutt er button an d th e camera taking a pict u r e. Th e c a m e r a needs time t o lock f o c us and exp os u r e. Use Focus Lo ck (se e page 38) . The scene i s dark and t he cam er a is ta ki n g a long exp os u r e. z Use the flash. z If u sing f las h is not poss ible , t hen us e a tr ipod to k e ep the camer a stea dy during the lo ng expos u r e time . Th e c a m e r a i s using a f lash setting w ith Red -eye Red uct io n. It w ill t ak e lon ger t o tak e a pi ctur e wi t h Red - eye Red uct io n . The shutte r is dela y e d becaus e of the additional flash . In turn , make sur e your subj ects wait f or the se c on d fla sh. Pr oblem P ossible cause Sol ut ion
12 4 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Th e c a m e ra does not take a p i ct ur e when I pr ess the Shutter button . Y ou di d no t pr ess the Shutter butt on har d enough . Pr ess the Shutt er bu t ton a ll the way do wn. Th e i nterna l memory or the optio na l memory ca r d that is installe d is f ull . T r a nsfer i m ages f r om the camer a to y our computer , t hen delete all images in inter n al memory o r on the memory c ar d . O r re place the car d with a ne w one . The op tional memory ca r d that is installe d is loc k ed. S wi tch th e lo ck i ng ta b on th e memory ca r d to the unloc ked position . Th e fl a s h i s re c h a r g i n g . W a it until t he f lash has r ec ha r ge d bef or e tak ing another pi ctur e . Th e c a m e r a i s set to Ma cr o or Super Macr o f oc u s an d can not tak e a p ictur e until it fi n d s f o c u s . z Re - focus th e ca m era ( tr y us in g F o cus L o ck ; see p age 38) . z Mak e sur e th e su b jec t o f t he pict u r e i s wi th i n t h e M a cro (close -up) r a nge (se e Usin g the F o c us Ran ge Settings on page 3 8) . Th e c a m e r a i s still sav ing the last p ictur e y ou took . W ait a f e w s eco nd s f or th e camer a to finish pr ocessing the las t image befor e taking a not her pictu r e. Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 2 5 My image is blurry . The lig ht i s low and the f lash is se t to Fl a s h O f f . In dim ligh t, the cam er a r equir es a longer e x posur e. U se a tripod to h old the camer a steady , impr ov e ligh ting conditions , or se t th e flas h to Fl a s h O n (s ee Setting the F lash on page 41). Th e c a m e r a w as set to the wr ong f o cu s setting f or the scene . Set th e camera t o Mac r o , Nor mal , o r Super M ac r o fo cus and try taking the p ictur e again (se e U sin g th e F oc u s R ang e Settings on page 38). Yo u m o v e d t h e cam er a while y ou took the pict u re. Hold the cam er a steady as yo u pr ess the Shutter b utton or u se a tripod . W atch f or the icon in the Image Displa y (this mea ns that it is al most impo ssible to hold steady , and you mu st use a tr ipod ). Th e c a m e r a fo cus e d o n th e wr ong thing , or w as unable to fo cus . z Make sur e the f ocu s br ack ets tur n gr e en bef or e taking the pictu re (se e Fo c u s i n g t h e Cam era on page 3 6). z Us e Fo c u s L o c k (s ee page 3 8 ) . z Us e fo cus s e a rch priori t y ( se e page 3 9). Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
12 6 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l My image is to o brig ht. Th e fl a s h pr ov ided too much l ig ht. z Tu r n t h e f l a s h o f f ( s e e Setting the Fl a s h on page 41). z Mo ve bac k f r om the sub jec t and us e the z oom to ge t the same fram i n g. A nat ur al or artifi c ial sour c e oth e r th a n t he fl as h p r ovid e d too much l ig ht. z T r y ta k in g th e pict u re from a differ ent ang le . z A vo id po inting the camer a d i re c t l y t ow a rd a b r i g h t l i g h t o r r ef l ecti v e sur f ace on a sunn y day . z Dec r ea se t he EV Com pen sati o n (see page 51) . The scene had man y dark obj ects, suc h as a black dog on a blac k couch . Decr e ase the EV Compensa tion (se e page 5 1) . Yo u u s e d EV Comp ensat ion when yo u should n ot ha ve . Set EV Comp ensation to 0 ( se e page 51 ) . Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 12 7 My image is too dark . There w as not enough light. z Wait for natural lighting conditions to improve. z Add indirect lighting . z Use the flash (see page 41) . z Adjus t the EV C ompens ati on (see page 51). z Us e Adapti v e L igh ting (se e page 6 2) . The f lash was on, bu t the subject w a s too fa r aw ay . Make su re y our subje ct is within the fl ash wo rking d ist ance . If so, try using the Fl a sh O f f setting (se e page 41) , whic h w ill r equire a lo nger ex po sure ( use a tr ipod ). A light is behind the subject. z Use the Fl a s h O n setting (see page 41) , or us e Adapti v e Lig h t i n g (s ee page 6 2) to brighten th e s ubject. z Incr eas e th e EV Compe nsati on (see page 51) . z Us e t h e Sp ot set t ing f or AE Met er ing (s ee page 60). The scene had man y ligh t- color ed objects, such as a whit e dog in sno w . Incr eas e th e EV Comp e ns at ion ( see page 51 ) . Th e wron g date and/ or time is show n . T he da t e an d/ or time w as set incor r e ctl y or th e t im e z o n e ha s changed . R eset t he date and tim e b y using th e Date & T ime option in the Setu p Men u (se e page 105) . Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
128 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Th e c a m e ra re s p o n d s v e r y sluggishly when trying to review images. A slo w op tional memory ca r d that is installe d or t oo man y images on the car d can af f e c t acti ons l ik e scr olling th roug h images , magnifyin g, deleting , etc. z R un the came ra s elf -diagnos tic tes t ( s e e Camer a Self -diagn osti c Te s t s o n p a ge 1 43 ) t o te st th e spe e d of y our memo ry car d. z Se e Storage on page 16 7 and Mem ory C ap ac ity on page 171 for t i ps abo ut m e mor y c a r d s. Th e c a m e ra has a rattling noise whe n I shak e it . Th ere i s an electr onic component t hat senses the or ient ation of th e ca m era when yo u ta ke pict u r e s. Th i s component uses a s mall ball inside a metal f i xtur e and w ill r attle when s haken . T his is nor mal. Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 2 9 Th e c a m e ra gets war m (or even h ot ) to the touc h . Yo u a r e u s i n g th e H P A C pow er adapter to p ower the camer a or to ch arge th e ba t te r y i n th e camer a, or y ou ha ve been usi n g th e camer a for a pr olonged per iod of tim e (15 min ut es or lon ge r ) . T his is nor mal. Ho we ver , if an ything seems o ut of t he or dina ry , turn off the camer a , unplug t he cam er a f r om the HP A C pow er adapter , and a llo w th e c am era to c o ol. Th e n exam i n e t he c amer a an d th e batt ery fo r signs o f possible damage . I ca nnot un load images fr om the camera to my c o m p u t e r . The HP Image Zo n e so f t wa re is not installe d on the comp uter . E ither insta ll the HP Image Zone soft war e (se e Installing the Soft ware on page 19) , or see Using Y our Camera w ithout In stalli ng the HP Ima ge Z one Soft ware on pag e 113. The computer is conf igur ed s uch that it is una ble to u n lo a d th e images . Set yo ur camera to Dis k D r i v e mod e (see Confi gu ring t he Ca m er a as a Disk Dr i ve on pag e 117) . I am h av ing a pr ob lem installing or us i ng th e H P Ima ge Z on e softwar e . R ef er to the H P C ustomer Support web s i te : w w w .hp .com /support Pr oblem P ossible cause So l ut ion
130 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Err or Mess a ges on t he C amera M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on BA T T E RY DEPLE TED . Ca mera is shutting down . Batt ery po wer is too l ow to contin ue oper ati on. Re pl ace or r e char ge the bat te ry , or u se t he HP A C po w er ada p te r . Battery is def e cti ve Batt ery is short ed or severely ove rd i s c h a rg e d. Pur cha se a new b a t ter y . (See Appe ndi x B: Pu rc h a s i n g C a m e ra Accessor ies on page 161). Battery can not be ch a rge d E ither an er ro r o c c u rre d d u ri n g char ging , an A C po wer disru ption o c c u rre d d u ri n g ch argi n g, th e wro ng AC p ower adapter is being used , battery is def ecti ve , or no battery is install e d in th e cam er a. R etry char ging the battery a couple of times. If that f a ils, pur chase a ne w bat t ery an d try ag ain . ( See Appendi x B: P ur chasing Ca mera Acc essori es on page 161).
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 131 Battery too low fo r Live View Batt ery po wer is too l ow t o use Li ve V i e w . Y ou can s till tak e p ictur es an d v id eo c li p s, j us t u se th e optical v ie w f inder instead o f t h e I m a g e D i s p l a y . I f y o u ar e u sin g Pa n o r a m a shooting mode w hen y ou r ecei v e this message , the cam er a ends the c u r r ent panor am ic s equenc e , sav e s the images, and tur ns off th e Ima ge Di spl a y . If y ou continue t o use Pa n o r a m a mode a fter the Image Displa y turns off , the camera s tarts a ne w panor amic sequence . T o use Live View , r eplace or r echar ge the b atte r y or use the optional A C adapter . UNSUP PORTED CARD The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d in the memory slot is not a supported memory ca r d. Ensur e that the memo ry car d is the pr op er t ype for you r c am e ra. (See Storag e on page 16 7.) CARD I S UNF ORMA TTED Pr ess OK to fo rm a t c a rd The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d n eeds t o be f ormatted . F or mat t he memory car d by fol lowi ng t he instr uctions on the Image Displ ay (o r r emov e t he car d f r om the cam er a if yo u do no t wan t it to b e f ormatted) . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
13 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l CARD HA S WR ON G FO R M A T Pr ess OK to fo rm a t c a rd The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d is form a t t ed fo r a differ ent dev ice , such as an MP3 pla y er . R e -for mat the memory car d by fol lowi ng t he instr uctions on the Image Display (r em ov e the car d fro m t h e c a m e ra if y ou d o not w ant it t o be r e- f ormatted) . Una ble t o F or mat The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d is c o rru p te d. Re pl ace the me mor y card , or i f yo u h av e a me mor y c a r d re a d e r , t r y fo rm a t t i ng the car d on your compu ter . See y our car d r eader docu m entati on fo r instr uctions . Th e c a rd i s lock ed. Please re m ove t h e c a r d fr o m yo u r camera . When tr y ing to conf i g ur e y our HP Instant Shar e men u , the op tional memory car d that i s install e d is locke d. S i m p ly re m o v e t h e c a rd f rom the cam er a and continue t he HP Inst ant Shar e tas k , or switch the lockin g tab on the memory car d to the unlock ed position bef o re continuing . CARD L OCKED The op tio n a l memory ca r d that is installe d is locke d. S w itch the loc king tab on the memory car d t o the un loc ked position . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 33 MEMO R Y FU LL or CAR D FU LL There is in s uf f icient roo m to save m ore images in int er nal me mory or on the op tional memory car d that is ins talled. T ransfer images fr om the camera t o y our computer , then dele te all images in inte rnal me mory or on the me mo ry c ar d ( s ee Delet e on page 7 9 ) . Or r eplace the car d w ith a ne w one . CARD I S UN R EADABLE The c am era i s havi ng troub le r e ading the op tional memory car d that is ins talled. The car d may be c o rru p te d o r a n unsupported ty p e . z T r y t u rn in g th e c a m era of f and t hen back on . z T ry r e -for matting the memory car d u sing the Fo rm a t ( M e m o r y / C a rd ) option in the Delet e sub- me n u o f t he Pla yback Me nu ( see Del ete on page 7 9 ). z E n su re th at th e m e mo r y car d is t he p r op er ty pe fo r yo u r c a m era ( se e Stor a ge on page 16 7) . If it is the pr oper type , try f orm attin g it . If it w ill not f orm at , it is pr obab ly cor r upt ed. R eplace the memory car d. PRO C ES SI N G... The c a me ra i s pr ocess ing data , such as sav ing the last p ictur e y ou took . W ai t a f e w se co nds f or th e cam e r a t o f ini sh p r oc es sin g be f or e t akin g an o th er pi ctur e or pr essing anot her button . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
134 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual CHAR GING FLA SH.. . The c am era i s re c h a r g i n g t h e fla s h . It take s longer to ch a r ge the f lash when t he battery is lo w . If y ou se e this m ess age a lot , y ou ma y need to r e place or recha rge th e b a t ter y . FO C US T O O F A R and blinking The f o cus distance is bey o nd where th e ca m era c an fo cus i n Mac r o or Su p er Macr o mode . z Set the camer a to Normal fo cus . z Move cl o ser to the su bj ect , w it hin th e ra ng e of Mac r o or Super Mac r o fo cus (s e e Usi ng the F ocus Range Settings on page 38). FO C US T O O CL O SE The f o cus distance is clo ser th an th e ca me ra can f ocu s in Ma c r o mode . Mov e f a rt her aw a y fr om th e su b jec t (w ithin th e r ange of Mac r o fo cus - see pag e 38 ) . Blinking The f o cus distance is clo ser th an th e ca me ra can f ocu s wit hout be ing in Mac r o or Su p er Macr o mode . Set the ca mer a to Mac r o fo cu s o r Super Ma c r o fo cu s (s e e page 38), o r mo ve f arther aw a y . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 13 5 UNAB LE T O FO C US The c am era cannot f ind f ocus in Ma c r o or Su p er Macr o mode , p ossibl y due to lo w contr a st . z Use F o cus Lo ck (s ee page 38). P oint at a part o f th e sc ene t hat is br ighte r . z Ma k e su r e the camera is wi th i n th e ra ng e o f Mac r o focus or Su per Ma c r o fo cu s (se e page 3 8 ). LOW L I G H T - UNAB LE T O FO C US T h e s cen e is t oo dar k and the camer a ca nnot focus. z Add an e xte rnal li ght source . z Use F o cus Lo ck (s ee page 38). P oint at a part o f th e sc ene t hat is br ighte r . Super Macr o - Una ble to Zoom Z oom is disabled for S up er Macr o mode . Super Macr o only ha s one lens position . z If you w ant to z oom, tak e the camer a out of Su per Mac r o mode . (cam er a shake wa rn i n g ) The lig ht is low and the image is likely t o b e bl u rry du e to th e lon g ex pos ure re q u i re d. Use the f lash (se e Setting the F lash on page 41), or use a t rip od. M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
136 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual ERROR S A VING IM A GE The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d was h al f-l o cked or was remove d bef or e the cam er a f inished w r iting to t he car d. z Ch ec k to see i f th e t ab on th e ed ge o f t he mem ory car d is full y in the unlock ed po sition . z Al ways wa i t u nt i l th e P o w e r/Mem ory li ght stop s blin k ing befor e re m o v i n g t h e c a rd f ro m the ca mer a. F -n um ber and shutte r spe ed tu r n re d in Live V ie w The c am era i s out of ra ng e for the se le ct ed ap e rt u re o r shutt er speed. Select a d iffer ent apertur e when usin g the Apert u r e Pr io ri t y A v shooting mode . Ca nnot displ a y image P ossibl y a n im a g e ta ke n wi th anothe r camer a or a c orrupt image f ile ca us ed b y t he camer a not shutting do wn prop er ly . z T he image ma y still be oka y . T ran sfer t he i mage to y our compu ter and try openin g it w ith t he HP Ima ge Z one s o ft w ar e . z Do not r emo ve the memory car d when t he cam er a is tur ned on . Ca mera has e xp er ienced a fa t a l e rror T he c amer a ma y have a f irmware probl em. T u rn the cam er a off and then on again . I f that do es not f i x t he pr oblem , tr y r esetting the camer a (see Res e t t i ng t h e C a m e ra on page 112). If the p r oblem p e rs i s t s, n o t e th e e rror code and then call H P Support (see G etting Assistance on page 144 ) . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 13 7 Unkno wn U SB de vi ce The c am era i s connected t o a USB de vice t hat it does not re c o g n iz e . M ak e sure th at the ca mer a is connected t o a support ed pr inter or computer . Una ble to commun i c at e w ith pr inter There is no connecti on bet ween the cam er a and pr inter . z Chec k that the pr int er is tur n ed on. z Ma k e su r e the cable i s con nected bet w een the pr in ter and t he camer a or the op tional HP Phot osmar t R -ser i es doc k. If that doe s not w or k, tur n off th e c amer a and disc onnect it . T urn the pr in ter off and th en on again . R e -conn e ct the camer a and tur n it on . Unsupported pr inter T he pr in ter is an unsupported de vi ce . Connec t the camer a to a supported p rin ter , such as an H P P hot osmart or Pic t B ri d g e - c o mp a t i b l e pr inte r . Or connect t he camera to a comput er a nd pr int f r om ther e instead . Photo tr ay is engaged. Disengage phot o tr ay or select smaller paper si z e. T h e se le ct ed paper s i ze cannot be used with the p rint er phot o tr a y . Dis en gag e th e pr in ter photo tr ay , or c hange th e pa pe r s i z e . Pr inter top co ve r is open T he pr in ter is open. Cl os e th e to p c over of t he pr inte r . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
138 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Inc orr e ct or missing print cartri d ge The print e r cartri dge is the incor r e ct mode l or is m issing . Install a ne w pr inter car tr idge , tur n the pr inte r off , then turn it back on . Pr inter has a paper jam or The pr int car r iage ha s stalled Th er e is a paper jam o r th e pri n te r c a rri a g e has sta l le d. T u r n off the pr inter . Completel y clear the paper jam , then turn the pr inter bac k on . Pr inter is out of paper T he pr int er is out of paper . Load paper int o the pr inte r , an d t he n p r es s t he OK or Con tinue button on the pr inte r . Selected pr int si z e is lar ger than selected paper si z e. Pr int si ze is too large for th e paper s i ze . Pr ess Menu/OK on the camera t o r etur n to the Pr int Setup scr e en and select a prin t s i ze that ma tc hes th e p ap er s i ze . O r select a larger paper si ze an d l oa d lar ge r pa pe r in to the pr inter . Se le ct ed pa per si z e is too bi g f or pr inter . Se l ec te d pa per si z e is lar ger th an th e max imum siz e supported in the prin ter . Pr ess Menu/OK on the camera t o r etur n to the Pr int Setup scr e en and select a paper si z e that fits the pr inter . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 39 Bor d er less pr inting is onl y supported on photo paper . Y o u tr ied to pr int a bor derless image on plain paper . Select a s mal ler pr in t si z e or mak e s ur e P aper T ype on the Pr int Setup scr ee n is set to Ph ot o (pr ess Me n u/ OK on th e ca me ra to r e tu rn to t he P r i nt S etu p scr een an d se t P a per T y pe to Photo ) . P ut ph oto paper in the pr inter . Bor d er less pr inting is n ot supported on t his pr inter . The print e r d o es not support bor d er less pr inting. Pr ess Men u/ OK on the camera t o r eturn to the Pr int Setup scr e en and select a sma ller pr int si ze . Pr inting canceled Th e prin t job has been c ancele d. Pr ess the Me nu /O K button on the ca mer a. C omplet e the pr int r e quest again . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
140 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Err or M essa g es on th e Com p u ter M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on Cannot C onnect To P r o d u c t The co mp ute r needs to access f iles in memory dur ing HP In st ant Shar e setup . But eith er the int er nal me mory is f ull , or if an op tional memory car d is install e d , th e c a rd i s ei th er fu l l o r lo cke d. If inte rnal memory or the optional memo r y c ar d is f ul l , tr an sf er the images to a co mp ut er (s ee T r ansf er r ing Ima ge s t o a Comp uter on page 9 7) an d th en de le t e t he images f r om the ca mer a to f ree- up space (see Dele te on page 7 9 ) . If the optional memo r y c ar d is lo cked, unlo ck it b y sw itching the loc k ing ta b on th e ca r d to the un loc ked position . The c am era i s tur ne d o ff . T u rn o n t h e c a m e ra. The c am era i s not workin g cor r e ctl y . T r y connecting the c a m e ra d i re c t ly to a n HP Phot osmart or Pic t B ri d g e - c o mp a t i b l e pr inte r , and pr int an image . This w ill v er ify th at the image , opti onal memo ry car d , USB co nnec ti on , an d th e US B ca bl e ar e f un cti onin g c o rre ct ly . The c abl e i s no t connected cor r e ctl y . M ak e su r e that the cable is f irml y connected to t he computer and ca mer a.
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 141 Cannot C onnect To P r o d u c t (con tinue d ) The ca mera is set to the Di gital Cam er a s etting in the USB Configur ation sub-menu of the Setu p Me nu , but the com puter cannot re cogni ze th e cam era as a digital ca mera. Chang e t he US B Configurati on set ting to Disk Dri v e in the Set u p Me nu . (Se e page 106.) Th is a l lows th e ca m e ra to appear as another disk dr iv e on the c omputer so that y ou ca n ea sily cop y the image f iles fr om the ca m era to th e c o mpu t er har d dr i ve . The c am era i s connected to t he comput er th rough a US B h u b , and y o ur USB hub i s no t compatible w ith th e ca m era . Connec t the camer a dir ec tl y t o a U SB po rt o n the comput er . Yo u a r e u s i n g th e H P Phot osmart R - ser ies dock and f or got to pr ess th e Sav e/Pr int button . Pr ess the Save/ P rint button on the doc k. M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
14 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Cannot C onnect To P r o d u c t (con tinue d ) The opt io n al memory ca r d that is installe d is locke d. S w itch th e lockin g tab on the memory car d t o the un loc ked position . The USB connection fa ile d. Reb oot the compute r. Cou ld N ot S end To S e r v i c e The co mp ute r i s not connected to th e In te rnet. M ak e su r e your compu ter is online . Communi c ati on Pr obl em Other HP In stant Shar e soft ware is r unning w ith e x clusi ve access to you r c am e ra. Close the other HP I nst an t Shar e pr ogram . M essage Po s s i b l e c a u s e Soluti on
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 143 Ca mera Self-diagn os tic T ests If you think your cam er a may be d efecti v e or mal func tioning in some wa y , there is a diagnostic pr og r am (a set of ele ven diff er en t tests ) tha t yo u can r un on the cam er a to try to de t er min e t he p r oble m . T he f oll o w ing ar e tes t ed o n the cam er a: flash , lig hts, butto ns, Live V iew , c olor on the Image Disp lay , A udi o P la yba ck , Rec o rd Au d io , optiona l memor y c ard , and inter na l memor y . NO TE T he te st is in English onl y . 1 Tu r n o f f t h e c a m e r a . 2 Hold down the Fl a s h bu tton on the b ack of t he cam er a. 3 T u rn o n t h e c a m e ra wh i l e c o n t i n u i n g t o ho l d d own th e Fl a s h bu tto n o n th e bac k o f the camer a . A blue s cr ee n titled CAM ER A S EL F - D IA GNOS TICS app ears on the Image Disp la y . R elea se the Fl a s h button once the scr een appea rs. 4 F ol low the si mple i nst ruction s o n the Im age Di sp la y to per for m th e s et of test s. So m e t est s will tel l you i f the c a mera passe d or fail ed , whi le oth er te sts will m ake the c am er a do somethi ng, and y ou must che c k to se e if the ca mera d id it cor r ectl y . If an y of th e tests f ail , no te wh ic h one(s) so that y ou can pr o v ide this inf or mati on wh en y ou conta ct HP Supp ort . The enti re set o f test s ta k es on ly a f ew m inu tes to c om plet e . 5 T o e xit th e diag nostic pr o gram at an y point , simply t urn off the c a me r a.
14 4 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Get tin g Assis tan ce This sec tion contains support inf orma tion for y our d ig i tal camer a , inc l u ding suppo rt we bsit e in f or matio n , an e xplan ati on of the support pr oc ess, and suppor t phone numbers . HP Acces sib ilit y W e bsite C us tom er s w ith disa b ilitie s can ge t hel p b y v isiting w ww .hp .com/hpinf o/community /accessibil it y/pr odserv HP Photos ma rt W ebsite Vi s i t w w w .photosmar t .h p .c om or w w w .hp .com /phot osma rt fo r the f ollo w ing infor m ati on: z Ti ps o n us i n g yo u r c a m era m o re ef fe c t ive l y a n d c r e a t iv e ly z HP dig ital came r a dr iv er u pda te s and so ftwa r e z Reg i st e r you r pro d uc t z Subscribe to n e wsl etters, dri ver and soft war e up dates, an d suppor t al ert s Su ppor t Process T he H P su ppo rt pr oces s w or ks m ost eff ecti v el y if y ou pe rf o r m th e fo llo win g st eps in t he o r der s pec if ied: 1 R e vie w the t r oubles hooti ng se ction o f this Userâs M anual (se e P r oble ms an d Solut ions on page 1 19) . 2 A c ces s the HP Customer Suppor t Center website for supp ort . If you h ave acc es s to th e I ntern et, yo u ca n obta i n a wide r ange of information about your digi tal c amera . Visit the HP w ebs ite f or product he lp , dri ver s, a nd soft ware u p dates at www . hp .c o m/ su p po rt
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 14 5 Cu stomer Supp ort is av ai lable in t he follo wing la nguag es : Du tc h , E nglish , F r en ch , Ger man , Ital ian , P or tugue se , Spanis h , S wedi sh, T raditional Chines e , Simpl ified Chi nese , Ja pane se , K or e an . (Danish , F innish , an d No r w egi an suppor t i nfor mat ion i s av ai lable in Eng li sh only .) 3 A cce ss HP e-su ppor t . I f y ou ha v e a cces s to the In te r net , con nect w ith HP v ia e-mail b y g oin g to : www .h p .c om / su ppo rt . Y o u w ill r ece i v e a per so nal r ep l y f r om an H P Cu st omer Supp ort techn ici a n. E - mai l s upport is av a i lable in the l ang uages l ist ed at th at website . 4 (US an d Can adian custom er s ski p t hi s step and go on to S te p 5 .) Con tac t yo ur local HP deal er . If y our di gita l camer a has a ha r dw a r e fail ure , ta k e it to your loc al HP de aler for a solution. S er v ice i s fr ee du r in g yo u r d igit al c amera âs li mit ed w arr ant y per io d. 5 Cont a ct the HP Cu stomer Support Center for support by phone . Please consul t the follo wing w ebs it e to c h eck the de tails and co nditi ons o f ph on e sup port in yo ur cou ntry/ re g i o n : www .h p .c om /s u p po r t . As a part of HPâs continuing e ff or ts t o im pr o v e ph on e su ppo rt i nfo rm ati o n se rv i ce s, w e adv is e you to check the HP websi te on a r eg ula r bas is f or ne w information regar d ing ser vice feat ur es and del i ver y . If y ou ca nnot solv e the pr oblem us i ng the abo ve options, ca ll HP whi le you ar e in fr ont of y ou r c o mputer a nd digi ta l cam era . F or faster s er vi ce, ple ase b e pr ep ar e d to p r ov id e the f ollo w ing infor m ati on: ⢠Th e digi tal ca mera âs mod el numb er (on the fr ont of the camer a) ⢠T he d i gital came r a âs s er i al n umber (o n the bo t t om o f t he camer a) ⢠The computerâs oper ati ng s ystem an d av a ilable R AM
146 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual ⢠Th e v ersion of the HP soft war e (on the CD label) ⢠Mes sag es d ispl a yed at the t im e th e s it uat ion oc curr ed The applicable c ondi tion s for HP phon e sup port a r e subject to ch ange w ith out no ti ce. T elepho ne supp ort is fr ee fr om the da te of pur chase f or t he per io d sp ecif ie d un less other wise note d. Phone Su ppor t in the U nited States Su ppo rt is a v aila ble bo th dur ing an d aft er th e w ar r an ty per io d . W it hin the per iod of yo u r wa rr ant y , telephone s upport i s pr ovi ded f ree of cha r ge. Ca ll (8 00) 4 7 4 -68 36. US phone s upport is av ai lable i n both Eng lis h a nd Span is h 2 4 h our s a da y , 7 d ay s a w ee k (da y s and hou r s of su ppo rt ma y ch ange w ith out no ti ce) . A ft er t he w ar r an t y per io d , call (800) 4 7 4 -6 8 3 6 . Ch ar ges ar e $3 0.0 0 p er iss ue , and a r e char ged t o y ou r c r e dit car d . If y ou thin k y our HP pr o duct need s ser v ice , cal l the HP C ustomer Su pport C en ter , w hi ch can hel p det er mine if se r v ice is re q u i re d . Lo cation s Phone S upport P eri od Af ri ca 30 da ys Asi a P ac if ic 1 y ear Can ada 1 year E ur ope 1 y ear Lat in Am er ica 1 year Midd le E ast 30 day s Uni ted States 1 yea r
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 14 7 Phone Su p por t in Eu r ope, th e Middle E ast, and A fric a HP Cu s tomer S uppor t phone numbers an d policies ma y c hang e. V isit t he f oll ow ing w eb site to c hec k the det ails an d conditi ons of ph o ne sup port in yo ur country /r egion: www . hp .c o m/ su p po rt Alger ia 21 3 61 5 6 4 5 43 Aus t ria 43 1 86 33 2 10 00 0810 - 001000 ( in-country ) Bahr ain 800 17 1 (in- country toll-f r ee) Belgium 0 7 0 300 005 (Dutch) 0 7 0 30 0 004 (F renc h) Cz e ch Republic 4 20 2 6 130 7 310 Denm ark 4 5 7 0 202 84 5 Egy p t 20 2 5 3 2 5 22 2 Fi n l a n d 35 8 ( 0)203 66 7 6 7 Fr a n c e 33 (0)8 92 6 9 60 2 2 (Eur o 0. 34/m inute) German y 4 9 (0)180 5 6 5 2 18 0 (E uro 0.12/minute) Gr eec e 30 210 60 7 3603 ( international n um ber ) 8 01 11 2 2 5 5 4 7 (in-cou n try) 800 9 2 64 9 (t ol l-f r ee f r om C y pr u s to A the ns) Hu ngar y 3 6 1 38 2 11 11 Ir eland 18 90 9 2 3 902 Israel 9 7 2 (0) 9 830 4848 Italy 848 800 8 71
148 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Luxem bo u rg 900 40 0 06 (F r enc h) 90 0 40 0 0 7 (G er man ) Mid dle E ast 9 71 4 3 66 20 20 ( int er na ti on al nu mbe r ) Mor occo 212 2 2 404 7 4 7 Net her lands 0900 2020 16 5 (Eur o 0.1 0/minute) Niger ia 2 34 1 3 204 999 Norw a y 4 7 815 6 2 0 7 0 Po l a n d 48 2 2 5 666 000 Po r t u g a l 8 08 201 4 92 Ro m a n i a 40 (21) 315 44 4 2 Ru s s i a n Fe d e ra t i o n 7 09 5 7 9 7 3 5 20 (Moscow) 7 812 34 6 7 99 7 ( St . P ete rsb ur g) Sa udi Ar ab ia 80 0 8 9 7 1444 (in -co un try t ol l-f r ee) Slov a kia 421 2 5 02 2 2 4 4 4 Sou th Af ri ca 086 0001030 ( R epublic o f Sout h Afr ica) 27 1 1 25893 0 1 ( i n t e r n a t i o n a l n u m b e r) S pain 90 2 010 05 9 S weden 46 (0) 77 120 4 7 6 5 Swi t ze rl a n d 0848 6 7 2 6 7 2 (Ger ma n , F r ench , Italianâ P ea k time 0. 08 C HF/ Outsi de peak 0. 04 CHF ) Tu n i s i a 216 71 8 9 12 2 2 Tu r k e y 90 2 16 5 7 9 71 71 Ukr aine 7 (380 44) 4 903 5 20 (Kie v ) Unit e d Ar ab E mir ates 800 45 20 ( in-country toll-fr e e )
Cha pt er 7 : T r oub lesh ooting an d Suppo rt 1 49 Un i te d Ki ng d om 4 4 (0)8 7 0 01 0 4 3 20 We s t A f r i c a 3 5 1 213 17 6 3 80 (F r ench-speaking c oun tr ie s onl y) O t he r Phon e S upp or t W orl dw i de HP Cu s tomer S uppor t phone numbers an d policies ma y c hang e. V isit t he f oll ow ing w eb site to c hec k the det ails an d conditi ons of ph o ne sup port in yo ur country /r egion: www . hp .c o m/ su p po rt . Ar gent in a (54)11 - 4 77 8- 8 380 or 0 - 810 -55 5- 5 5 20 Aus t ral ia 61 (3) 88 77 8 000 or lo cal ( 03) 88 77 8000 Br a zil 0 800 - 1 5- 77 51 or (11 )3 7 4 7 - 77 99 Canada 1-800 - 4 7 4 -68 36 (905- 206 - 466 3 fr om w ithin local Mississauga cal ling ar ea) Chile 800 -3 60 -999 China 86 (21) 3881 4 5 18 Colombia 01-80 0 -51- HP -IN VENT Costa Ri c a 0 -80 0 - 011- 4114 1 -800 - 711- 2884 Ecu a d o r 999-119 1-800 - 71 1- 2884 ( Andinatel) 1- 800 - 2 25-5 28 1-800 - 711 - 28 8 4 (P acif itel) Gu ate mal a 180 0 - 99 9- 5105 Hong K ong S A R 852 28 02 4 0 98 India 1 600 4 4 77 3 7 Indonesia 6 2 (21) 3 50 3408 Jamaica 1-80 0 - 7 112 884
150 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Japan 05 7 0 0 00 511 (i nside J apan) 81 3 3 3 35 9 800 (outside Ja p an ) K or ea , R e publ i c of 8 2 1588-3003 Mala ys ia 1 80 0 80 5 40 5 Me x i co 0 1 - 8 0 0 - 472- 6 6 8 4 o r ( 5 5 ) 52 5 8 - 9 9 2 2 Ne w Ze aland 64 (9) 35 6 6640 Pa n a m a 00 1-800 - 711 - 2884 Pe r u 0 -800 -10 111 Philippine s 63 (2) 86 7 35 51 Republica D om i nica na 1- 800 - 7 11- 2 884 Singapor e 65 6272 53 0 0 Ta i w a n 886 0 800 01 005 5 Tha i l an d 66 (0) 2 35 3 900 0 T r ini dad & T obag o 1-800 - 71 1- 2884 U nited S tat es 1 (8 00) 4 7 4 -6 8 3 6 Ve n e z u e l a 0- 80 0- 4 7 4 6- 8 3 6 8 Vie t n a m 8 4 (0) 8 8 2 3 4 5 3 0
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 15 1 Appe ndi x A : Managing B a t ter ies Y our camera uses a r e chargeable H P Photosmart R0 7 l ithiu m ion battery for HP Photo sma rt R -ser ies camer as (L181 2A). T op P oin ts Abou t B a t teri es z Ne w r ec har geab le batte r ie s ar e ship ped p arti all y c har ged . Lithiu m ion r e ch argeable b att eri es mu st be fully char g ed be fo re fi rst u s e o r i f u n use d for 2 mo n th s . z If you do n ot inte nd to use you r c am er a for exten de d pe r iod s o f time (mo r e t han tw o m on th s) , HP r e comm ends t hat y ou r emo v e the batte ry unle ss yo u ar e u sin g a r echa rgeable bat ter y and a re leav in g the camera dock e d or con nec ted to an HP A C powe r adapter . z Wh en inserting the ba ttery in the cam er a , alw ay s be sur e t o orient th e bat te r y as d i r ec te d b y th e ma r k i ngs in th e b at ter y com partmen t . If the batt ery is inserte d i mp r ope rl y , the com partmen t doo r ma y c los e bu t the camer a wi ll no t oper a te .
15 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l z Y ou m igh t no tice that occasi onal ly the batte r y ga uge w ill f lu ctua te w ith the same batte ry . T his occ ur s beca u se some oper a ti ng modes, such as Live V i ew o r vid e o re c o rd i n g, consum e mor e po w er than othe r modes. This w ill ca use the bat ter y gauge to i ndic ate that y ou r bat ter y lev el is lower , becau se batt ery oper ating tim e in th ose m odes is short er . W hen y ou sw itc h t o a m ode t ha t r eq uir es le ss po w er , lik e Pl ay b a c k , the batte ry ga uge m ay g o u p , indi cating t hat th er e is mor e o per ating time le ft in the ba t te r y if y ou st ay in that mod e. Extending B a t ter y Lif e He r e ar e some tips f or e xten ding batte r y life: z T u r n off th e Ima ge D isp la y an d u se the vi e wfi nde r ins tea d when fr a mi ng pictur es and v ideo. Leav e th e Imag e D isplay off whene ver pos sib le . z Change th e L i v e V ie w a t P o w er On s etting in the Setup Men u to Li ve Vi ew O f f , so th at your camera does not po wer on in Li ve View (s ee L iv e V ie w at P o w er On on pag e 104 ) . z Minimi z e the us e of fl ash b y setting y our camer a to Au t o Fl a s h , i ns tead of Fl a s h O n (se e Setti ng t he F l as h on page 4 1) . z Us e optical z oom only when ne cessary to mi nimi z e mo v ing t he len s (see Op tical Z oom on page 4 0) . z Minimi z e unnecessary po w er c y cling . If y ou e xpect to av er age mor e th an t w o pi ctu re e very f iv e mi nutes, le av e the camer a on w ith the I mage Displa y o ff , r athe r tha n tu rning o ff t he ca mer a af ter eac h sh ot . T his minimi z es t he n umbe r o f times the lens must e xtend and r etrac t.
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 1 5 3 z Use th e H P A C pow er adapter or opt ional H P P hotosm ar t R -seri es do c k w hen the c amera will b e on for e x tended pe r i ods o f time , suc h a s w hen y ou tr ans fe r im age s t o y our computer o r when pr inting. Safet y Precau tions for Usin g L i th i u m Io n Batt e r ie s z Do not pla ce the bat tery i n f ir e or heat the ba tter y . z Do n ot conne ct the positi ve ter minal and the n egati v e termi n a l of the ba t ter y to e ach ot he r with a ny m e tal o bjec t (suc h as w ir e) . z Do not c arr y o r sto r e th e bat te r y to g ethe r with c oi ns, necklaces, hairpins, or other metal obj e cts. Plac ing a li thiu m ion batter y with coin s is espe c ial l y danger ous to the user! T o a v oi d inj ury , do not dr op t his ba t te ry into a c hange-f ille d po ck et . z Do not p ier ce the batte r y w ith nails , str ike the b attery w ith a hammer , step on t he bat tery , or other w i se s ubj e ct it to st r ong im pacts or sh ock s. z Do n ot so lde r dir ectl y on to the battery . z Do not e x p ose th e bat ter y to water or sa l t wate r , or al low the b at te r y to get wet . z Do n ot d isas sem bl e or modify t he ba ttery . T he batt ery contai ns safet y an d pr ote ction dev ices, wh i ch, if damaged, may c ause th e ba t ter y to g en er ate he at , explod e , or ign ite. z Imme diately disc ontinue use of the ba tter y if , while usi ng , chargin g , or stor i ng the bat ter y , th e bat ter y emi ts an unusual sm el l , feels ex ces siv ely hot (note that it i s nor ma l f or the b at ter y to fe el war m ) , ch a nges c o lor or sh ape, or appe ars ab normal in an y other wa y .
154 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual z In the e v en t th e ba t t ery l eaks an d the fl ui d ge ts int o o ne âs ey e, d o n o t ru b t h e eye . Ri n s e we l l wi t h wa t e r a n d imm ed iately seek medica l ca r e . If lef t untr eated, the ba tter y fluid could cause dama ge to th e e ye . Battery P erf or manc e The follo wing tabl e s ho ws how the r ech a r ge able HP Ph ot osmart R0 7 lithium ion batte ry perf or ms in dif f er ent typ es o f us e scen ar io s: A t low t e mper atures, batter y perfor ma nce may be r ed uced. Under these condit ions, y ou may be able to r ev iv e the bat ter y b y w ar ming it in a p ock et immedi at el y bef or e u se . H o we ve r , ensure th at th er e ar e no m eta llic i tems i n th e p ocke t that coul d cau se a shor t c ir cuit . Ty p e o f u s e Pe r f o r m a n c e M o st e conomical (mo r e than 30 pi ctur es p er mont h) Good M ost economi ca l (fe w er than 30 pictur es per mo nth) Good Hea vy us e of f la sh , f r eq uen t p ic tur es Good Hea vy us e o f v id eo Good Hea vy us e o f Live View Good Ove r all batte ry lif e Good Lo w temper atur e /win ter use Fa i r Inf r eq uen t u se ( w it ho ut do ck ) Fa i r Inf r equ en t u se ( w it h do c k) Goo d Spar e batter y (fo r long-term s tor age) Po o r W ant to r e char ge b attery Y es
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 1 5 5 Nu mb er o f Sh ot s pe r Battery Char ge The follo wing tabl e s how s th e min imu m , m aximum, and av er age number of shots that may be obtai ned using the r echa rgeable HP Ph otosmar t R 0 7 l ithi u m ion bat tery . In th e abo v e ta ble , plea se no te th at: z T h e minim u m n umber of shot s is o bt ain ed w it h e xt en si v e u se of Li v e V i e w (30 se cond s pe r pi ctu r e) and Pl ay b a ck (15 secon ds pe r p ictu r e) , an d Fl a s h O n . Optical zoom (both dir e ctions) is used on 7 5 % of shots. Fo u r p ictu r es a r e tak en per sess ion with at le ast 5 m i nutes of f bet ween s ess ions. z T h e max imu m n umbe r o f sho ts is o bt ain ed w it h mini mal u se of Li v e V i e w (2 5% o f pi ctu r e s f or 10 s eco nds) and Pl ay b a ck ( 4 sec on ds p er pict ur e ) . Flash i s used on 25% of s hots, an d optical z oom ( both di r ections) is used on 25% of shot s . F ou r p i ctur es ar e t ak en pe r s es sio n w ith at le as t 5 min ute s o ff bet w een s essions. z Th e av er age number of shots is obtained with Live V iew u sed f or 5 0% o f t he p ic tur es f or 15 seco n ds, an d Pl a yb a c k us e d f or 8 seconds per p ictur e . F l a s h is used on 5 0% of shots, and opt ical zoom (b oth directions) is used on 50% of shot s. F our pi ct u r es a r e ta k en per sess ion with at le ast 5 minute s off bet w e en session s. Minimum nu m b er o f s hot s Maxi mum number of shots Appr o x i mate numb er of shots under aver age use 115 2 60 200
156 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Battery Gauge T he f oll o w ing ba ttery le v els ma y be disp la y ed o n th e st atu s scr een, in Live V i ew , in Pl ayback , and w hen th e came r a is connect ed to a com pute r or pr inter. NO TE T he ba ttery ga ug e is mo st a c c ur ate afte r a f e w min ut es o f us e . W hen the came r a is tu rn ed o ff , th e batt ery r eco v ers a nd the initi al gaug e r eading w hen t he camer a is turned on a gai n may not be as accurate as that obta in ed af ter a fe w mi nu tes of use. Ico n Desc r ipti on Ba t te r y h as 6 5-100 per cen t battery lif e r emaining . Batter y has 35-6 5 p er cent bat tery l ife r emain ing. Battery has 10 -3 5 per c ent b attery lif e r emaining . Batter y has l ess than 10 per cent battery l if e r ema in ing. Cam er a will po wer do wn soon. Li ve View is disabled (see Note belo w) . Cam e r a is oper ating on A C pow er (w ith no batte r y install e d) . Ani ma ted battery f illing u p Cam e ra is oper ating on A C power and is c h ar ging th e b at ter y . Camer a has successfull y com pleted battery char ging and is operating on A C power .
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 1 5 7 NO TE When y ou remo v e the batt er y fr om the c amera , the date a nd tim e set t in gs ar e pr es er v e d f or appro ximately 10 minu tes . If the camer a is w it hou t a ba t te r y f o r lo nger tha n 10 m inu tes, the clo ck i s set to the last da te a nd t ime at which the cam era w as used. Y ou ma y b e pr ompted to updat e the da te and tim e the next ti m e you p o wer on the camer a. R e c ha r g i ng th e Li th i u m Io n Battery Th e r echargea b le H P P hotosmar t R 0 7 li thi um ion ba ttery c an be r e ch ar ged in t he cam er a w hen the camer a is connec ted to the HP A C po wer ada pter or opt ion a l HP Phot os mart R -seri es do ck . T he l ithium i on ba ttery can al so be r echa rg ed w it h the optional H P Photosm art bat tery quick r e charger or in the spare bat tery b ay of the HP Photosmar t R - ser ies do ck . Se e Appe ndix B : Pu rc h a s i n g C a m e ra Ac c e s s o ri e s on p age 161. When th e HP A C adapter i s used to charge t he b att er y and the cam er a is off , the P o wer/Memor y light on the b ack of t he cam era w il l bl in k du r in g chargin g. When the do ck is used, the dock light wil l bli nk. W h en t he quick r echarger is used , the lig ht on th e quick recharger will be y el low . The foll o win g table shows th e av erage ti me i t ta k es to recha r ge a bat ter y th at has be en fully dis char g ed, depend in g on wher e t he ba t t ery is bein g c har ged . T he ta bl e also not es the sig nal y ou w ill s ee w he n t he ba tte ry h a s bee n r e ch ar ged .
158 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual If you w ill not be usi ng y our camer a imme d iat ely af ter charging t he bat ter y , we r ec omm end that y ou le ave the c amera in th e do ck or pl ugge d in to the HP A C adapter . The camera will top of f the ba tte r y periodic ally to en su r e tha t the c a mera i s alwa y s r e ady for us e . Some things t o k eep in mind wh en us ing a lithium ion ba ttery ar e as follow s: z T he f irst time tha t yo u u se a ne w lithium i on ba ttery , be sur e th at y ou f ull y c har ge it bef or e using it in the cam er a . z A li thiu m ion batter y discha r ges when not in u s e , whether it is inst all ed in a came r a or no t . If a lith ium i on battery h as not been used for mor e th a n t wo months, r echarge it befor e u sing it aga in. E ve n if y ou ar e no t using your ba t t ery , it is a g o o d i d e a t o c h a r g e i t e ve r y s ix m o n t h s t o a y e a r t o p ro l o n g its u se ful lif e . Wher e ba ttery is char ged Ave ra g e ch arge ti m e Signal w hen char ging has completed In cam er a w it h HP A C pow er ad apt er co nnec t ed o r w hil e camer a is in t he dock 4 -6 hour s P o wer/Mem ory ligh t on camer a (or t he P o w er li ght on the dock) stops blinking and tur ns on solid . O n the Image Displa y of the ca mer a , the battery gauge changes to . In batter y bay o f dock 2 .5- 3. 5 hour s Sp a r e b att ery li g ht on doc k stop s blinking and tur ns on In HP q ui ck re c h a rg e r 1 hour or le ss L ight on qui ck r echar ger tur ns gr een
App endix A : M ana gi ng Bat teri es 1 5 9 z The performance of all r ech ar g eabl e bat ter ies, incl udi ng lit hiu m ion, w il l de gr a de ov er ti me, espe c ially if they ar e stor ed and used at high temper atures. If bat tery l ife has bec om e unac cept ably r educ ed o ver ti me , r ep lace the bat ter y with an H P Photosm art R0 7 l ith iu m ion bat ter y for HP Photo sma rt R -ser ies camer as (L181 2A). z The cam era , th e do ck, or the quick r e charger may be w a rm w hile ope r ating and char ging a lit hium io n batte ry . T his is norm a l. z A li th iu m ion b at tery ca n be left i n t he ca mera , the do ck , or the quick r ech arger fo r any per iod of t ime without h a r m to t he batte ry or the came r a , the doc k , or the q ui ck r echa r ger . Al wa y s st or e c har ged batte r ie s in a cool locati on . Safet y Precau tions f o r Rec h arging L i th i u m Io n Batt e r ie s z Do n ot c ha r ge an y batte ry ot he r t han t he HP Ph ot osma rt R0 7 l ith i u m ion b att er y i n th e cam e r a , th e dock, or th e quick re c h a rg e r . z In s ert th e l i thi u m io n b at te r y i n the co rr ec t o r ien tat ion in the cam era , th e dock, or the quick r e charger . z U se the came r a, t he do c k , o r t he q ui c k r ech ar g er i n a dry loca tion on ly . z Do n ot c har ge a lit h ium ion b atte r y in a hot lo cati on , su ch as in di r e ct sunl ig ht or near a fir e. z W hen r ec har ging a lithiu m io n batte ry , do no t cov er the cam era , th e dock, or the quick r e charger i n a ny w ay . z Do n ot operate the c amera , t he do ck , or the quick r ech arger if th e li th iu m ion b att er y appe ars da mage d in an y wa y .
160 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual z Do n ot d isas semb le t he cam er a, th e doc k , or the q u i c k re c h a rg e r . z Unpl ug the H P A C pow er adapt er or the quick r ech arger fr om th e elect r ical outlet befor e cle a nin g the po wer adapter or q u ic k r echarger . z After exte ns ive use , th e li th i um ion ba t ter y ma y b eg i n to s w ell . If it be comes diff ic ul t to in sert t he battery int o or r emo v e th e ba tte ry f r om t he came r a , th e d oc k , o r the qui c k r ech ar ger , disco ntin ue u se of the b attery an d r epl ace it wit h a n e w o ne . P lea se r ecy cle th e o ld b att ery . Sleep T im e -out for P o we r C onser v a tion T o cons erve battery po w er , the Ima ge Dis pla y tur ns off au to matica ll y if the r e is no b utt on acti vity f or 60 secon ds, and the ca m er a s huts down af ter 5 m inu tes. Whe n t he ca me r a i s in t his â sleep â st at e , pr essing an y butt on w il l w ak e u p t he came r a agai n . If no but tons are pressed du r i ng the s le ep st ate, the came r a w ill tur n off aft er a n additi onal 5 min ut es , u nles s it is con nec ted to a c omputer , pr i nter , or HP A C po wer adapter .
App endix B : Pur chas i ng Cam era Ac ce ssories 16 1 Appe ndi x B : P urc h a si n g C am era Accessori es Y ou can pur cha se ad ditiona l accesso r ies f or y our camer a. F or i nfor mat ion on your HP R50 7/ R60 7 and c ompat ible acce ssor ie s, g o to: z ww w .hp .com/ go/m yh pcamer a (US ) z ww w .hp .ca/m yhpcame r a (Ca n ada) z www . hp .c o m (all ot her cou ntr ies ) T o purc hase acc essor ies, vis it your loca l retailer or order onli ne at: z www . hp sh op p in g . co m (U S) z www . hp sh op p in g . ca (Can ada) z w w w .hp . com /eur/h pop tions (Europe) z w w w . hp . com /ap ac/ home andof f ice (A s ia P a ci fic )
16 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Som e acce ss or i es f or this di gital cam er a ar e as f ollo ws: z HP Phot os mart R -s er ies do ck â C888 7A Ch ar ge y ou r came r a's ba ttery plu s a s par e in t he e x tr a ch ar ging ba y , so y our ca mer a is al w a y s r ead y t o go . T r ans fe r ph ot os ea sil y to y ou r computer , send photo e -ma il s vi a H P I nst ant S hare , or pr i nt photos at the touch of a but ton. Connect to y our T V and v i ew p hoto slid esho ws w ith the r emot e contr ol . Inc lud es a doc k w it h e xtr a c har ging b ay f or a lithium io n bat ter y , a r e mote control , a rechargeable HP Ph otosmar t R0 7 lit hi um ion bat tery , a n aud io/video c able , a US B c abl e , and an HP A C p ow er a dapter (N orth Am eri ca on ly) . z HP Phot osma rt Q uic k Re cha r ge Kit f or HP Photosmar t R - s e ri e s c a m e ra s âL1810 A ( Not av a ilabl e in Latin Amer ica) One- hour r ec ha r ging of the lithium ion battery , plus pr ot ection for y our HP Phot os mart R - ser ies c amer a. Includes all y ou need t o p r o vi de a h ome a w a y f r o m ho me f or y our camer a: an ult r a -lig ht weight r e ch arger , a ca mera case, a tr av el pouch , and a r e ch argeable H P Ph oto s ma rt R0 7 lit hi um ion bat ter y . z Rec ha r g eable HP Photosm ar t R0 7 li thiu m ion b at ter y f or HP Photosmar t R -ser ies ca m er as âL18 12A Hi g h- cap acit y ba tter y that can be r echa rged hund r ed s of times .
App endix B : Pur chas i ng Cam era Ac ce ssories 1 63 z HP Photosma rt 3 .3V A C po wer adap ter for HP Photosma rt R - s e ri e s c a m e ra s âC8912 B ( Not av a ilable in Lati n Am er ica) This is the only p ow er a dapter s upport ed fo r use with R - s e ri e s c a m e ra s. z HP Phot osma rt SD memor y c ar ds (Nor th Amer ica only) (F or import ant in for mat ion about s upporte d t ypes of memor y ca r ds, see Stor age on page 16 7 .) ⢠HP Pho to smart 64 M B SD m em ory c ar d âC88 9 6 A ⢠HP Photosmart 128 MB SD memor y cardâC889 7A ⢠HP Photo sma rt 25 6 MB SD memory cardâL1813 A ⢠HP Photo sma rt 512 MB SD memory car d âL181 4A z HP Phot os mart premium case for HP Photo s mar t R -ser ies came r as âL1811A Pr ote ct y ou r HP Phot o smart R -se ri es came r a w ith th is padde d le ather c ase . Des igne d to fit H P d igit al ca mer as, the case feat ur es an eas y-ac c ess magnet ic closu r e , stor age pouch for memor y ca r ds, e xt r a bat ter ies, an d mor e . z www . ca s es on l in e .c om âGo to www . ca se so n li ne . com to de sig n y ou r o wn c ust om cas e to f it y our H P Pho tosm art R - ser ies c a mer a. Ch o ose th e st yle , materi a l , and c olor for y our camer a ca se .
164 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual
Ap pe ndix C : Sp eci f ic at ion s 165 Appe ndi x C : Spe c ifi c a tions Fe a t u re Desc r iption Res o l ut io n Sti ll pict u res: ⢠4. 2 3 MP (2 408 b y 17 5 8) t ot al pi x el co unt ⢠4.05 MP (2 3 2 0 by 17 4 4) effectiv e pi x el co unt Vide o cl ip s : ⢠2 88 by 21 6 total pi x el co unt Sensor Diagonal 7 .2 mm (1/ 2 .5-inch , 4:3 f or mat) CCD Color depth 3 6 bit (12 bits b y 3 color s) Lens F ocal length: ⢠Wi deâ 5 .8 mm ⢠T el ephot oâ17 .4 mm ⢠3 5 mm equi valen t appr o x imat ely 3 5 mm - 105 mm F- N u m b e r : ⢠Wi deâ f/ 2 .6 to f/ 4.3 ⢠T el ephot oâf/4.8 to f/7 .6 Lens thr eads None View find er Zooming optical v i ewf inder , 3x magnifi c atio n w ithout di opter adj ust Zoom 3x opti c al , 7x di gital z oom
166 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Fo c u s TTL a ut o f oc u s . F o c us settings: ⢠Normal (d efa ul t)â auto focu s r an ge of 40 cm (16 in) t o infini ty ⢠Ma cr oâ auto f o cu s r ange of 18 cm to 50 cm ( 7 in to 20 in) at all z oom positions ⢠Super M acr oâ6 c m to 25 cm (2 .5 in to 10 i n) z F ocus settin gs: Nor m al F ocu s (de f aul t), Mac r o , Su per Mac r o Shutt er speed 1/2000 t o 16 secon ds Tr i p o d m o u n t Ye s Built-in f la s h Y es , 2 .5-second typi cal r echar ge tim e Ex te rnal flash No Fl as h s e t t i n g s Fl a s h O f f , Auto F lash (def ault), Re d - E ye , Fl a s h On , Night Image Displa y 1. 5-inch co lor ac ti ve matr i x, 120, 480 pi xe ls (50 2 b y 2 40) Fe a t u re Desc r iption
Ap pe ndix C : Sp eci f ic at ion s 16 7 Storag e z 3 2 MB inter nal f lash memory , w ith appro xim at ely 2 7 M B for s torag e of im ag e s z Slot for me mo r y c a r d z T his camer a su pports both Sec ure Di gital (SD) and MultiMediaCar d TM (MMC ) mem ory ca r ds 8 MB and lar ge r . Only MMC cards that have been verif ied compliant to th e MultiM ediaCar d specification are supported. C ompl iant MMC memory card s have the MultiMediaCar d logo on the card or package. z SD c ards ar e r ecommended , as t he y ar e fa ste r t han M MC car ds at r eading and wr iting dat a . z T his camer a ma y support memory car ds up to 2 GB, though HP h as only tested up to 5 12 M B. Car ds lar ger t han 2 GB w ill not w or k. A hi gh capacity ca r d itsel f doe s not af f ect c amer a perf o rmanc e, bu t a lar ge number o f fil es (o v er 300) does affect the time it tak es for t he ca mer a to t urn o n. z T he number o f ima ges that can be sav ed in memo ry de p en ds on the Image Quality set ti ngs (see Mem ory C apa c ity o n page 1 71) . Image c a ptu r e options z St i ll (default) z Self - T imer â still pictur e or v ideo clip tak e n after 10-s econd de lay z Self - Time r - 2 shots âs t il l pic tu re ta ken a f ter 10-s econd de la y , then a secon d pi ctur e tak en abou t 3 seconds later . Singl e v ideo tak en afte r 10-second del ay . z Burst âc amer a tak es appr o x imat ely 5 shots in a r ow a s qui ckl y as it possibl y can until th e buff er is fu l l z Vid e o â2 4 f r ames per se cond ( include s a udio), until t he camer a r uns out of memo r y Fe a t u re Desc r iption
168 HP Photosmart R 50 7 /R 60 7 Userâs Ma nual Audio captur e z St i ll pi ct u res âm aximu m of 6 0 se co nds c a n b e re c o r d e d z Burst âaudio ca ptur e not av ailable z Vid e o cl i p s â a u d i o i s re c o rd e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y Shooting modes Au to (def ault ) , Action , L a ndscape , Po r t r a i t , Beac h/Sno w , Sunset , A p e r t u re P ri o ri t y , Pa n o r a m a Image Qual ity settings z 4MP z 4MP (def aul t) z 2MP z VGA z Cust om... I mage Quality (R eso lutio n and Comp r ess ion) set t ings Expos ur e Comp e nsa tion settings Can be set ma nuall y fr om -3. 0 to 3. 0 E V (Ex posure V a lue ) in 1/3 EV incr ements. Whi te Bala nce settings A uto (def ault) , Sun , Shade , T ungst e n , F luor es c ent , Manual AE Met er ing settings A v er a ge , Center - W e ighted (default) , Spot I S O S peed settings A ut o (d ef ault),100, 200, 400 Adapti ve Light i ng settings Off (d ef ault) , Low , High Colo r settings F ull Col or (def a ult) , Blac k & White , Sep ia Satur ation settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault ) , High Sh ar pn es s settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault ) , High Fe a t u re Desc r iption
Ap pe ndix C : Sp eci f ic at ion s 1 6 9 Date & T ime Impr int settings Off (de f ault), Date Onl y , Date & T ime P lay back ma g n i fica t ion Magnif ie s a still image t o 130x on the Ima ge Dis p la y Compr ession fo rm a t z JPE G (EXIF ) fo r still images z MPEG1 for vi de o clips In ter f ace s z USB M ini-AB r e ceptacle; allow s USB ( A to Mini- B) to a co mp ut er o r US B (M in i -A to B ) to c erta i n pr inte rs (an y HP Phot osmar t or P i ctBr i dge- com patible p rin te rs) z DC inp u t 3 . 3 Vdc @ 2 5 00 mA z HP P hotosmart R-ser ies d ock Or ie n ta ti on Sensor Ye s Standar ds z PTP tran sfer (1 57 4 0) z MSDC tr a nsfer z NT S C/P A L z JPE G z MPEG1 z DPOF 1.1 z EXIF 2 .2 z DCF 1.0 z Pi c t B r i d g e 1 . 0 z US B 2. 0 Fe a t u re Desc r iption
17 0 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l Po w e r T y pi cal po wer u sage: 2 .3 W atts (w ith image L CD on) . 4 W atts max imum pow er usage . P o w er sour ces in clude: z On e r e c ha rgeab le H P P h otos ma r t R 0 7 li th i um ion b a tt er y for HP Ph otosm a r t R - series ca m eras (L1812A ) . R echar gea ble battery can be r echar ged in t he camer a using th e HP A C po we r ada pt er or op t iona l H P P ho tos m ar t R - s eri e s doc k. z HP A C pow er ada pte r (3. 3 Vdc, 2 500 mA, 8.25 W ) z Opti onal HP Phot osmar t R -ser ie s dock R echar ging in cam er a w ith the HP A C pow er adapter or optio na l HP Photosmart R -ser ies doc k : av er age char ge time 4 -6 hou r s. Ext er nal bod y dimensions M easur ements wit h cam er a o f f and lens r etract ed: 90 mm (L) b y 2 8 m m (W) b y 5 9 m m (H) 3 . 5 in ( L) b y 1.1 in (W) b y 2 . 3 in (H) We i g h t 13 2 g r a ms (0.2 9 pounds) w ithout batte r y Te m p e r a t u r e ra n g e Oper ational: 0 t o 5 0° C (3 2 to 12 2° F ) at 15 t o 8 5% r el ati v e humi dity Storage : -30 t o 6 5° C (- 22 to 14 9° F) a t 15 t o 90% r elati ve h u mi dit y W a rra n t y 1 y ear li mit ed w ar r an ty b ac k e d b y HP C us t ome r Suppo rt Fe a t u re Desc r iption
Ap pe ndix C : Sp eci f ic at ion s 17 1 Memo r y Capacity Th e follo wing table l ist s the appr ox ima te numb er and aver a ge si z e of still image s that can be s tor ed in the int er nal me mory in the ca me r a when the c am era is set to di f fer ent I ma ge Q ua li t y sett in gs av a ilabl e in the Captu r e Men u . NO TE Not a ll 3 2 MB o f in ter nal me mo ry is a v aila ble beca u se so me is u sed f or in te r nal came r a ope r a tio ns . A lso , th e ac tual f ile si z es an d nu mber o f still im ages th at can b e st or ed in th e in ter nal memory in the came r a o r on a n optional memor y c ar d will vary , dep ending on the conten t o f ea c h still i mag e. 4MP 11 imag es (2 .4 MB each) 4MP (defa u lt) 2 2 images (1. 2 MB each ) 2MP 45 image s (600 KB ea ch) VGA 2 6 5 images (100 KB eac h)
17 2 HP P hotosmart R 50 7 /R60 7 Userâs M anua l
In d e x 17 3 Index A AC power adapter attaching fe rrite to cord 15 conne c tor on came r a 25 purchasing 163 ac cess ories f or camer a 161 Action mode, s etting 46 Adaptive Lighting, setting 62 AE M ete rin g restore s etting 6 1 setting 60 AF view fin d er li ght 21 Aper ture Prio rity (Av ) m ode, setting 47 aperture, setting 4 7 arrow buttons on Con tr oll e r 23 audio clips playback 70 reco rd 32 , 83 automatic exp osure, ove rride 45 Av Aper tu re Pr ior ity mod e, setting 47 B battery door on camera 26 ext end lif e of 152 gauge 156 install 14 performance 1 5 4 purchasing lithium ion 162 quick r echarge k it 162 recharging lithium ion 157 shots per charge 155 top points about use 151 Beach & Snow mode, setting 46 blinking lights on camera 21, 25 brackets in Live View s creen 36 brightening an image 51 Bu rst button 23 using 45 buttons on camera 21 buying camera accessories 161 C calibrating color of images 58 came ra purc h asin g a c cess o rie s for 161 purchasing case for 163 rese t 1 12 self-diagnosti c te st 143 specifications 1 65 turn on/ off 17 came ra acce sso rie s 161 came ra d ock conne c tor on camera 26 description 11 dock insert 12 purchasing 162 camera me nus 27 camera parts back of camera 21 front, side, and bottom of came ra 25 top of camera 24
17 4 Index Camer a Soun ds, s etting 1 04 came ra sta tes 2 6 capacity of inte rnal memory 1 71 Capture Menu Help for menu options 51 res tore se ttings 51 using 50 cas e for cam era , purchasing 163 Color of images restore s etting 6 4 setting 64 comp res sion f orma t 169 comp ressi on sett ings, cus tom 56 comp uter, conn ect came ra to 97 conne c tion s as a Picture Transfer Protocol (PT P) d ev ic e 10 6 as a USB Mass Stor a ge Device Class (MSDC) 106 to comp uter 97 to printer 1 00 conne c tors AC power adapter 25 came ra d ock 26 USB 2 5 conse rving batt ery li f e 152 Con trol ler with a rrow b uttons, description 23 cro ssh airs i n vie w find er 36 cust omer supp ort 144 D darkeni ng an i m age 51 Date & T ime Imprint 67 Date & Ti me, settin g 18, 1 05 Delete 79 delete during Instant Review 31 diagnostic test 143 digital zoom 40 direct print printing images from camera to printer/ computer 100 selecting image s 72 disk drive, camera as 1 06 E erro r mes sa ges on camera 130 on computer 140 EV Compensati on restor e setting 52 setting 51 extending batte ry life 15 2 F ferrite , attaching to HP AC power adapter cord 15 flas h description 25 restor e setting 42 set ti ng s 4 1 using 41 Flash button, description 23 F-num ber, s etting 4 7 focu s brackets, using 36 came ra shak e 40 lock 38 Macro se tting 38 Norm al Foc u s set ting 38 rang e 166 search priority 39 set ti ng s 3 8 Supe r Mac ro sett ing 3 9
17 5 Index form at internal memory 79 memory card 79 G gauge, battery 1 56 H Help f or Ca ptu re Me nu options 51 help from cust ome r support 144 Help M enu , usin g 29 HP AC power adapter attaching fe rrite to cord 15 conne c tor on came r a 25 purchasing 163 HP Image Zone softw a re installing 1 9 not usi ng 113 HP Instant Share customizing the HP Instant Share Menu 86 description 11, 85 HP Instant Share button 2 3, 86 selecti ng all images 92 selecti ng indiv idual images 93 turn on/ off 86 using the HP In stant Share Men u 9 0 HP Instant Share button 86 HP Instant Share Menu customizing 86 description 91 selecti ng all images 92 selecti ng indiv idual images 93 set up 86 using 90 HP web sit es 14 4 I Imag e A dv ice , us in g 81 Ima ge Di sp la y description 23 Live View at P ow er O n setting 104 Live View button 2 3 stat u s scr ee n 29 using 35 Imag e Inf o, us in g 8 1 Ima ge Qu a lity setting 52 setting cus tom 5 5 images Adaptive Lighti ng 62 AE Meter ing settin g 60 brightening 51 Color setting 64 colo r tint 58 Custom Image Quality setting 55 darkeni ng 5 1 Date & T ime Imprint 67 Image Qua lity setting 52 ISO Speed setting 59 magnifying 74 number remaining 36, 72 number saved in internal memory 171 Panorama mode 48 reco rd aud io c lips 3 2 Rotate 84 Saturation s etting 65 Sharpness setting 66 shooting modes 45 thumbnails view 73
17 6 Index too dark/light 51 transferrin g camer a to compute r 97 Wh ite Ba lan c e setti ng 57 install battery 14 memory card 13 sof twa re 19 , 20 wrist strap 12 internal memory form at 79 image capaci ty of 17 1 pictures remaining 36 ISO Sp e ed restore s etting 6 0 setting 59 L Landscape mode, setting 4 6 Lan gu ag e change setting 108 choose at first startup 17 LEDs (ligh ts ) on cam e ra AF li ght 21 Self-Timer light 25 Video light 21 li f e of battery , conserv ing 152 lithium ion battery purchasing 162 rech argi ng 157 safety precautions 153 Liv e Vie w button 23 using 35 Live View at P ow er O n setting 104 lo ng ex po sur es , nois e red uction 47 M Macintos h computer conne ct to 97 install sof tware 20 USB s etting on c amera 1 06 Ma cro focus s etting 3 8 Magn ify contr ol on Zoom l ever 2 2 using 74 magnifying images 74 Man ual Whit e B ala nce, setting 58 mem ory c ard door on camera 26 form at 79 install 13 pictures remaining 36, 72 supported types and sizes 167 mem ory, inte rnal form at 79 image capaci ty of 171 Menu/OK button, description 23 menus Capture 50 Help 29 HP Instant Share 90 overvie w 27 Playback 75 Setup 1 03 message s on camera 130 on computer 140 microphone, description 25 Mod e button 24 Mo ve Image s to C ard 1 08
177 Inde x N noise r eduction, long exp osu re s 4 7 Norm al Foc u s set ting 38 number of images in internal memory 171 number of pictures remaining 36, 7 2 O ON/OFF switc h, descri p ti on 22 onli ne Help for Capture Menu options 51 optical zoom 40 over-exposing an image 51 override automatic exposure 45 P Panorama mode Preview Panorama 84 setting 47 using 48 parts of camera back of camera 21 front, side, and bottom of came ra 25 top of camera 24 performance, battery 154 pictures reco rd aud io cl ips 3 2 sha re 8 5 take self-timer 43 take stills 31 Playback button, description 23 Playback Menu, using 75 Playback, us ing 70 Portra it mod e, se ttin g 46 power battery level icons 156 specifications 1 70 turn on/ off 17 power adapter, HP AC attaching fe rrite to cord 15 conne c tor on camera 25 purchasing 163 Power ON/OFF switch, description 22 Preview Panorama 84 Print button description 23 using 72 print images directly to printer 100 selecting images for direct print 72 using HP Instant Sh are 85 problems, troubleshooting 111 product support 1 44 purchasing camera ac cess ories 1 61 R rang e Exposur e Compensati on 168 F- num b er 16 5 focu s 1 66 foc us sett ings 38 recharging lithium ion battery 157 reco rd audio clips 32, 83 vid eo c lip s 3 4 red -ey e r educ ti on description 43 Remove Re d Eyes 80
17 8 Index remaining pictures count 36, 72 rese t cam era 11 2 Reset S ettings 10 9 resolution s ettings, cu stom 56 reviewing images 7 0 rotate image s 84 S safety prec autions for lithium ion battery 153 Saturation restore s etting 6 5 setting 65 se l ec tin g im a g es for dire ct pri nt 72 for HP Instant Share destinations 93 Self- Timer button 23 light 2 5 using 43 settings rese t 1 09 resto re C ap tu re Me nu 51 Setu p Menu, using 103 share pictures 85 Sharpness restore s etting 6 7 setting 66 shooting mode button 24 setting 45 Shutter button description 24 lock exposure and focus 36 shutter s peed ra nge 166 sof tw are install 19 using camera without 113 soun ds of cam era 10 4 space remain ing in me mory 36, 72 spe ak er , de sc rip tio n 2 4 specifications 1 65 state s, ca m era 26 stat u s scr ee n 29 still pict u res, take 31 Sunset mode, sett ing 47 Supe r Mac ro foc us set ting 39 su ppo rt f or us er s 14 4 T te chn ical supp ort 144 Thumbnails contr ol on Zoom l ever 2 2 vie w in g 73 Time & D ate, settin g 18 , 1 05 Timer/ Burst button 23 total images s u mmary scre en 72 tr ansf er im ages to c omp uter 97 tripod m ount, desc ription 26 troubleshoot problems 111 turn on/ off power 17 TV (television) Configuration setting 107 U under-exposing an image 51 USB configuration s etting 106 conne c tor on camera 25
17 9 Index V Video button, description 2 4 vid eo c lip s playback 70 reco rd 34 Video viewfinder light 21 vie wfi nd er cro ssh airs 36 description 21 lights 21 using 36 W web si tes for HP 144 White B alanc e restore s etting 5 8 setting 57 Windows computer conne ct to 97 install sof tware 19 wrist s tr ap, attaching to came ra 12 Z zoom digital 4 0 optical 40 specifications 1 65 Zoom lever, description 22 Zoom Out and Zoom In cont rols 22